THROUGH
The
CURTAIN

By
Viola Petitt Neal, Ph.D.

and

Shafica Karagulla, M.D., M.R.C.P.Ed., D.P.M.

DeVorss & Company, Publisher
Box 550
Marina del Rey, California 90294
Copyright ° 1983 by Shafica Karagulla, M.D

(txt is NOT proof-read-mistakes may be in txt here!
this is ocr via https://www.pdf2go.com)

Copyright ° 1983 by Shafica Karagulla, M.D. All rights reserved in-
cluding the right to reproduce this book or portions thereof, in any
form, except for the inclusion of brief quotations in a review. All in-
quiries should be addressed to DeVorss & Co., P.O. Box 550, Marina
ilel Rey, California 90294.

ISBN: 0-87516-517-6

Library of Congress Card Catalog Number: 83-071171

Printed in the United States of America

Shamballa*

Shamballa, Holy City of our dreams,

To which we journey,

Knowing that its gates,

Swing open,

To receive returning pilgrims

From the world of Form.

Home city of the Self,

Whose pilgrimage through matter and
through Form,

Throughout long eons,

In the realms of time and space,

Bestows Divinity.

And we become His Co-creators,

In God’s City of Creative Life.

From Fragments of Experience—A Spiritual
Journey by Viola Petitt Neal

VIOLA PETITT NEAL, Ph.D.
1907-1981

"A Senzar or Sanskrit name for the Holy City
On August 7, 1981, the gates of Shamballa swung open to
receive the returning Pilgrim from the world of Form.

Dedicated
to the DIscipLes OF THE SPIRITUAL HIERARCHY
and
AWAKENING HUMANITY
that they may know the source of
 inspiration and knowledge


CONTENTS- see at end.

danish online ed.of this book: https://galactic.no/rune/spesBoker/GennemForhaenget.pdf
audio of the danish editin in mp3 via https://galactic.no/rune/lydboker/may2016upload/gennem_Forhenget/

INTRODUCTION

Little did I know that the year 1930 would bring a
friendship that would last for over fifty years. That was
the year that I met Viola Petitt Neal. She was first my
teacher of physics and mathematics at the American
School for Girls in Beirut, Lebanon, and later a colleague
and collaborator in reasearch and writing.

During the first twenty-five years, although we remained
in constant correspondence, each of us went her own
way —she to Egypt to teach and later to Oxford and Lon-
don to obtain a doctorate in philosophy (Ph.D.) from
London University. Her thesis for her doctorate dealt with
secret religions of the Middle East.

In the meantime, I completed my studies as a physi-
cian and went to Edinburgh University, Scotland, to
receive further training as a neuropsychiatrist. My basic
interest was the study of the human mind in both nor-
mal and abnormal states, trying to find an answer to the
hallucinatory experiences of the insane.

Dr. Wilder Penfield of the Montreal Neurological In-
stitute assisted me in obtaining a Research Fellowship from
McGill University to study hallucinations in temporal lobe
epilepsy and electrical stimulation of the brain in con-
scious patients during surgery. The data was published
in the British Medical Journal and received special
favorable comment from the editor. The research had led

XV
XVI THROUGH THE CURTAIN

me to believe that all of man's experiences were limited
to the physical brain and the five senses.

In 1956, while visiting my old friend Viola Petitt Neal
in Los Angeles, I was challenged to read with an open
mind a few books about the lives of Helena P. Blavatsky,
Alice A. Bailey, and Edgar Cayce—men and women
whose integrity is unquestionable — indicating that they
had had experiences that were neither normal nor abnor-
mal. But how was one to classify such experiences, for they
were not included in my training!

For the first time Dr. Neal revealed to me her own per-
sonal experiences, one of which was that as she was fall-
ing asleep she would see in her mind's eye, in a miniature
form, frames like a moving picture of beautiful flowers,
places and people in very sharp, bright colors. These had
no particular significance in her own personal life.
Reference to this ability and its true meaning is discussed
in one of the night classes.

A second experience was that when she went to sleep
she was aware of being on another dimension attending
lectures on many subjects dealing with both science and
philosophy. She referred to this experience as Night
Classes. Upon awakening, she could recall the lectures the
following morning if she so wished.

Thirdly, she was a student of the ancient wisdom
teaching and an accepted disciple in the Master Jupiter's
Ashram. She had been aware of this since early childhood
and in 1978 dedicated her book of poetry Fragments of
Experience—A Spiritual Journal, to Him (“M.J.”). She
could both perceive at a distance and communicate
telepathically with the Ashram of the Master Jupiter, a
department of the Spiritual Hierarchy of our planet whose
head is the Christ. These abilities were never discussed or
shared except with a handful of her very close friends.
Since her passing [ am permitted to disclose this
Information,

INTRODUCTION XV1i

Needless to say, her confidential disclosure stunned me.
As a researcher of the human mind, I asked for verifica-
tion of some of her experiences. I was allowed to ques-
tion her during her sleep, if I happened to be awake
myself, and if she were attending “night classes.” The
following morning I would try to see if she could recall
the class which I had taped the night before. To my ut-
ter amazement she was able to recall the lecture which
she had attended while asleep, almost verbatim, as the
tape confirmed. In other words she had “continuity of
consciousness” during the waking and sleeping states. As
the accuracy of her recall of night classes became evident,
the taping at night ceased because it was physically
strenuous on both of us.

In my book, Breakthrough to Creativity—Your Higher
Sense Perception, brief reference was made to some peo-
ple who had the ability to attend “night classes.” Letters
were received from readers confirming and describing
similar experiences.

Through the Curtain is the result of the research that
began twenty-two years ago. Only the secretary, Dr. Neal,
and I knew of this research.

Before she passed on in 1981, Dr. Neal had agreed that
the time had come for presenting the data to help students
understand their experiences during sleep. It will also help
the scientist to realize that when he says “I want to sleep
on it,” and wakes up with the answer which he did not
have in his full waking consciousness, perchance he is at-
tending scientific classes during sleep’ and obtaining the
atiswer to his problem from sources other than himself.
low else could one explain the common phenomenon of
# person not being able to find the solution in his full wak-
ing consciousness suddenly finding it after “sleeping on it!”

She chose the title Through the Curtain because each
Hine she went to night classes she had to pass through a
“curtain of energy” to the concrete mental plane. When
XVill THROUGH THE CURTAIN

I asked a question while she was apparently asleep she had
to move in consciousness to the center of this “curtain of
energy” and then back to the concrete mental plane, ask
the teacher the question or listen to what was being said
in class, and return back to the curtain of energy to
describe what the answer was or what her personal im-
pressions were. This shifting back and forth from the
physical plane to the concrete mental plane was physically
strenuous. :

The number of lectures she attended in any one night
varied from one to three. The number also varied from
week to week and month to month depending on her
physical health. Each lecture in the text is identified as
to date, marked “taped by SK,” meaning the lecture was
obtained during sleep, or “recalled by VPN” the follow-
ing morning. The text contains the letters “SK” standing
for Shafica Karagulla and “VPN” for Viola Petitt Neal.

During the taping of the night classes, she was able to
retain three states of consciousness: She was aware of me
as the person asking the questions, could give my name
as well as who she was and her name and the class she
was attending, and who the teacher was and what the lec-
ture was about. Thus she was aware of her own identity
at all times as well as my identity and that of those on
the mental plane of the various departments of the
Spiritual Hierarchy of the planet.

I observed that the nights she went to “night classes,”
her eyes seemed to be focused inwardly as though her con-
sciousness was already tuned in. She herself was never
aware of any change before going to sleep. On rare oc-
casions when a few close friends were present I pointed
out my observation about her eyes, which they were also
able to confirm,

‘This experimental period was permitted in order to
enhance her continuity of consciousness between the wak-
Ing and sleeping states.

INTRODUCTION XIX

Selection of the lectures is being presented according
to subject matter. Letters such as “Z” or “X” were used
in this book in order to cover the identity of the real peo-
ple referred to.

It will be noted that Viola Petitt Neal’s night classes
had influenced her poetry. A selection of both published
and unpublished poems is included. Some were written
after her book Fragments of Expertence—A Spiritual
Journey was published in 1978; others were found among
her personal papers and signed by her.

Following in the footsteps of the ancient wisdom
teaching, the reader is asked to read the material with
an open mind, contemplating upon the concepts pre-
sented, neither accepting nor rejecting them! It is hoped
it will spark an inspiration and a more meaningful
awareness as to other sources for our creative endeavors
in science, philosophy, archaeology, art, and music. It
may also help to explain why so often discoveries are made
almost simultaneously in different parts of the world (see
reference to the neutron bomb) and the healing that we
may receive from sources undreamt of.

Shafica Karagulla, M.D.
December, 1982.
A Condensed Outline of the
Constitution of Man

As Given in the Ancient Wisdom Teaching

IV.

VL

VI.

The Seven Planes of Our Solar System

Divine — First Cosmic Etheric
Monadic = Second Cosmic Etheric
Atmic — Third Cosmic Etheric
Buddhic _ Fourth Cosmic Etheric
Mental — Cosmic Gaseous

a. Abstract Mental
b. Concrete Mental
Astral or Emotional -— Cosmic Liquid
Physical — Cosmic Dense
a. First Etheric
Second Etheric
Third Etheric
Fourth Etheric
b,. Gaseous

c. Liquid
d. Dense (Solid)

XXi

)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)

ed

The Spirit

The Soul

The
Personality
CONDENSED OUTLINE OF THE CONSTITUTION OF MAN

The causal field or body links the Soul or the Buddhic
plane to the personality unit and envelops the etheric,
astral and mental fields.

There are within the three major fields of energy in the
personality unit twenty-one major vortices or chakras;
seven of these in the etheric field, seven in the emotional
or astral field and seven in the mental field. The seven
centers in each body are related to the glandular system
thus:

Center Gland
1. Top Head Center Pineal
2,  Ajna or Brow Pituitary
3. Throat Thyroid
4. Heart Thymus
5. Solar Plexus Pancreas, Stomach
and Liver
6. Sacral or Sex Center Gonads or Ovaries
7. Base of the Spine, Root

Center or Kundalini Adrenal

Night Classes
Anticipation

I have w rendezvous with joy

Along the turnings in life's way

New vistas in the world of thought
That lift the heart with glad surprise.
A mocking bird that sings all night
For pure joy of beingness.

A newborn foal, a child of lzfe,

Who stands bemused with wonderment.

The golden joy of aspen trees
Against a blue October sky.

The still white joy

Of falling snow.

The rippling gold of desert sand
Blue shadowed in late afternoon.
I have a rendezvous with joy

That gladdens all life’s winding ways.

Mechanics of
Attending Night Classes

September 17, 1960
Night Class of Viola Petitt Neal
Taped by SK

Duration of Night Classes

SK How long do the classes last?
VPN Sometimes twenty minutes, sometimes an hour,

SK How many lectures does the student attend each
night?

VPN Sometimes two or three, but often just one.

SK Are you going to another class tonight?
VPN No, I don’t think so.

SK Can you see “X” anywhere now?
VPN No.

SK Is the class of “X” still going on?
VPN It is finished now.

SK So nobody is there?
VPN No, there are some students in the room. I think

they are asking questions — no, it is finished, they are
leaving.
4 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

SK Which Ashram is that?

VPN This class seems to be the Will Ray Ashram. I
think it is “J's” Ashram, but I think the teacher is from
the Third Ray Ashram.

SK You mean the one in which “X” is?

VPN No, the teacher in mine had the symbol of the
Master “R” (Third Ray), but he was in the classroom of
the Master “J’s’ Ashram.

SK Is this the end of the lecture tonight?
VPN I think so. There is a hallway with a curtain of
light at the other end.

SK What does that mean?
VPN Some of the students are going through it. I think
it means they are leaving—I kind of got stuck tonight.

SK Where?
VPN In the curtain of frequency.

September, 1960
Night Class of Viola Petitt Neal
Taped by SK

The Nature of Night Classes and Their Effect
on the Student

SK How long do the classes last?

VPN _ I don't think it is so much a time sequence. Actu-
ally, the classes are on the mental level. It is a period dur-
ing which very specific intent and design —I will just quote
the teacher:

“A certain type of knowledge frequency is
directed to a group of disciples. This frequency

NIGHT CLASSES 5

finds a resonance on the mental body and is re-
corded in the mental body, almost like a disc of
a Victrola. Like a magnetic tape.

“The magnetic tape is very much the prin-
ciple. In fact, it is interesting, it is really taken
from the type of thing that happens. So... if
you have a magnetic tape recording, figuratively
speaking, in the mental body, when the right
stimulus occurs on the physical plane—the need
or something else —the mental body can play it
back, so to speak.

“People who have very disturbed astral bodies
are not too good at playing back. You have to
have a very steady astral body and very well-
adjusted physical body and etheric. You may
remember it in waking consciousness entirely or
it may come to you as flashes of ideas.”

SK What happens to the student who is going to class
in the evenings before he attends the class? Why does he
tense up? Or does he tense up? What happens?

VPN Hts mental body is tuned to the frequency of that
body of knowledge which will be given in the class. In
other words, it is adjusted to resonate like a dial on a
radio. So his attention is partly directed inward and this
creates, not so much a tension, as a focus. The focus af-
fects to some degree the astral and physical-etheric bodies
until the recording is made. The recording is made when
he goes to class.

SK Does he get tuned into it?

VPN He is tuned in to a resonating cycle. I feel tired.
‘This is very tiring.

SK What is tiring?

VPN It ts that frequency—the curtain. It ws like a cur-

tain of rain. You have to kind of stand in the middle of
Ht and it es tering.
6 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

SK What does it do?

VPN It tunes owt the physical body and astral body, and
tunes in the mental. You have, by analogy, to sort of stand
in the center of it. When you are doing this, it is tiring.

SK Why do the muscles feel tired? Does it affect the
etheric?

VPN sit affects the etheric body and the muscles of the
body.

SK How does it affect the etheric?
VPN The etheric is an energy pattern that resonates to
the mental body, which affects the physical structure —
the actual cells of the physical body.

SK Is this the thing that makes the student tense?
VPN It is not exactly tension, in the ordinary sense. It
is tuning up.

SK Is there anything that could be suggested that would
help to ease this for the student?

VPN It does not have to be eased. It won't hurt him.
He has to learn to handle it.

SK Are the classes that are being held—are they held
at the time when the student goes to sleep or are they
registered in his mental body when he is asleep and then
he merely plays it back?

VPN No. He goes to a class. Recording is done when
his consciousness ts fully focussed in the mental body. This
has to be done in a class,

SK The thing is recorded on his mental body when he

is in class?
VPN Yes, that is it.

SK But he has to go to a class?
VPN Yes, going to the class means his whole con-
aclousness is focussed in the mental body.

NiGut CLAssEs 7

SK But'sometimes the student does not remember be-
ing in class?

VPN The recording is played back to him when he
needs it. When there is a stimulus in the outer world it
activates it. But more and more the disciple remembers
what he has been told when he wakes up. To go to class
one has to pass through a curtain or shed of energy.
Classes are held, not in a place, but in a frequency

band—a dimension of frequency which one has to attune
or resonate to.

This is the end of the class.

March 1, 1962
Night Class of S. Karagulla

Viola Pettitt Neal’s Ability to Recall
Another Student’s Night Class

This morning during the discussion of the night
class the question was raised as to whether VPN could
recall the presence of other students. VPN said that
SK was not present in her class which dealt with heal-
ing, color and form, but that she had attended
another class.

SK could not recall such an experience and asked
VPN to try to obtain the night class that Si. had at-
tended. We are not certain whether it was obtained
from the record made on the mental body of SK or
whether VPN tuned in to the original record of the
class which is on the concrete mental plane.

VPN described it thus: The subject dealt with the
nature and quality of the substance of the etheric
body. A thoughtform was projected to the students
THROUGH THE CURTAIN Nicut CLasses 9

On March 1, after VPN had tried to tune in to the class
that SK had attended, an attempt was made to see if VPN

could tune in to a week previously. The following was the
impression obtained:

in SK’s class, which VPN saw as a motion picture in
her forehead. She described it as follows:
Different grades of etheric substance could resonate

to certain defined and limited bands of frequency of
energy. The experiment was set up like a tuning fork,
with other tuning forks set around so that when one
struck a specific tuning fork others with similar fre-
quency resonated to it.

It appeared that every human being was connected
by frequency with the etheric centers of the planet.
Energy radiates from each etheric center of the planet
which is picked up by the etheric centers of humans
and animals. The etheric energy man or animal re-
ceives in the centers is channeled via the etheric
centers of the planet.

Individual etheric centers of a human being reso-
nate to these frequencies. Some can resonate to a
wide band of frequencies; others to a narrow band.
There are gaps in the bands of frequencies they can
resonate to because people have substance in their
etheric bodies of different planes. For example, one
person may have substance of the seventh, sixth and
third etheric planes, while another person may have
fifth, fourth and first planes substance. Each would

resonate toward frequencies that correspond to their
planes of etheric substance. The quality of the etheric
body determines the quality of the personality.

This is a broad subject. It will also include cer-
tain types of people and planetary types which would
show special qualities of substance, which would be
characteristic of the place where human individual-

ization took place.

Present in this class— about ten students.

Apparently, SK had attended a night class a week
ago which dealt with the throat center and the
thyroid and parathyroid glands. A huge thoughtform
was Projected into the classroom, several feet in
diameter, in order to discuss and demonstrate the
structure and mechanism of any center; in particular
the throat center, The lecture dealt with the fumes
tion of the core and petals in different conditions
indicating a state of health or disease. )

The first thing pointed out to the student on this
throat center was the core and its movements. The
movements of the core in the thoughtform showed
that the energies came into the core in a clockwise
manner and gradually spiralled down in a cone-like
manner, moving inward into a point where it entered
the spine. The energies appeared as extremely fine
hair-like lines, and were luminous and pale blue in
color. The movement was rhythmical and symme-
trical in a state of health. The petals had a web-like
pattern that was symmetrical and harmonious. It ap-
pears that the constitution of the centers is different.

The energy flowing into the petals came from the
spine as though spurting out like a fountain in the
shape of a bell-like flower, In other words, the energy
from the outside flows inward via the core and moves
outward via the petals and is dissipated at the periph-
ery of the petals.

. The lecturer said that the petals are bounce-back
signals that tell how the energies are being received
and used; in other words, by analogy, how the petals

10

THROUGH THE CURTAIN

are functioning. The petals are like the bounce-back
signal on radar. They are in a sense like an aura
around the central whirl of energy which is the core.
The petals are the outlet for energy that comes in
and it is dissipated from the edges of the petals like
the dissipation of electrical energy around a wire.

A thoughtform was projected where there was a
disturbance in function of the thyroid in order to
illustrate the mechanism. The thyroid was function-
ing too fast and the energy in the petals spurted out
in irregular and too rapid spurts. This was clear in
the closeup of the model thoughtform. When one
stood back it appeared like a crack or a break be-
tween the two petals and in the petals. This was be-
cause the symmetrical pattern of the petals had been
somewhat broken up by these irregular spurts. The
lecturer pointed out that a break between the petals
and in the petals showed that the parathyroids are
involved in a certain way also.

Lack of flow of energy into the core showed a
serious-enough condition that there was at least a
beginning of pathology in the physical cells of the
gland itself, indicating a hypofunction state.

Energy leaking out at the core means all energy
is Not moving into the spine as it should and therefore
not into the area energized by this center. This could
mean any part of the body which the center supplies
could be starved for energy. For example, in the case
of the throat center, it may be the vocal cords which
would show low vitality which eventually could result
in a diseased condition.

VPN felt tired and further comments were terminated.

II

Extrasensory Perception

Reality

There is light behind the world of seeming,
Our shuttered house of sense and time and space,
Through all the chinks and cracks of daily living

It penetrates to stab us wide awake.

There is Reality behind the world of seeming

This mundane world in which we come and go
Our infant consciousness securely cradled
Reaches to meet its destiny

And know.

Mechanics of
Extrasensory Perception

February 17, 1961
Night Class of Viola Petitt Neal
Taped by SK

SK Are you in class now?
VPN Yes,

SK Which class are you attending?
VPN There are several classes. I can go to whichever
ote T want to.

SK Which one are you going to?
VPN Goodness, the subject—it has so much to it that
I yuess I had better go to the elementary class.

‘IKK What are the different classes?

VN ‘This whole section is on those abilities and possi-
hilities of the supranormal—what we call extrasensory
nbilities or higher sense perception. I think I will go to
the beginning class. The professor -- the teacher — is just
Multi to start this class. Perhaps he gave it before, but
I haven't been in this one before. I think I should stay
lirie, He is a very nice person.

“K Tlow many are in this class?
VEN About fifteen or sixteen, I guess.

13

14 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

SK Do you recognize anybody in this class?
VPN _ No. Well, there is someone who comes to classes.

SK Who?
VPN He comes from Europe somewhere. I don’t think

I know him ordinarily except here. He is German. He
looks German to me.

SK _ Is he a doctor, a physicist?
VPN He is a student — an esoteric student. The teacher

is going to begin the class, I think. He says:

“In the development of humanity on this
planet, there are many possibilities of awareness
which we are not particularly encouraged to
develop in the long, slow, process of evolution.
There was a period of encouragement in Atlan-
tean days that proved very disastrous for
mankind. Therefore, this knowledge was with-
drawn from the consciousness of the race, or
better —held in abeyance, is the word. And to-
day, there are many members of the human race
who are developing greater awareness and a
more sensitive apparatus of response to the world
in which we live. Many more people have abil-
ities beyond the normal range of the five
senses — more than we think have these abilities.”

VPN He says that we are all having impacts made upon
us at many, many levels, from many directions. And that
the people who are a little further along the way in evolu-
tion are more sensitive to these impacts of energy, and
that many types of abilities are developed. We are con-
fused about these types of abilities. As a human unit, we
are all mediums for the Light and Life of God —or bridges
between our own kingdom and other kingdoms and in our
own kingdom from one level to another. That we might

EXTRASENSORY PERCEPTION 15

use the word “channels” instead of mediums, because the
word medium has a very limited concept in our present
society —the outer world. That perhaps if we talk about
people as channels for energies, we are closer to the real
picture. From time to time, people who have this greater

ability for being channels—work j
-- In certain wa
mankind. He says: ep

“A man like Edgar Cayce had a very good
alignment between the etheric, physical level
and the mental body, and if the alignment had
been as good with the astral body, he could have
done his work in full waking consciousness, In
this case, he could have seen himself what was
wrong with people while he was in waking
consciousness, but there was a gap in his
development in spite of the very excellent align-
ment between the mental and etheric level —
the centers and the bodies.

“He didn’t have as good a development in the
astral body control, so he worked with a group
of doctors on the mental plane — healers. These
healers on the mental plane could contact Ppa-
tients—know what was wrong with them, and
then they could contact Cayce and tell him what
was wrong. But he couldn’t do it in full waking
consciousness, because of this gap. The astral
hody was the gap.

“And so—to be fully conscious in such ex-
periences as these —he could have been in touch
with the teachers, the healers on the mental
plane, but there must be a good alignment in
all three bodies, which he did not Possess.

"The group of healers on the mental plane
who wanted to work with Cayce in order to help

16 ‘THROUGH THE CURTAIN

people had to do it when he was in a state when
the astral body was ‘damped’ down — almost dis-
engaged from the personality unit. There was
a fine point where this disengaging was sufficient
to come through straight from the mental to the
etheric level. It took a certain point and some-
times he wasn’t able to achieve it. When he en-
deavored to be of help and to get a diagnosis
from someone he tried to withdraw and, if he
could do it just the right way, it was satisfac-
tory. There was a sufficient disengaging of the
astral body so that the mental could come
straight through. The group of healers who were
very wise and very helpful disciples on the men-
tal plane could get through— give the informa-
tion and make suggestions about what would
help the patient.”

Trance-mediumship

VPN I was asking a question—just a minute.

SK What was the question?

VPN _ I wanted to know how Cayce was different from
the ordinary trance-medium? I think the others would be
interested in that one too. He says:

“Ordinary trance-mediumship is a casual type
of mediumship, Usually in these cases the per-
son steps out of his physical-etheric vehicle.
There is a little separation between the physical-
etheric and the astral and mental unit. The
separation is there like a split. (He shows a
thoughtform.) A split between the two bodies.
And the entity on the astral plane steps into the
physical-etheric body of the trance-medium.

EXTRASENSORY PERCEPTION 17

This is what damages the etheric body. These
people in astral bodies slip in between the astral-
mental unit on one hand, and the physical-
etheric on the other, that have been separated
a little. (He shows a thoughtform.) Then they
are in control of the physical-etheric vehicle.
They speak and give information which they
know and have in their astral level. They are just
most of the time curious people who have passed
on to the other side or those who want to get
in touch. They are not the higher level of
teachers or helpers. Sometimes even the entity
is functioning on the very lower mental plane
and he slips in through the etheric mesh and it
disturbs the etheric web badly. It always leaves
it weaker and more loose. He gives the message
about things he knows or talks about things he
knows about. This is the kind of trance-
mediumship that is harmful to the medium and
not good for the entity.”

VPN The kind of trance Cayce went into was different.
The mental unit stayed connected to the physical-etheric
body, the astral body was “damped” out or slightly disen-
gaged —not really.

SK How did he do it?

VPN He did it by making contact with a certain point
in his brain. Cayce knew how to do this. What happened
was—this group of healers-helpers were really disciples
working on the mental plane. They could talk, they could
give their information, but they didn’t speak in their own
voices, they gave the information to Cayce at his mental
body level and then affected the etheric and physical brain
and he spoke. But because his astral body was “damped”
out, he had only a very slight memory once in a while,

18 ‘}HROUGH THE CURTAIN

but usually no memory of what was said. Ordinarily you
have to have a continuous stream of mental, astral, etheric
and physical brain consciousness. But because he had a
disalignment there --a gap, because of a poor astral body,
not properly aligned —an entity could not slip into his
physical or etheric body. No entities ever occupied his
physical-etheric body. The healers protected him from
this, and worked with him. He had a very peculiar align-
ment of the mental to the etheric. The mental brain, we
might say, the mental body had its own connection to the
etheric brain.

SK Would you say that what he did was a form of self-
hypnosis? Ask the teacher.
VPN He says:

“It is an incorrect term. Quite definitely
incorrect. He didn't hypnotize himself. He vol-
untarily partly disengaged his astral body by
focusing on a certain point in his brain. He knew
how to do this- it wasn't even self-hypnosis. He
was not hypnotized by anyone outside. He did
it voluntarily with the intent to be of assistance
and he knew what he was doing.”

SK How did he obtain the records of the patients and
the records of their previous reincarnations? Was that ac-
curate or was that given by the healers on the mental
plane?
VPN _ This was given by the healers on the mental plane.
They have the records there. Occasionally, while he was
in this rather unusual state of awareness, he could see the
records himself. But usually they gave him information,
the teacher says.

I was just listening to some things. He says that people
who are channels can be channels in a number of different
ways. He says:

EXTRASENSORY PERCEPTION 19

“Take Tal-Mar for example. Tal-Mar is work-
ing from the level of the causal body. He con-
tacts the causal body level. He has a better astral
body than Cayce had. Better aligned, pretty
steady. The alignment is good between the astral
and the physical-etheric, but he has a poorly
aligned mental body. The mental body isn’t as
well developed as it should be. In the beginning,
in his early experiences when he seemed to be
in a trance state, there was a cleavage between
his physical-etheric and astral self and the men-
tal self. And there were disciples on the higher
mental plane who spoke through him. It wasn’t
the ordinary type of trance. They didn’t really
occupy his physical body. Again in the ordinary
trance-mediumship, which is not so good, the
entity from the astral or lower mental planes
steps into the physical-etheric vehicle. In the case
of Tal-Mar this is not done. There is a disengag-
ing of the mental body.”

VPN _ I am trying to understand this disengaging of the
mental body. This is why he does not remember what was
said. The ideas from the higher mental plane—a group
of disciples, one disciple particularly —were impressed on
his astral brain, his physical-etheric, enough that he
himself spoke, but he spoke in his own tone of voice, not
that of an entity, because an entity steps in and controls
the vocal cords of an individual. He doesn’t use his brain
really—mostly his vocal cords. But in this case, he was
being given ideas directly from the higher mental planes,
causal and Buddhic, which had an effect on the astral
and the etheric brain and he spoke those ideas on the
physical level. Because his mental body was disengaged
he wasn't conscious. It wasn’t really a crack or break, just
disengaged.

20 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

SK What does he mean by being disengaged?

VPN Not functioning. Pull the plug out. He shows a
thoughtform. He says this is by-passed —it is out of the
circult.

However, over a period of time, several disciples from
the Buddhic or Soul level were working to make a con-
nection through the mental body. The centers are not
badly aligned in Tal-Mar’s mental body, but he has just
got a poorly furnished mental body. He has not used it
as much as he could —or else something happened along
the way about it. I am not sure. It looks better than the
other one. But over a period of time it was possible to
establish telepathic contact with him. This other was a
conditioning procedure. It wasn’t important for its own
sake, when he wasn’t conscious, They are trying to es-
tablish a telepathic contact; therefore, they have to use
the mental body too. Because he has a poorly furnished
mental body he doesn’t really understand a lot of the
ideas; but he records them faithfully and does what is ex-
plained to him—carries out ideas as they are explained
to him. He says:

“There is no time or space on the mental
plane, and Tal-Mar has proved to be a very
resilient and adequate instrument channel for
receiving ideas from Space Intelligences, who are
people of a higher frequency, or higher stage of

development. Tal-Mar was prepared in this life
for this kind of thing.”

VPN Somebody is asking a question.
Telepathic Contact with Space Intelligences

SK What are they asking? Are there other people who
make this contact?

EXTRASENSORY PERCEPTION 21

VPN’ A great many people are making such contacts —
most of them intermittently—only to some degree,
telepathic contact with Space Intelligences. He says:

“There are a great many people; they all do
it the same way from the causal, Buddhic level
to the mental body, to the astral, to the etheric
and to the physical brain. This is not clair-
audience at all. It is a transmission of concepts
and ideas which we translate into our own lan-
guage —like one of the electronic translators.
The brain has this mechanism, but one gets the
ideas and concepts direct, not in language, but
concepts are translated into one’s own language
immediately.”

SK Is that from the causal body? Is the causal body of
Tal-Mar being used?

VPN No. No, I don’t think—I don’t know—I’ll ask.
There seems to be a bridge between the causal or Bud-
dhic level of the transmitter to the mental body of the
receiver. A special bridging in a case like Tal-Mar.

The Consctous Disctple’s Contact with the Ashrams
of the Spiritual Hierarchy

VPN Contact can be made from the causal level with
a person who has a good deal of awareness of himself as
a Soul. It is a little different kind of contact. He says:

“Where an individual is a conscious disciple
on the Path and working with an Ashram, the
causal body is involved also. The individual can
either make a contact with the Ashram or the
Ashram with the student by the mental body
directly to the astral, to the etheric, to the
physical brain. Or if the disciple not only hears,

22 ‘THrouGu ‘THe CURTAIN

but goes to the place, the causal body is in the
circuit too,

“Also the disciple uses the causal body. One
can ask questions in his own mind and know the
answers often, because he first contacts the
answers on the causal plane about lots of things.
He knows the answers right away, often because
he contacts them on the causal plane through
his causal body.”

VPN There seem to be a number of combinations here
of ways in which people channel. The so-called trance-
mediumship is quite a different thing from being a
channel. This other type, he would call it mediumship,
except the word has been limited to mean people in a
trance state, where an entity actually steps into their
bodies for the time being. An entity that is not necessarily
in a good frequency resonance with the person and,
therefore, can disturb his etheric body badly. He says that
there are a number of other things to be discussed about
this.

But tonight he just wanted to clarify some of the points
about some of them. I think it is a good class to be in.
He seems to give some good information.

SK When is the next class on this subject?
VPN Regular classes— whenever one is keyed for it—
these courses kind of rotate. They give ther regularly.

SK Is he giving any more information?

VPN Just paused a bit here. Someone was asking a ques-
tion. Cayce had healing ability himself. That is, he was
a channel for it. This was because of his alignments and
his attitude of good will. He wanted to help humanity this
way.

SK Could you ask a question?
VPN _ I think so.

EXTRASENSORY PERCEPTION 25

SK Ask why it was difficult to arouse Cayce, if some-
body passed their hands over his body after he had gone
into this kind of sleep.

VPN He says:

“This was such a delicate balance, this disen-
gaging of a body, that it disturbed the magnetic
currents of the astral body, sort of made this
disengagement more complete, which was not
good for Cayce. It carried it too far. It was in-
terference with the magnetic field there con-
nected with the astral body—it was better not
to. This was a very delicate balance that had to
be established to achieve this. Cayce tried his
best to be very reasonable about all this and was
good.”

VPN He says that he will discuss other things of this type
and try to give us a little clearer picture next time. He
says:

“Remember disciples are channels for the life
force and you are channels for energies at all
times. Be aware of this and keep a positive and
constructive outlook on life so that you direct the
energies wisely.”

VPN I think this is the end of the class.

SK Can you ask one question?
VPN Yes.

SK Could you ask him what kind of state someone like
“H” goes into? Is there a disturbance in the state of con-
sciousness or mediumship?

VPN _ He will discuss that in the next class. It is a little
different type of thing. Not exactly like these other two
that we are thinking about in this class.

SK Can you ask him if he will be discussing mental and
astral hypnosis next time?
24 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

VPN Yes. He will discuss these things, he says.

SK Could we ask one question? Could we ask the ques-
tion about the man who wrote the book about the Third
Eye? What kind of possession or obsession or type of thing

was It?
VPN He says that he will discuss this when he talks

about another type of occupation of the human body.
Discuss the Devic forces too, in that connection. He is not
going into it tonight.

SK Is Tal-Mar there?
VPN No.

SK Is anyone you know there? Is “R” there?
VPN No.

SK Does “R” go to this class?
VPN _ I don't know.

SK Do you know whether he has been there before?
VPN _ I don’t know. He says that this is the end of the
class tonight.

Healing by Angelic Forces

SK Are you going to another class?
VPN He says:
“Go into the Chapel, let the angel give you

healing energy.”
VPN Ohl It is a lovely angel.

SK What kind of an angel is it? White?
VPN It is blue with a great halo, like a fluffy white
powder puff.

SK Are you inside the chapel now?
VPN Yes, it is nice—very pleasant light.

EXTRASENSORY PERCEPTION 25

SK What kind of healing is he giving you?
VPN I think anything that is wrong with us.

SK Can one ask questions to the angel or not?
VPN No.

SK Why not?
VPN He is very tall and beautiful and remote.

SK And you can’t ask him a question?
VPN _ I don’t think it would be fitting —I don’t think so,

SK Is the teacher around?
VPN No.

SK Are you the only one in the chapel?
VPN Yes.

SK What kind of light is he directing on you?
VPN _ I have to go back through the curtain now.

SK Aren’t you going to another class?
VPN No.

SK Why not?
VPN He says that I’m tired. I need to sleep.

SK Who is saying this?

VPN _ The teacher says so.
February 24, 1961
Night Class of Viola Petitt Neal
Taped by SK

VPN We are out in the paved courtyard—sort of paved
‘ourtyard, and we are going to—we can go to classes if
we like now, I think I should go and find the elementary
‘lass On extrasensory perception—the mechanics of it.

26 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

SK Are you now in class?
VPN We were just talking with one of the instructors.

SK What about?

VPN About the convocation. He says that we were taken
into the temple. Not exactly a temple, I guess, but a con-
ference room, for part of this because we needed to think
about it. And that also conditions our minds and helps
to build the bridge over so that we remember better. But
I think we are free now to go to class. Have to find the
class on extrasensory perception. Have to go to where the
wheel classrooms are. One of the beginning classes. One
of the elementary ones on extrasensory perception, but
I think it will help to get some practical information about
these things. This is the class I was in before and it’s on
the mechanics of extrasensory perception. The instructor
says:

“If we know how these different methods
work, it is going to help later on to train
people—help them to develop some of these
things more quickly and more easily and in ways
more useful to the human race.”

SK Is it the same teacher as last week or a different one?
VPN No, I think it is the same teacher as before. He
Says: .
“We might go ahead, somewhat, with the dis-
cussion of some of these things that have to do

VIN

EXTRASENSORY PERCEPTION

Overshadowing

VPN He is talking tonight about overshadowing.
says:

“Overshadowing may be of a number of dif-
ferent types. It is possible to have overshadow-
ing from the mental plane by some disciple on
the mental plane who is intelligent, fluent, and
is seeking to work with an Ashram. It is a dis-
ciple, not an initiate or an Adept, who may
overshadow. Overshadowing is different from

these other things. In the case of the mental .

27

He

plane, which is the most simple type, the over- te

shadowing individual moves into the mental
aura of the person on the physical plane of life.
In a sense, he kind of intermingles with the men-
tal aura of the person so that the individual is
thoroughly conscious, aware of his own mental
processes and yet also aware of what the disciple
is saying. This can also be true with a member
of the Ashram. One of the Adepts or Masters
actually for the time being moves into the men-
tal aura and the disciple or student can repeat
word for word what the Master is saying. He can
choose at any moment not to do so, or to return
to his own mental processes.”

He spoke to me saying I had a very good example

with some kind of contact with other intelli-
gences. The word mediumship is not a good
word, except as it is used often with trance-
mediumship—in touch with the astral plane.
This is the least important type and not good
for the medium.”

if that in the case of “NB” and to remember what was
aalil to me at that time. To remember what happened

ail what was said in the interviews that I had with the
Maser Septimus.

NK Which Master?
VI'N Septimus. He is a Greek Master.

28 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

SK Septimus or Serapis?
VPN Septimus. S-E-P-T-I-M-U-S.

SK What happened?
VPN He says that I remember it. He said that “NB” was

an individual through whom certain Adepts and two or
three of the Masters were able to speak through over-
shadowing. He says:

““H’ has an overshadowing, from the mental
plane, of a disciple who is very learned and
fluent. This disciple is still in the human level,
but is out of incarnation. But, ‘H’ is also open
to astral influences at times that are not good.
This disciple on the mental plane is intelligent
and very learned and is doing a very good job
of work. He is not an initiate but he is a good
and constructive disciple. He steps into ‘H's men-
tal aura. He moves on to his mental wave cur-
rents. ‘H’ is able to speak clearly and he is con-
scious and aware himself as an individual, but
he stands aside—his own ideas stand aside. He
recognizes this disciple. He speaks the things that
the disciple is thinking through his mind, but
he is fully conscious. Only because these are not
his own ideas, he does not retain them too
clearly until he reads them over and thinks
about them.

“This disciple is Third Ray Ashram and he
undertakes this work from the mental level with
the consent of the Ashram. He is not an Adept
or Initiate.”

SK Is ‘H’ aware of him?
VPN Through the years he has become aware of him
as if he were his other self. Sometimes ‘H’ thinks this is his

EXTRASENSORY PERCEPTION | 29

higher self or some better self speaking. Because with over-
shadowing there is a kind of mingling. This is interesting.
Your own mind becomes the carrier wave for this higher
wave frequency like radio.

SK How is it then transmitted to the physical plane?

VPN Same way your own mental processes are — your
mind.

SK What I mean is—is the overshadowing from the
mental plane, or mental body of the disciple?

VPN Mental body straight to the etheric brain to the
physical brain. Overshadowing is interesting. Overshadow-
ing doesn’t disengage the astral body, it passes through
the astral body, but it does not use the astral body.

It is a different thing in the case of Tal-Mar. The best
wily to put it is that in overshadowing, the person work-
ing with the human being steps into his mental aura,
lecomes a part of it for the time being, and steps out of
it after. The transmission is on a carrier wave —the mind
ol the individual. He says that it acts as the carrier wave.
‘This is not true in the case of Tal-Mar, where there is
a telepathic conversation back and forth. -

SK Could a clairvoyant see what happens to “H” when
the other disciple is present?

VPN The clairvoyant would probably see the other dis-
tiple standing close by him, in this case. He says:

“The difference between that and just a well-
meaning entity on the mental plane is that the
disciple doing this has the authorization to do
It as a service to the Ashram. There are prob-
lems with ‘H’—this is a private and personal
matter to him.

30 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

“*NB’ is a better example. She had a disci-
plined astral body, physical body and mental
body. She was a clear, disciplined and dedicated
person of good education, good will and of
serious integrity. She was also a channel for some
very good information.”

VPN _ He was talking to me because I seem to be here
for a purpose. He reminds me of this. To remember her
as an example that I have encountered in my experience.
He says:

“With a very well-integrated disciple who is
close in the Ashram, there are occasions which
are very rare when the Master or an Adept not
only comes into the mental aura, but steps into
the vehicle of the disciple more completely. This
is with full conscious consent of the disciple who
is fully conscious of all that takes place if the
Master is speaking through his vehicle.”

SK How is that done?
VPN Briefly, the Master steps in and uses the vehicle.

SK Well, when the disciple steps out, what part of him
steps out? Does he step out into the causal body? What
are the mechanics of it?

VPN He is in his causal body but he has a link with the
physical, etheric, astral and mental and he has not lost
his link with them. He remembers what is said and done,
This is done in partnership, as a working unit, with the
Adept or the Master. This happens only where there is
a very excellent rapport with the disciple. This is what
is called a Disciple in the Master's Heart— meaning he is
synchronized to the purpose and work of the Master with
loving cooperation with the Master. This isn’t done very
often, At least, not at present. He says:

EXTRASENSORY PERCEPTION md

“There will be a great deal more overshadow-
ing of another kind. The Christ is beginning to
overshadow many disciples with the mantle of
His Life and Consciousness. There will be a
large group of disciples who will be affected by
this overshadowing—already are being over-
shadowed to some extent—so that the Christ
concept of the idea will begin to condition the
thinking of disciples who choose to be dedicated
to His work and prepare the way for His
reappearance.”

VPN I was asking how this would come about— what
the mechanics are. He says:

“It would be from the causal body directly to
the mental through the astral and physical-
etheric. A clear line of energy and concepts.

“There is another type of awareness, of extra-
sensory perception, where the disciple is more
and more open to the archetypal plane. This is
the Buddhic plane. As the disciple begins to be
aware of his own Soul, he is able to contact the
life on the Buddhic plane and know or bring
back to the personality level ideas from the Bud-
dhic plane.”

VPN He says that this is a large subject. There is a great
deal to be explained about it and there will be in a very
short time certain techniques for training these types of
abilities where they had already been achieved to some
extent.

This is the end of the class for tonight.

SK Could we ask one question?
VPN I'll try.

§2 ‘THROUGH THE CURTAIN

SK What makes the vehicles of certain disciples possible
to be overshadowed — such as ‘H’?

VPN 'H' is not able to contact the Ashramic level and
this ia why his work is all compilation. The disciple that
worka with him has a vast amount of learning, has com-
piled knowledge -- has it all stacked up so to speak. It is
useful to get it out. With ‘H’ it is an alignment. This is
intereating, A special alignment of the seven centers of
the mental body. He says:

“The astral body is very disturbed. It does not
have a very good alignment or there is not much
harmony in the astral body. The etheric and
physical bodies are mediumistic and in ‘H’s case
the mediumistic aspect helps to transmit from
mental over to the etheric and physical brain.
This is not a good thing necessarily, but is be-
ing used for a good purpose.

“He has problems in the etheric body too, and
the physical. This alignment in the mental body
is from several lifetimes of great mental dis-
cipline and development but he got involved in
the left-hand path for a while. Now, he is mak-
ing a great effort to work on the right-hand
path.”

VPN He 1s not a good example of this overshadowing
except that he is one of the people we have been asking
about. He said that I particularly asked about him, so
he discussed him. ‘NB’ is a better example.

SK What about Benny?
VPN He is different — Venusian—different thing en-
tirely, he says.

SK _ Is he going to have further discussion some other
time about them?

EXTRASENSORY PERCEPTION 33

VPN There are more classes coming up.

SK Does he say when is the next class?

VPN There are classes all the time. I have to go back
through the curtain because I am tired tonight. He says
that holding a contact with the Ashramic level and
holding a contact through the curtain is always a little
strenuous.

SK Can he explain how you can hold this type of con-
tact? What are the mechanics of it?
VPN He says: “Another time.”

I have to not get too tired with it. It is fine to do it.
I handle it better than I did and longer. This is enough
for tonight.

March 9, 1961
Night Class of Viola Petitt Neal
Taped by SK

Clear Seeing

VPN Clear seezng, not with the physical eyes, but on
these other levels, has to do with “identification.” You
become identified with the thing seen, then you know it.
You can become so identified only to the extent of your
own development. The quality of substance in your dif-
ferent bodies decides what you can become identified
with. The modern term is “what you can resonate to.”
The quality of daily thought and emotions decides what
quality substance is in the etheric, physical, astral, and
mental vehicles. Like the mason, we are all builders. Daily
we build into our different bodies new and better sub-
stance or coarser substance. The quality of thought and
emotion selects the material.

34 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

The disciple is the conscious mason building day after
day the temple in which he, the Soul, performs the
creative rituals of life. Clear seeing is normal to higher

stages of development and evolution.
“Alignment of centers” means the substance of the

bodies is resilient and flexible and more homogeneous in
frequency levels, so that the energies coming in move in
a harmonious manner. Most people’s bodies (etheric,
astral, mental) have substance of all type frequency levels;
rather like a wall with beautiful symmetrical bricks in one
section, rubble in another, irregular stones in another
part. You can’t get one clear resonant note therefore.
Each vortex of energy is in harmonious rhythm to every
other vortex in a given body and in relation to other
bodies.

Professor Aitken of Edinburgh University has a men-
tal body so perfectly aligned that he has instant access to
any knowledge he chooses on the mental planes. His astral
body is almost atrophied because it isn't aligned as it
should be, so the mental body just by-passes it to the
physical etheric brain.

More of this in next night class.

March 10, 1961
Night Class of Viola Petitt Neal

Taped by SK

SK Where is this class being held?
VPN _ I think it is Third Ray Ashram. We have to take

our places.

SK How many are present?
VPN _ Seventeen or eighteen.

SK _ Is there anyone there you recognize?

EXTRASENSORY PERCEPTION 35

VPN No. This is the college on these things. I think the
teacher is about to begin now. He Says:

“This is another discussion on extrasensory
perception or higher sense perception.

“Extrasensory perception is perfectly normal.
It is the beginning of another octave of develop-
ment in the human kingdom and people
everywhere will be developing these extrasensory
abilities in all countries and nations. Another oc-
tave of seeing, hearing, tasting and feeling. It
seems unusual to us because we haven't seen
those people who have that type of development.

“Yet the next level, the Sixth Root Race, will
show much more of this development as a nor-
mal part of their growth of these gifts. They
come with the perfecting of the personality in-
strument. There are many different types of ex-
trasensory perception at the present time, but
actually all types of extrasensory perception
should be normal, rhythmical development in
the next root race. Today we find this develop-
ment unusual, but it is the promise of another
stage of evolutionary development.

“There are a number of things regarding this
extrasensory perception that we probably want
to know about, but first of all we need to realize
that those who show these gifts often show only
one of them or maybe two, possibly three things.
People seem to develop a little unevenly so that
they find themselves with one thing developed
and not another.

“The personality vehicle should be a much
better instrument for expression for the Soul,
Therefore, we need to think of the personality

36

SK Can you ask the teacher what he means by the fact
that he has a good alignment of the mental body and the

THROUGH THE CURTAIN

vehicle as made of parts and yet working as a
unit, But at times this type of development is
more marked in one body than in another. It
by-passes or jumps across or, at times, uses other
bodies.

“For example, Aitken of Edinburgh has
uneven development. A very well-developed,
well-aligned mental body in the higher level.
The mental and causal bodies are well
developed. He has instant access to knowledge
from higher levels of life, which is quite normal
for this type of development, but unusual to us.
But his problem is the astral body which is not
so well developed; actually, he didn't use it
enough in past incarnations. So he has instant
access to all knowledge on the mental plane. But
he is handicapped to some degree, because the
emotional body is not so well developed. It has
to be by-passed, so that the knowledge comes
from the causal to the mental to the physical-
etheric level. Once in a while his emotional body
makes a feeble effort and in doing this it in-
terferes to some extent with his use of his men-
tal body. Therefore, he has some problems —
being depressed about emotional problems.

“The Sixth Root Race should have this instant
clear contact with the mental plane of knowl-
edge and be able to pick it up instantly and be
aware of it. Have a good memory for it.”

centers? What centers are in alignment?
VPN The teacher says:

“All of his centers are in alignment, beginning
with the kundalini or root center in the mental

EXTRASENSORY PERCEPTION 37

body and right on up the scale. They are all in
a harmonious ratio and the brightest one of
these centers is the one that is the most active —
the ajna (or brow), the head center and the
kundalini.

“But on the other hand, the centers of the
astral body are not arranged so that they are in
a harmonious octave of frequency. This is the
fault of the indwelling entity which is the Soul.
This person will have to develop his astral body,

because he has to have a more perfected
vehicle.”

SK Does the same hold true for the development of
Aitken’s brothers too?

VPN They have the same type of development. They
chose to come into incarnation together in order to give

each other a little bit of encouragement and moral sup-
port. He says:

“As it has worked out, this man has not been
able to do too much that is important to the wel-
fare of humanity, although his knowledge and
his ability have been useful.

Clairaudience

“Many people who are clatraudient are simply
using the astral body—remember this; but there

ure several ways of tuning in to the higher
knowledge.”

Telepathy

VI'N Sometimes it is telepathic, in which case the dis-
tiple in in contact with, usually, some disciple or student

38

in the Fifth Kingdom, and he receives instantly the knowl-
edge or information, through the causal body, that he

THROUGH THE CURTAIN

needs or asks for. He says:

“This is a personal relationship between an
Ashram and the disciple, where the disciple has
the capacity for this kind of communication.
There are others who have special abilities but
it is mostly a matter of alignment. Sometimes
it is an alignment with gaps in it, in a given
body, or else one of the bodies is not well-
aligned. The physical-etheric has to be pretty
well aligned and then there can be an alignment
of the mental body or the astral body or both.
When you have a pretty well developed align-
ment of all three bodies then you get more con-
sistent, truer and clearer reception.

“This whole business of extrasensory percep-
tion is really a matter of the mechanics of the
bodies and the centers, and the frequency of
energy and substance. A person who has a sym-
metrical development has these vortices of force
or energy pretty well developed in each body and
moving at a harmonious rhythm and speed. This
is what is expected; this is what is a part of the
development of humanity.

Precognition

“Many people have many more abilities than
they know. They happen to stumble on one abil-
ity, such as, say, precognition and they don't
know they could do other things too. In the case
of precognition many events are really set
because of intersecting lines of force that are
about to meet at a certain point in time and

EXTRASENSORY PERCEPTION

space; and it is possible to see this ahead of time,
although once in a while some intervening force
may change the direction or line of events. But
usually in the case of precognition, the line of
events is already established.”

“Some of the class have questions in their
minds and those who wish to can ask questions
about things.

Instant Clear Knowing

“Instant clear knowzing is an intuitive percep-
tion from the Soul level that comes through as
a conviction of clear knowing at the instant. It
flashes through from the Soul level, the causal
body, to the physical-etheric pretty quickly,
without much interference on the astral level.
But a person who has a very disturbed astral
body has a problem about getting through these
flashes of instant clear knowing.

“Telepathy in future development will be a
normal means of communication and it will be
a matter of thinking thoughts which create an
electrical field impulse which makes an impact
upon the brain of the person who Is receptive
and he responds likewise.

“The Space People know how to do this. They
know how to reach the brains of the people on
earth in this way who are receptive. A few are
receptive to these things; others are not. Some
people can be conditioned very quickly to it, but:

39

VPN He says that Ouspensky’s illustration of the men
on top of the building who see more of the parade than
the man down in the corner, is a very useful one —a good
way to explain it. He says:

40 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

to others it is too disturbing, so they get a little
of it, but not much. Remember this is along the
line of normal development for the future, but
it is unusual right now at this stage. It is sort
of sporadic here and there.”

VPN _ There is a lot of energy in this class. I don’t know
why.

SK What kind of energy?

VPN Energy of ideas. I think you feel that there are so
many things to know and understand. You only take in
a little at a time.

SK Are they asking questions?
VPN I think the students are fighting the energy. It
takes a little adjusting to. Most of them.

SK What are the various potentials of “A’’?
VPN _ This is a personal question.

SK You can’t ask it?

VPN_ No. I can ask him. Some of the students want to
ask him a few questions like this. He will talk to me a
little later when the class is dismissed. A few of us can
ask questions then.

SK What is the main subject being discussed?
VPN _ The things we have been talking about. I am try-
ing to get what is being said. It is a sort of conditioning
to help one understand the vaster, quicker reception of
ideas, I guess it is. He says:
“In our present civilization it is a little difficult
because lots of things you know you can’t use
because people aren’t ready for it.”

VPN He said he will talk to several of us now individu-
ally. There are three of us who wanted to ask some ques-
tions. He says:

EXTRASENSORY PERCEPTION 4]

“The substance of the bodies and the centers
makes a lot of difference in receptivity and if you
don’t allow the outside world of Form to disturb
you too much you are much more receptive.”

The Beam

VPN He says to me that I am cautious. That I could
use the beam. Putting out the beam to observe things in
different parts of the world—it is kind of like a... He
says that we don’t have anything much to explain it yet
in the physical world, but you put out the beam from the
ijna center and that it is in alignment with the alta ma-
jor, the ajna and the head centers. There is a triangle.
‘The beam goes out to different parts of the world. If you
need knowledge or information about something for the
purpose of helping in the Plan, you can often do this.

SK Is this alignment on the etheric, astral and mental?
n what level is the alignment between these three
centers?

VPN He said that in this case it is a special alignment
on the physical-etheric level. That in a sense, you are
photographing almost like etheric photography. Oh, it is
interesting. There is a triangle of energies in the physical-
etheric. Then the beam goes out, and it comes back to
the mental body. Then there is a flashback to the physical-
etheric again.

SK What is the relationship between these three centers?
When they say it is alignment, is it frequency-wise or the
harmonics between these frequencies? What does he mean
by “they are in alignment?” .

VPN The three of them become a closed circuit. The
top head center has the highest frequency. The ajna (or
low) center —it doubles each time. The alta major center

4? THROUGH THE CURTAIN

is the frequency level. It would be in ratio of one—two—
four (1:2:4).

SK What do you mean: The alta major would be one,
the ajna would be two—one to two to four?
VPN One—two—four (1:2:4). He says:

“It really begins with the head center. That
way it would make it a little clearer. The fre-
quency relationship 1:2:4 means— It begins with
the head center. In the others it is octaves. The
ajna center is twice the alta major center in fre-
quency. The head center is twice the ajna center
in frequency. .

“This frequency or relationship 1s established
only during the time of putting out the beam.
At other times they settle back to some other
type of frequency relationship.”

VPN One of the others is a particular type of concen-
tration. Of course, there is the intent to do it, but you
seem to —something seems to “click” somewhere in your
head. It is not easy to observe. You have to think about
it when you do it; then you will see how you do it. At
other times other frequency relationships may be estab-
lished. He says:

“The frequency relationship 3:4:9
frequency —alta major, 3; ajna, 4; and top head
center, 5—gives one of the best all-around
alignments for mathematical and telepathic con-
tact and for other types of extrasensory percep-
tion abilities. In this case it is a greater triangle:
ajna, head center and kundalini center at the
base of the spine. They will show to the clair-
voyant as all being of the same color: golden
yellow; that is, top head center, ajna to base of
the spine.”

EXTRASENSORY PERCEPTION 43

SK Would that be observing them on the etheric level?
VPN _ Yes. It also shows golden yellow color on the astral
level. Higher octaves of golden yellow color—more pastel,
more ethereal, not pastel; that is not right—more ethereal.
3:4:5 octaves.

It is the thing Pythagoras talked about—it is
the . . . He says that not only telepathy and ideas but pic-
tures too, like a mental television, go with this. Sometimes
you just kind of idly see pictures going along, because if
you have the capacity to, you could tune it, and see more
definite pictures of a more specific kind. —

SK Does this relate to the past as well as to the present?
VPN Yes. It is telepathic contact with the records. He
Says:

“This is a kind of alignment that gives you a
certain amount of telepathic contact with the
records of the past of the planet —in the etheric
level not the astral. Although you could see the
astral level, it’s not as clear there. The etheric
level, one of the higher ethers. Some can see the

past —historically hear it and understand the
ideas connected with it.”

A Devic Incarnation in a Human Form

SK Could you ask how?
VPN If it is a question I can ask it.

SK How does the deva work, seeing clairvoyantly — what
is the mechanism?

VPN He says:

“The deva or angelic kingdom naturally sees the
life force. The energies and the frequencies work
much more closely than the human unit or ve-
hicle. It is just like exchange students. Once in

44

THROUGH THE CURTAIN

a long while a disciple on the Path wants to
know more about the deva kingdom and has the
permission to do so; otherwise it is very
dangerous. Such a disciple may lend his
vehicles — physical-etheric, the astral and men-
tal bodies —to some reliable member of the deva
kingdom who is on the level of the human line
of development in the deva kingdom. He has an
opportunity to understand, learn certain things
in the deva kingdom, and the deva steps into his
vehicles at birth. He has to have pretty well-
disciplined astral, mental and physical bodies.
He isn’t allowed to do this, officially, unless he
has. The deva takes on the karma of the bodies
for that lifetime and works in and through the
vehicle in the human kingdom. In which case,
you have very remarkable abilities of many
types.

“The deva still has the ability to see in a way
that all members of the deva kingdom see. They
are very interested in the life aspect, especially
in the growth of plants and animals and human
beings. They are always terribly impatient with
inanimate objects because they are so heavy and
dull to them. Although there is an atomic life,
it sort of depresses a deva. They don’t know why,
but they don’t like to try to observe inanimate
objects too closely, too long. Because the heavi-
ness of substance depresses them. But they like
to observe human beings and animals and plants
and they can be very reliable observers. ‘There
are very, very few in the human kingdom, ever.

“Such a deva is like a window into the life
aspect. He sees so clearly and easily some of these

EXTRASENSORY PERCEPTION 45

life aspects that the human being struggles to

see through many incarnations of discipline and

effort.”
SK What happens to the disciple who gives his body for
such an experience for the deva?
VPN He says that the disciple is in the deva kingdom
during that period. He is learning a great deal in the deva
kingdom. When he comes back into incarnation the next
time, the deva willingly relinquishes the vehicle so that
there is no hold on him. Usually, the deva wants to go
back into her or his own kingdom. Where he has worked
in the deva kingdom, he has left an imprint in the human
kingdom that is helpful. His bodies will have the imprint
of the karma which the deva has given him, which he
must accept. Where it has been permitted, it is usually
good karma, not bad. But practically always he will have
a healing ability and a prophetic sense because the deva,
being a part of the Life aspect of the Form, is constantly
giving harmony to the form of growing things or living
things. That is really what healing is.

Healing is allowing the Soul life to express, because
there is harmony in the vehicles of expression. And so,
the deva gives out harmony and helps to establish more
harmony in the vehicles of expression and the person finds
that this healing energy flows through him more easily
after such a devic occupation.

Also, the deva has the ability to see how the lines of
life energy are moving and so he knows what is going to
happen next.

It is simple, he shows us a thoughtform of energies mov-
ing up to a point of intersection where certain events take
place and so the individual will have prophetic and heal-
ing abilities sort of normally established in his vehicles.
This is an advantage.

46 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

SK How does the deva who sees clairvoyantly use this?
What centers are developed? Are they independent of the
development of the centers? If the disciple who gave his
body did not have clairvoyance, how does the deva use
that vehicle to see clairvoyantly?

VPN The deva can see with or without the vehicle. He
does not have to be bothered by the vehicle. He is limited
to some extent by the vehicle he is in. He may have some
physical karma that bothers him. He needs a good astral
body, because he is in the feeling line of evolution. He
doesn’t use the mental body much. So, primarily, he has
to have a steady astral body in the vehicles of expression
—one that is not too disturbed—one that has been
brought into alignment and harmony.

Now, when the disciple has a physical body, that is,
when he comes into incarnation, he will find that he has
to get used to using his mental body again. He will find
that he will just be blank for a while and he has to get
a grip on and use his mental body. It is kind of like some
piece of equipment you haven't used for a while and sort
of get down and oil it and work with it. So the disadvan-
tage is in the next life. He has to get his mental body
working again.

The deva can see clearly in or out of the body, but he
can express better through the human vehicle. He says
to me:

“Relax and be more aware of the Life and the
Form and use as much of these things as you can
wisely and well. Be more aware of the angelic
kingdom. They can give you joy and beauty.
The angelic kingdom, the joyous messengers and
servants of God, have beauty and life and joy.

“The more you are aware of these higher
frequencies the more you can be a little sad
about the people who go along with their feet

ExTRASENSORY PERCEPTION 47

in the mud and their eyes to the ground. You
can’t wake them up. This is why you need con-
tact with the angelic kingdom. They keep you
cheered up.”
VPN He says to two disciples that they both have some
of these abilities too and they are trying to learn to use
them. He says:
“We will talk again. Come to another class
in a day or two. But there is some kind of
tremendous thing happening on the planet earth
tonight and it is better if we dismiss the class
so that you are functioning in your regular
consciousness.”
VPN _ I don’t know what this is that is happening. But,
he says:
“I think it better for a normal consciousness
level.”

VPN We have our consciousness focused entirely on the
higher levels of the mental plane when we are in class like
this. There is no danger in this. It is just something that
is happening on the physcial plane of the earth. It could
cause terrific upheavals, but these in themselves are not
too important although they seem to be at the moment.
He says:

“Let the Grace of God be around and about
you to deliver you and to protect you. For the
time being the class will be dismissed, but we
will talk again in a few days.”

VPN He says to me that I should come back to class in
the next few days. Til do that.

SK Which day?

VPN He says that I will be going to class more often
for a little while, but it won’t disturb me because I have
been adjusted to it. I don’t think it disturbs me, really.

48 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

So, he says that I live such a strenuous life, but things
will be a little bit easier in the outside world, so that I
can—oh yes—there will be more opportunity for some
classes in education and other things that interest me that
I could use in constructive ways. He says to the three of us:

“Remember that you have been appointed as
disciples in the Ashram.”

March 20, 1961
Night Class of Viola Petitt Neal
Taped by SK

SK What class did you want to go tor
VPN Class on extrasensory perception. I have to find
it. He says:

“Basically, extrasensory perception has to do
with a kind of alignment of the centers: the
etheric, the astral and the mental body centers,
and their relationship to each other, their
interrelation within the system. The centers have
varied harmonics to each other when they are
really functioning correctly and this is especially
true in cases of extrasensory perception. The
centers can have rhythms that are not necessarily
harmonious each to the other. But when they
have harmonic intervals like music or where they
are interrelated from one body to another, har-
monious rhythms, you will find various types of
outstanding extrasensory perception ability.”

SK Does he say what these harmonics are?
VPN He says:

“Usually the interrelation of the centers in the
same body or from one body to the other, in the

EXTRASENSORY PERCEPTION 49

average person is not too harmonious; where it
is, especially in the etheric body, we get these
different types of extrasensory perception. You
can’t force these centers and when you try to,
you get into trouble. You affect the nervous
system or the brain or some part of the body very
unfavorably or even in a way that could cause
an illness. Any person who has a truly har-
monious development will show some extrasen-
sory perception.”

VPN _ He shows a diagram of the centers in the etheric

body; the relationship between the sacral center and the
throat center is 1 to 2. He says:

“This person is very creative and contacts the
higher source of knowledge, especially in his
sleep when he attends classes where creative
ideas are discussed.”

SK Is that in the etheric?
VPN Yes. He says:

“Sometimes there is a very harmonious rela-
tionship between the throat center and the ajna
center and the person then has great ease in
creativity on the outer plane of life—creative ex-
pression of manifestation.”

SK What is the ratio between the throat center and the
ajna center?

VPN It is one of harmonious relationship. We could call
it a first triad.

SK What would be the proportion of harmonic between

the throat center and the ajna in that case?
VPN He says:

“It could be one of two or three different har-
monious relationships.”

50 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

VPN He says, well, that I am not supposed to be in class
tonight.

SK Why?
VPN However, it is all right.

SK Why are you not supposed to be in class? 7
VPN Because I have been working with some condition-

ing energies. It will help me achieve clearer alignments

of the centers.

SK Where? .
VPN All of them in all of the three bodies.

SK What kind of sensitivity would that give you then?
VPN Better alignment.

SK For what kind of extrasensory perception?

VPN Telepathic and contact with the world of ar-

-

chetypal ideas.
SK What made you go to the class?

VPN He says that I have it on my mind —these ques-

tions. It is a litthe strenuous to hold the contact.
It’s the end of the class.

December 10, 1961

Night Class
Recalled by Viola Petitt Neal

Manner of Reading the Akashic Records

This is a discussion on the akashic or planetary records
and an explanation of what they were and their value in
the future. The lecturer pointed out briefly that there was
a great deal of nonsense about the akashic records and

EXTRASENSORY PERCEPTION 51

that every report of clairvoyants and mediums able to read
the akashic records and give individual life readings, was
nonsense.

All the members of the class knew this. There were four
members in this class on this particular evening. I presume
there are others and larger classes at different times. I
seemed to be scheduled to attend this class. After the other
lectures were over on the political leaders of the world and
vortices of evil on the planet, I went into this class on the
akashic records. The teacher of this class was a person
of very profound knowledge. I would say he seemed to
be a very high-level individual. These are inadequate
words. His discussion seemed to be that of a person far
more learned than most of those who are in the college
here. He explained that the akashic records of the planet
were the recordings in the seventh ether of every event
on the planet. That in a sense this recording was like hav-
ing a moving picture camera taking pictures of events that
go on—like a television camera taking the newsreel, only
there was a complete recording of everything; everything
that ever happened on the planet, without exception.
That there was an automatic built-in moving picture
camera, if you would like to put it that way, that con-
tinuously recorded all events. They were imprinted on the
seventh ether, the highest ether. If you think of the first
ether as being the physical plane, the second ether liquid,
the third ether gaseous, the fourth ether light, and the
fifth, sixth, and seventh, then it is the seventh ether. If
you think of it looking from the top down, then it is the
first ether. It is the highest ether then. If I designate it
that way it will be clear. Always, automatically, the
recording went up on the highest physical ether of the
planet, so that all events were recorded.

In the future there will be people who could read these
records or see them. By reading, he meant seeing and in-
terpreting. These recordings would also help us to see the

Ah? ‘THROUGH THE CURTAIN

principles behind them; what the events of history meant,
why they happened; how the human race made the ac-
tual historical events that affect the planet insofar as
history and society and culture go. Also, the physical
events of the planet recorded the earthquakes, tidal waves,
the animal life, the plant life—everything that has ever
happened on the planet and its physical manifestation.
And all that has happened on the astral plane is recorded
in the astra] ethers.

That this is a recording of the mental, the astral and
the actual physical events of things that happened. The
astral plane affects the astral events; the mental! plane,
the thinking and mental life of humanity; but this high
physical ether brings together and records all of these. It
is like having a talking movie. You might have a silent
movie in the old days and then you have the talking
movie.

The record on the highest physical ether is a complete
record. Actual events as they happened, the emotional
and mental reaction of mankind to them, and what ulti-
mately produced history. An interesting moving picture,
no doubt.

In the future, the sixth root race would have more of
this at its command or useful and available to it. There
will be quite a number of individuals who will have ac-
cess to these planetary records; and I use “planetary
records’ rather than “akashic” as all clairvoyants do,
although he used it.

He said most of the clairvoyants and mediums were
merely seeing sections of the astral plane, which were true
or not true, confused or not confused. None of them are
reading the akashic records because they are not read in
that way.

In order to read the akashic records, the individual has
to have a good polarity relationship between the lower

EXTRASENSORY PERCEPTION 53

center at the base of the spine (root center or kundalini
center) and the top head center with the ajna or brow
center acting as the exit point of the triangle, or the point
of focus.

That is why VPN could see moving pictures when go-
ing to sleep at night. VPN sees from the ajna center as
if it were the screen on which the pictures were projected.
This is one method of describing it.

When we will have access to these records of the planet
we will know history as it truly happened. We will see the
principles involved between the forces of good and evil;
the forces that produced a certain culture.

Also any kind of architecture is a projection of the
energy patterns of the consciousness of the people. Art is
the projection of the energy patterns of the consciousness
of the people. The religion and the political systems are
a projection of the energy patterns of the life of the
people —their physical, astral, mental and spiritual life.

We would see more clearly and precisely how these were
projected, as we would see a mathematical problem when
we could read these planetary records. Previous to this
time, it was not particularly useful to the human kingdom
to have access to the planetary record, but at this point
as we begin to have an emerging of the beginnings of the
sixth root race and since the sixth sub-race of the fifth
root race is in America, there will be a beginning of ob-
taining the record which will explain the why and
wherefore of history and give mankind for the first time
principles which they never really understood before.

After the class, there was a discussion by the teacher
with individual students—talking with these students to
some degree about their own work. This very seldom hap-
pens and in all the time that I have attended classes
through the years, there have only been a few times that
there has been any discussion with me about my own par-

54 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

ticular work or what I am trying to accomplish. This is
only done when the student's work is useful in the great
overall Plan and not in order to make the student feel
good or in any way to assist the student with his personal
problems. He is supposed to handle those himself and have
enough discrimination to do so. So this discussion was
more or less impersonal with me as a student —the work
that is my obligation, which I choose to do.

No student is forced to do any kind of work unless he
chooses, as we say, to “join the army,” and then he ac-
cepts the command of his superior officers. Unlike the ar-
my, he can get out at any time and refuse the commands
of his superior officers, if he so chooses. This is understood
also. I can’t imagine a student who understands what is
going on ever doing that, but I know that the student is
free to do so. My free will and that of any other student
is in no way infringed. If we choose not to do the work
assigned to us, we can make that choice.

The teacher sat down with me and said I had a cer-
tain amount of development of the two vortices of force
that makes it possible at times to see some of the planetary
records. The moving pictures I have seen at night all my
life were just a “tune in” on the planetary records as I
went to sleep. They were not in themselves too important,
the things I saw. In a sense this was an exercise, like finger
exercises when you are learning to play the piano, to keep
me in practice in this particular ability.

In order to see the planetary records of history and
events, you have to have a certain harmonious frequency
between the vortex of force that has been designated as
the top head center, the Spiritual polarity, and the vortex
of force that has been designated as the center at the base
of the spine, the kundalini center, which 1s the matter
polarity. There has to be a certain amount of synchroniza-
tion between these centers on all three levels in the ve-

EXTRASENSORY PERCEPTION 55
hicle of expression, the personality. That means the
etheric center, astral center and mental center. *

In each case this was simply a pattern of energies which
produced the kind of focus which made it possible to see
or read the planetary records. In the same way that you
adjust a telescope to look at the stars, you have an ad-
justment of the energy pattern between these two. This
is not any special gift of God. He says:

“You could think of the two centers as two
lenses that had to be adjusted so that they came
to a focus at a certain point, which was the ajna
center.”

VPN _ This was a symbolical description here but a very
good analogy. This had to do with the type of choice an
individual had made through many incarnations in his
interests and development. The person through many in-
carnations had an interest in both the spiritual aspects of
life and two other things— mathematics and science. An
interest in science and mathematics developed and
brought about a certain frequency in the kundalini center,
and an interest in the spiritual aspects of life, meaning
and purpose, brought about a development of the top
head center so there was a frequency established between
these two. I mean a frequency relationship. You had to
have a more or less equal development of the two—the
interest in science and mathematics and the interest in
spiritual truth and the spiritual realities. In one lifetime
you might develop more of the mathematical and physical
sciences, and in another lifetime the spiritual.

He said that in my last incarnation I moved over more
to the Spirit polarity, but I still have an interest in science
*A clairvoyant observation of VPN by an independent person who
had no knowledge of this information did perceive development in

the top head center, ajna and base of the spine. They were brighter
than all the other centers in the body.

56 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

and mathematics. When you reach a certain point’ of
development, when the frequency of each center has
reached a certain stage, you can see the akashic or

planetary records.
In an ancient incarnation in Egypt, I wrote a

manuscript on conical sections, worked with mathematics,
and at the same time worked with the mystery school
teachings trying to relate mathematically the spiritual
teachings. In this life, I had picked up the same thing
working both from the mathematical and scientific point
of view, and the spiritual point of view. He said that I
would remember in college that I was torn between the
two things. I did an equal amount of work in the sciences
and mathematics, and in philosophy. At times, I was very
active in college mathematics and physics and put on a
chemistry exhibition. At other times, I veered away from
that and I went out and sat in the woods to think about
why man exists on the planet. Actually I was trying to
achieve a balance between these two energy patterns and
this was all right in line with development.

He said that my life pattern had led me all over the
world to contacts with many people and many ideas. I
had to pick up again things I had known in the past. I
have had quite a number of years in evaluating human
beings for this new method, which is a revival of the laws
of Manu. These laws of Manu were known in the early
appearance of the fifth root race on the planet and down
through the ages have been known, corrupted, known and
corrupted again.

Although I had felt all along that my work at the
Biometric Research Foundation was my basic work, ac-
tually it was a preparation for something else. Again,
although it was very valuable to those people who received
it and was helping to produce leadership which was im-

EXTRASENSORY PERCEPTION 57

portant to the country and important to individuals, it
was like the finger scale in learning to play the piano. I
had to learn to evaluate people clearly; to know what was
in their consciousness and what was not; to develop the
ESP (or HSP) that gave insight into poeple as well as in-
to the principles. That the “Y” project is the beginning
and often when you are in the midst of one activity you
are preparing for the next one. It was the beginning of
preparation for a time when I would have more leisure
to look into the akashic records and point out relation-
ships and principles in history and write on these subjects.

He said that the human race would go through this very
bad period which was mentioned in the previous class dis-
cussions, but we would begin to be ready for an enuncia-
tion of principles. Man was graduating from the old
superstitions of religion, although the basic truth of
religion was there and it had been overlaid with supersti-
tion and authority. True religion would be based on
principles —the understanding of principles of life in the
universe, which will bring us to the heart of understand-
ing who and what the Christ is on this planet.

He said the time would come when I would be doing
a different kind of work. It would be possible to write very
quickly and easily because I would have clearly in my wak-
ing consciousness all of the concepts that I have had
through the years from attending classes. These would rise
to my consciousness — outer awakening consciousness, with
clarity and precision—and I would hardly be able to write
fast enough to get the information down. I would prob-
ably do a lot of it on tape recordings and correct it later.

There are other people in the world doing work like
this, doing work in other fields, so I am just one of many
who will be doing this work. It will be possible for peo-
ple who are waking in their consciousness to have teaching

58 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

in this area, taking concentrated courses of principles that
would be very helpful in the new approach to life, econ-
omy, culture and government.

He said that although it seemed very difficult right now
to establish and earth this work, it was being done through
any of the people who chose to participate or felt an urge
from their own inner awareness to help with the estab-
lishing of this.

March 21, 1961
Discussion— VPN and SK

Method of Contacting Archetypal Ideas

We were thinking of the ability to contact the ar-
chetypal level of ideas on the Buddhic plane. Usually we
are so busy with routine and little details of daily living
that we don't take time to do it even if we could.

VPN I have been trying to be a little more aware of this
kind of thing and, after discussion, I went to bed and was
lying quietly and I began to realize there was a point be-
tween sleeping and waking when you have quieted the
outer mind, but you are wide awake still, when you can
move into the world of archetypal ideas, much as you
would walk into a library. Somewhat like a library. You
move into this world of the akashic records and archetypal
ideas — and because your ordinary outer mind is quieted,
the concrete mind or the personality mind, you are able
at the Soul level or the Buddhic level to contact these ideas
much as you walk into a library and open the books and
look at them and, perhaps, choose a book on the subject
that interests you.

EXTRASENSORY PERCEPTION 59

Actually, this kind of technique is far simpler than we
think, Perhaps it is difficult at first until you learn to slip
into it; and you can do it in a full waking state of con-
sciousness. Of course, your mind needs to be alert. If you
are sleepy and tired and go to sleep, you go past that point
of alignment or point of awareness. It is like a door. You
pass by the door and don’t enter and go to sleep. Then
you don’t make such a contact in full waking consciousness
as you might otherwise do. | think this type of technique
could be acquired by people who have a pretty good
integration.

During that period of contacting the world of ar-
chetypal forms there was a little further illumination on
this concept of life and form. If we could become aware
of the Life within the Form, we would have command
of the form world—an effort to understand this a little
more clearly. The realization that such ideas could trans-
cend the world of material disturbance and confusion to
such an extent that if you knew and understood these ideas
and concepts you would be able to overcome the outer
destructive forces without any way of fighting them or
making a point-blank attack on them. It would be a mat-
ter of transcending them.

I am still trying to understand what the real principle
is with regard to understanding the Life within the Form
or becoming identified with it or being able to see it and
therefore having in a sense a command of the form world.

SK Could you describe the technique of becoming aware
of this library of archetypal ideas?

VPN My mind was very alert; we had been discussing
a number of interesting ideas. We had several questions
on our minds and finally concluded that since it was three
o'clock in the morning, we should go to bed and forget
about the discussion until another time. So, I went to bed

60 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

and my mind was still on the discussion. I was still wide
awake and still very mentally alert. I became very quiet,
lying very still with my mind quiet and alert. Now, many,
many times I go to bed and I am tired and I go to sleep
and I try to make myself stay awake to think and I don’t
seem to have too much interest in what I am thinking
about and after awhile I drift off to sleep. But this par-
ticular time I remained mentally alert, wide awake, and
so I got very quiet physically. By that, I mean lying very
still, achieving first of all a physical stillness. I felt a lit-
tle tense when I first went to bed. Simply because I was
still, perhaps, steamed up with all of the discussion and
ideas, but I became very, very quiet physically, still not
really relaxed in the ordinary sense in which you talk
about relaxation, but poised and alert, quiet and what
I would describe as a neutral point in that there was no
reaction to the outside world as such. It was as if one
withdrew all reaction to physical environment. Perhaps
it would be easy to slip into the world of archetypal ideas
or into that frequency level. I can do it when I go to sleep
at night when I go to class. And I can remember it the
next morning, but I am asleep or in a sleep state when
that happens and I remember our class where certain dis-
cussions have taken place or certain knowledge has been
given by the lecturer or teacher.

I can remember it very clearly, or I can relay while in
a sleep state, what is being said and remember the next
morning that I have done so, but I thought I could do
something different —-remain conscious, so that I was just
on the razor edge between the archetypal world and wak-
ing consciousness, and then it was as if I walked into a
library, but I was fully conscious. It was like a fourth-
dimensional experience, and there was someone there who
actually talked with me some. But I contacted the ideas
almost immediately telepathically in the brain con-
sciousness. I wasn't actually taking a book and opening

EXTRASENSORY PERCEPTION 61

it in my hand and yet these records existed in a vibratory
frequency and I seemed to receive them directly in my
brain, which is like telepathy.

SK How did you focus your consciousness?

VPN Pulled in my center of focus or center of con-
sciousness some place in my head. But it wasn’t a place
where I had usually focused it for an Ashramic contact.
Now, that is curious because I hadn't thought of that until
you asked me the question.

SK What was the difference between the two contacts?
VPN Well, when I make a contact with the Ashram —
I pull into a central point in the center of my head which
must be about where the pineal gland is, and it is a pin-
point of focus or pinhead of focus—a short point of focus.
In this case, I simply seemed to move in consciousness in-
side my head, and to a chamber inside the head, or a cave
in the head rather than a point of focus. Maybe it was
a large area which I was pulling into focus.

Oh, I think I know what it might be. I would like to
explore this technique a little from time to time and see
just what it is and how it is done and then perhaps I can
be a little more helpful in the process.

February 25, 1962
Night Class
Recalled by Viola Petitt Neal

Dimensions of Consciousness

We are one of the mental root race, but we are going
slowly and we are thinking in terms of abstract concepts,
which is not easy. We are coming into the development
of abstract thinking. We have to learn the method of ap-
proach to truth whereby we can tune in to knowledge with

62 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

an instant clear knowing and then examine this knowledge
with the concrete mind. The above method is different
from the approach to knowledge by the concrete mind.

Another method of tuning in to knowledge is a fourth
method of using the mind. You put out a mental antenna
and pick up the frequency of the knowledge wanted.
Focus on the knowledge you want or need. This is sim-
ple, but not easy because you have to have a clear and
precise awareness of what is wanted and what is being
sought. It is surprising how confused people are about
knowledge which they are seeking.

An instrument was shown with thousands of antennae.
Each antenna picks up a certain frequency. It is like tun-
ing in or switching to the right station. This approach to
knowledge requires clear step-by-step asking by the in-
dividual. It is different from the other methods such as
analogy. The fourth method is possible for twenty per cent
of the people, but it requires a certain amount of develop-
ment of the mental body. It requires the ability to attack
a problem step-by-step, and to tune in to the problem so
that the problem itself will tell you what is next that you
have to know.

Remember the logical procedure of concrete mind will
not necessarily tell you what the next step is and often
it hinders you. The concrete mind applies the knowledge
and is needed.

When this fourth method of using the mind can be used
with any facility, there will usually be enough contact with
the Soul and personality to censor the use of this knowl-
edge for constructive purposes only. The destructive
person is not able to use this method or approach to
knowledge and feels blocked about it. He is very alert to
try to find the people who he thinks are creative and use
them. Some totally new things will come to the human
kingdom through this method for obtaining knowledge.

EXTRASENSORY PERCEPTION 63

When we are properly tuned, the knowledge comes clear
and strong.

The fourth method is really the basic approach to
exploring the universe. The other three methods are pre-
liminary steps and amateur states of mental development.

Training in mathematics, especially geometry, is an ex-
cellent preparation for this approach to knowledge. The
method used in geometry of giving the problem and set-
ting out to solve it, step by step, is an illustration and a
training, of course, in this approach to knowledge and
the use of the mind.

We do not understand yet, because we have not seen
the whole picture, that mathematics is the basis for the
universe and for all knowledge.

Culture and civilization are man’s application of this
knowledge and if we look back over past cultures and
civilizations we see new relationships and make new com-
binations. We are still working within the framework of
the knowledge we already have. Modern scientific methods
develop the use of three methods to knowledge: (a) in-
ductive reasoning, (b) deductive reasoning and (c) reason-
ing by analogy.

Mathematically any knowledge exists on its own fre-
quency band which is innate to that knowledge. In fact,
the knowledge is the frequency band. By asking the right
question you tune in on the frequency band. Underline
this in your thinking. This is how the Masters of the Fifth
Kingdom tune in to any knowledge they want. A well-
developed mental body is essential and a good education
is helpful for this type of mental work. Right motivation
is automatically part of the tuning device.

Mankind becomes really creative when he can use this
method. This is the breakthrough in consciousness which
mankind will make. This method will be the basis of the
new society and will make it possible. It will automatically

64 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

establish a hierarchy of leadership and establish a new
ideal for development in the human kingdom. Those who
will be able to do this will have a radiance and an energy
that goes with this knowledge that they contact and pres-
ent. This is the mental development intended for the

Aryan or fifth root race.

SK The problem to be studied and approached accord-
ing to the fourth method given was the study about the
etheric body as a pattern and web on which the physical
body is built, dealing with vortices of energy and what
conditions them in the etheric body, and indirectly deal-
ing with things which adjust karmic causes.

VPN_ The best approach is the study of the astral effect
on the etheric vortices of energy as well as the total con-
stitution of the body. The fourth method could be used
to tune in to the etheric body and the astral impact on
it and to use psychiatric knowledge and people with
special gifts to analyze and observe on the outer plane of
life. The etheric body is the foundation of man in incar-
nation. The physical body is the incidental result and a
necessity. Knowledge of the etheric body and its function
is essential to helping man in incarnation.

March 17, 1962
Night Class
Recalled by Viola Petitt Neal

Geometrical Forms, the Key to Tuning
in on Specific Knowledge

Some of you come to a school and remember classwork
given, but you must remember that there is a twenty-four
hour broadcast on the mental plane and if some people

EXTRASENSORY PERCEPTION 65

had better “crystal receivers” in their heads they would
tune in on these broadcasts. The fact that the fifth root
race is to develop the mental aspect means something
different from what you suppose. Naturally, concrete
mental bodies have to develop. This is, in a sense, a
preliminary to the real mental development of the fifth
root race.

By concentrating on certain geometrical forms at cer-
tain points in the brain, you tune in on organized units
of knowledge available at all times to anybody who tunes
in. This method can be taught to a student in waking
consciousness. Some development of the mental body is
necessary and an ability to focus and concentrate. The
teaching procedure using actual visual forms will be set
up. Those of you who come to class and remember can
act as bridges for eventually setting up methods for train-
ing many other people to tune in by setting up outer
schools. This sort of system is now under an impact of
frequencies which will activate a hitherto latent part of
the brain which is the caudate nucleus. This is a built-in
receiver set for receiving knowledge from the higher mind.
This is actually seeing true relationship at once instead
of stumbling along and theorizing about facts.

This observation in acquiring a fact has its greatest
value in developing the concrete mental body and assisting
in outer manifestation of the material world.

A little experimenting with visualizing geometrical
forms in the brain in specified areas is helpful as pre-
liminary training. ‘These geometrical forms are keys to
tune in on specific kinds of knowledge, at the same time
tuning out all others. You start with good-sized forms,
such as a diamond, visualizing it as large as a dollar and
then eventually using very minute forms at a minute point.
You have your whole radio and television set in the brain.
This is why mathematics is the key to the universe, as
Plato said.

66 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

June 12, 1964
Night Class
Recalled by Viola Petitt Neal

New Alignment of Centers in the
Sixth Sub-race and Sixth Root Race

The instructor seemed to be an individual from a high
level in the Ashram— First Ray Ashram.

Since the Full Moon of Humanity in 1964, the Manu
of this root race, the Lord Vaivasvata, has moved into
a somewhat closer contact to the human kingdom in a
special activity that had been scheduled for this time. At
the end of May, the formal beginning of the sixth sub-
race as a sub-race was Inaugurated and many thousands
of disciples graduated into this sixth sub-race. Their grad-
uation was formally recognized by the Manu in gather-
ings of disciples in their causal bodies and at the causal
level. The ceremony may not be recalled by most disciples
in the personality consciousness, but all those ready for
graduation were formally and individually recognized by
the Manu. This particular ceremony did not signify any
special assignment of work at this time. This will come
later. However, it did indicate a new alignment in the case
of disciples which should make it possible for the Soul to
reach the personality at the level of the physical brain.

In the present root,race, the fifth, the main line of
development has been the completion of the mental body
and its focusing and aligning. Those who are students and
disciples on the Path, for the most part, have achieved
this to a degree. At this point a method will be used with
the sixth sub-race which will be the method of the sixth
root race. Soul and personality alignment is being read-
justed on a new pattern. This could only be done after
the stage of evolution has been accomplished wherein the

EXTRASENSORY PERCEPTION 67

astral and mental bodies have been fairly satisfactorily
completed. Remember in this connection that there is still
work to be done on the astral and mental bodies by all
disciples, but the basic work has been accomplished.

The new alignment is of a special type, decided upon
by the Manu in Council with Shamballa. This alignment
is from causal body to etheric body to physical brain, and
then to the astral and mental bodies. Up until now the
alignment in the human kingdom has been causal, men-
tal, astral, etheric, physical. With this latter type of align-
ment, any disturbance in the mental or astral body could
block the Soul contact reaching through to the physical
brain level. The new alignment removes two of the ma-
jor blocks, putting them in the line of reception from
etheric body to astral and mental. This new alignment
does require some adjustment in the etheric and physical
vehicles, but this is not so difficult and can be accom-
plished with the cooperation of the disciple in achieving
good health. The disciple will also be receiving specific
impacts of energy to help accomplish this. These are en-
ergies directed from the Manu’s department which will
vitalize the etheric and physical bodies and make it easier
to achieve a state of health and well-being. On the other
hand, too great a transgression of the laws of health will
cause much more distress and discomfort.

This alignment will give much clearer impressions from
the Soul level into the physical brain. The sixth root race
will be characterized by this Soul contact from the higher
mind. The sixth sub-race is the pilot group already open-
ing up these channels for future development and bring-
ing changes now at this time into a very confused world.

It has been decided to begin this activity at this time,
at least 200 years in advance of the time planned much
earlier, The whole life of the planet is speeding up and
the implementing of a number of activities is starting

68 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

ahead of schedule. This means that events will move faster
than was at first anticipated. Today humanity is under
tremendous impacts of energy from all levels. Therefore,
the good and the bad are more marked. You were told
at last year’s Wesak that the keynote was cleavage—
cleavage between the forces of good and evil and in many
other ways. This has moved faster than was anticipated
at that time. It appears that humanity is moving toward
a major conflict in the outer world which will simply be
an outpicturing of the major conflict between good and
evil in the individual human beings of the human
kingdom.

Do not let this unduly distress you as disciples. Keep
your focus towards Soul contact, and whatever construc-
tive and creative activity is possible to you.

Eternal Flame

Life ts a jeweled lamp

Forever burning in my heart,

Undimmed by darkness in the world of form.
My brothers of the lamp are everywhere.

A sea gull swinging in ecstatic flight.

A forest fawn immobile in the glade.

A humming bird with iridescent wings.

The jewelled lamp burns brightly in each one
My fellowman who sings along the way

We know each other

Brothers of the lamp.

The Wesak Festival

April 30, 1961
Night Class
Recalled by Viola Petitt Neal

The Wesak Festival, 1961

This year the Wesak festival has very special signif-
icance. The place of the festival is within the Crystal
Temple of the Torch. This is a beautiful underground
temple which has held for long ages the archives of this
planet. The great torch above the altar has remained
unlighted through all the ages, until the time when
enough disciples in the human kingdom have achieved the
Birth of the Christ in the Heart. When the Soul is born,
then is lighted in the heart of the individual the ever-
burning flame. Each disciple becomes an ever-burning
lamp in the Temple of Sanat Kumara (God). When
enough of these flames are lighted then it is said that the
great torch in the central temple of the planet will be
lighted.

This is a great event upon our planet. Sanat Kumara
came to light the flame of consciousness in the human
kingdom. Until a certain time it was not assured that
enough of our life-wave would achieve this birth of the
Soul. The lighting of the great torch means that enough
of the disciples of the world have achieved this to make

70

EXTRASENSORY PERCEPTION 71

possible a new step forward on the planet. The light of
the great central flame upon the planet once lighted can
never be extinguished. Its lighting at this Wesak festival
means that at the heart of our planet the immortal flame
has been born and that this will always be a Christ Planet.
Although the forces of darkness will sweep in toward this
central flame engulfing mankind for a short time, they
cannot succeed in extinguishing the light of immortal self-
consciousness upon the planet. Mankind must still work
to evolve, but the immortal self-conscious human being
is established on the planet.

This ceremony of the lighting of the torch will take
place in the presence of the assembled multitude of dis-
ciples, initiates, Adepts, Masters and Kumaras with the
Lord Buddha, the Christ, and the Lord of the World.
It is the work of the human kingdom as well as the work
of all those in the higher kingdoms which makes this great
forward step on our planet possible.

This ceremony and all the resulting energies directed
to the human kingdom will bring more light, more
awareness, more clear-seeing on the part of humanity. It
will clear the astral fogs that surround humanity with self-
ish desires that engulf mankind. The lighting of the great
torch —the central flame of the planet — will bring illumi-
nation on the mental plane.

The Christ said, “You are the light of the world.” We,
as disciples, are the ever-burning lamps and we are also
a part of the central flame of the planet. By our achieve-
ment we make possible the lighting of the flame.

Our candlelight services on earth are a symbol of the
lighting of the immortal flame of consciousness. Because
Sanat Kumara came to demonstrate light, we who live and
move and have our being within His Consciousness faintly
discern this truth and outpicture it in all our altar flames
in all our religions.

72 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

It is said that shortly many more lamps will be lighted
as many more in the human kingdom achieve the birth
of the Christ in the heart. This will be achieved quickly
through suffering and travail as the antichrist “seeks the
young child to destroy him.” This seeking to destroy all
good in the human kingdom will be the last great effort
of the forces of darkness on our planet for long ages to
come.

Light is the answer to darkness. As humanity, seeing
the horror of evil, chooses good with definite deliberation
and lights the. lamp of immortal consciousness, evil will
be dispelled.

When disciples first realize the power of evil and dark-
ness they are dismayed. You do not meet this kind of thing
with violence. Light—the light of the lamp of immortal
self-consciousness— is the only weapon against darkness.
This Wesak will brighten the light of awareness in each
disciple. Light has great power. It will show up in sharp
clarity the forces at work in our world today. We will
begin to know more definitely what we want to choose.
The conflict in the world may grow more sharp and more
threatening, but in that case it will be resolved more
quickly.

The antichrist must answer the challenge of the
Lighting of the Torch. He will reveal himself before very
long and endeavor to push back the light. Failing this he
will endeavor to imitate the light. He will offer human-
ity the three things which Satan offered the Christ — bread.
“Make these stones bread,” said Satan to the Christ, “and
enjoy all the material things you want. Do the spectacular
and make all men praise you.” He will do the spectacular
to get all men to worship him: the antichrist. He will of-
fer power to all the kingdoms of the world. But all these
things are the rewards offered to the sons of darkness. He
who is immortal and eternal does not need to grab the

EXTRASENSORY PERCEPTION 73

material world or power or glory. The Sons of God can-
not be bribed or fooled by these things. This is how the
antichrist will be vanquished. The Lord of Darkness will
be conquered by the light.

As disciples, we must seek to overcome any darkness in
ourselves. The only power any negative force has is what
we give it by the darkness in ourselves. Let us cast out
the darkness that we may walk in the Christ light.

March 25, 1962
Night Class
Recalled by Viola Petitt Neal

Humanity and the Three Spring Festivals of 1962

Forces are being marshalled to come to the aid of
humanity. Earth humanity is in a sense a colony of Venus
and partakes of the Venusian quality. It is basically sound
and has an attitude of good will and good intention, but
its progress is slow. This, in a way, helps earth humanity
and consists of a pattern of approach.

First of all, a frequency impact that began on the 21st
of March, 1962, was directed to earth humanity. It will
affect the mind and actual physical brain so that earth
humanity will start rejecting the negative things thrown
at it by radio, television, the press. There will be a turn-
ing away from all these things and the Plutonian forces
will not benefit. It will baffle them. Venusians and Mar-
tians will move in-with more positive projects and ideas
and earth humanity will move over to these groups and
begin to support them. This is so subtle that there is
nothing to fight. It is like fighting air. This will hasten

74 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

the takeover by the ae It mm baffle the Plutonian
ive them cause for alarm.
The ee spring full moons will heighten the saa!
impact and bring what has been a slow saaiemeaag 45
the planet into sharp crisis—a move up in tempo.
will have several effects on earth humanity: A strong
dynamic allegiance to the Christ which begins with ie
For the first time, an awakening all over the human ing-
dom at the time of the Wesak festival to the reenter
forces. This has never happened before on ore si
They will see that there are forces of light to ca ” a
help. They will see the way to win the battle not wi vio"
lence, but with the illumination of their minds, and as
that is available.
ats eae accomplished by the direction of ire
quencies from the Buddhic plane to the whole of eart
humanity. This is the beginning of a widespread open-
ing to the esoteric teaching. . .
At first, the antichrist forces will not oppose esoteric
teaching because they consider religion an opiate for the
masses and belief in immortality as utterly stupid.
There is a definite change in consciousness coming
about in earth humanity and nothing like it has a age
before. It is a matter of weeks rather than hundreds 0
years. This is a method that has been decided upon in
the Council of Shamballa and with the Hierarchy im-
“ wanibenet methods were evaluated and this has been
under consideration for many weeks. The outer events on
the planet of Plutonian origin demanded a change °
strategy from the forces of light. The great weapon owe
the Plutonian forces is the illumined consciousness 0! aa
kind. This is really a method of stepping up the light )
consciousness in earth humanity and also in Valea
Martians, Neptunians, Mercurians and Jupiterians. The

EXTRASENSORY PERCEPTION 75

impact of inspiration on extra-terrestrial planetary groups
for good is to help them find forms and methods for utiliz-
ing the new illumination of earth humanity.

The June Festival of Humanity, 1962.

This is an extremely important year. It is expected that
there will be a tremendous crisis in the outer world in-
volving the whole planet. It could be the establishing of
a world government under the antichrist in outer mani-
festation. It is already established, but not yet revealed
outwardly.

At present we are in a kind of “no man’s land,” waiting
for the attack on humanity. Many Venusians and Mar-
tians are being forced out of their present ways of life in
preparation for having them out of the danger areas and
in places where they could give better cooperation when
the real crisis comes. Many of earth humanity—the more
intelligent group —are very restless and revolting against
a meaningless life of economic pressures and jobs that they
feel are not honest or constructive. There is a great unrest
among earth humanity. The masses even feel a kind of
Divine unrest like a person who has eaten too much yet

is hungry for the right thing.

There will be an outpicturing of the Hierarchy more
definitely and more quickly than it was at first planned.
We had to have the impasse for a time because it was the
least destructive way to bring earth humanity to a sense
of need and, therefore, to respond. Our Planetary Regent,
Sanat Kumara, having brought earth humanity to the
Lighting of the Torch in the Crystal Temple has been able
to ask for extra-planetary help without hindering the

growth of humanity on the planet.

Every available person who knows and understands the
wisdom teaching is going to be needed to help to instruct
76 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

humanity because they are ready to respond to the en-
ergies of these ideas. Ideas have to be presented without
sensationalism and glamour. Remember, earth human-
ity has a basic soundness,

There were about two hundred students present.

May 14, 1962
Night Class
Recalled by Viola Petitt Neal

Cleavage—the Keynote for the Wesak, 1962

This Wesak is focused in Tibet. It is on etheric levels.
The political conditions will prevent most of the pilgrims
in physical bodies from attending but many will be pre-
sent in their astral bodies. All disciples of the world will
be aware of what takes place at the Soul level. There is
an energy focus which will help them to become aware
at the personality level.

Each disciple of the world, even aspirants who have any
dedication (figuratively speaking) will be a lighted
candle — to light the personality and to make them a part
of the light in the world. This will give them a more clear
awareness of those things and those activities which belong
to the realm of light and, therefore, more discrimination
to know what belongs to the Forces of Light and cooperate
with it. That is why the keynote for the 1962 Wesak is
cleavage. Because the light they are receiving will show
us the darkness. The light they will receive is a protec-
tion also because the forces of darkness flee from the light.
This inner light will, therefore, conceal and protect those
who belong to and have chosen the forces of good. This
is referred to in the Book of Revelation as the “White

EXTRASENSORY PERCEPTION 77

Stone,” and also referred to as the “new name” which des-
ignates the Sons of Light.

. There is also a focus of negative energy at the same time
in the —but this is not so potent. It is powerful because
of the concentration of the black forces, but it does not
have the power of the Wesak.

This Wesak also marks an impact of the energy of the
Avatar of Synthesis coming in through the Christ. The
next full moon, this energy will manifest in and through
the human kingdom on the physical plane. At this time
the whole planetary Hierarchy is focused and concentrated
on the energy of the Wesak and all the Ashrams are en-
deavoring to link up with their disciples and students to
reach them with these concepts of ideas and energies.

May 19, 1962

The Wesak Ceremony as Perceived by
Viola Petitt Neal During Meditation

The area is surrounded by mountains; no trees are seen.
There is a very wide rock which looks more like a flat-
surfaced plateau. A formation of people is seen. Many
were present.

There is a seven-pointed star formation of people pres-
ent according to Ashramic position, Within the center of
the star there appears to be an inner circle where the
Masters seem to be present. On the periphery of the star
crowds of people seem to be present. In the very center
of the seven-pointed formation a figure seems to be stand-
Ing, considered to be the Christ by the observer,

At the moment of the full moon, the Buddha appeared
on a shaft of Light in the sky and became a channel for

78 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

energy from Shamballa. He descended into the center of
the star and stood beside His Brother, the Christ. Then
the Christ moved forward three steps and became the
focus for the Wesak energy.

The following ritual was observed to be carried on by
the Christ:

Hands stretched upward as though receiving the
higher energies of which he was becoming the focal
point. His hands were then stretched outward form-
ing the cross. (Identification with the creative
process — Spirit-Matter.) Then He stretched His hands
forward and horizontal at right angle to the chest and
blessed the crowd. (Outpouring to humanity of the
energy of the Spirit.)

The above ritual was done three times. Then all
those present did likewise after Him, after completing
the three movements each time. The crowd present
turned around when they did the ritual as though
extending it to all humanity.

The center where the Christ was standing seemed to be
over a part of the earth which had a holy ground or a
temple beneath it.

A light appeared in the sky, which came to a focus at
a point and from there it was rediffused over the surface
of the earth. It seemed to cover the whole planet. Grad-
ually it moved in to a more focused circle including just
the area. But a certain amount of this light energy would
remain from now on, on the planet. One part of the light
remained, penetrating to the center of the earth. This is
very bright and it is established from now on.

Somehow, the light that seemed to light in the sky was
connected with the Avatar of Synthesis.

There was also sound being used at the ceremony of
Wesak, but the student who was present could not recall

|

EXTRASENSORY PERCEPTION 79

what the exact sound was. “You felt like an electrical fre-
quency was going through you, not too strenuous and yet
dynamic.” This seemed to last perhaps six to eight minutes
and had an effect on the student of opening up of con-
sciousness which will take a few days to adjust to. It seems

this was the first time that this type of ritual has been used
in this manner.
Iil

Fsoteric Embryology and Physiology
Man

Eons of time have waited for this son

Eternity has held his destiny.

And if in infancy he ts called man

Know this, that he must sleep and wake,

And sleep and wake,

Through many days and nights of time and space
And cherish the clay toys he has made.

This child of Matter... Maya... Mary |
This child of Will... of Life... of Spirit
Until the day of his majority,

When he steps forth knowing his destiny.

And in that day shall matter be redeemed
And spirit be illumined by that light

Which is the splendor we call consctousness,
Which is the light of all the worlds that are.

cee ear en

Fsoteric Embryology
of the Centers (Chakras)

May 13, 1962
Night Class
Recalled by Viola Petitt Neal

When an incarnating Ego prepares to come into incar-
nation, his desire and intention (or the Law of Karma and
Evolution in unevolved humanity) sweeps into manifesta-
tion two great vortices of energy: a) the energy of Spirit,
which is the positive or plus polarity and b) the energy
of life Substance, which is the minus polarity.

These were shown in a thoughtform intersecting at five
major points, which forms the five centers between the
base of the spine (kundalini or root) center and the top
head center. These two spirals of energy move into a har-
monious vortex which forms first the heart center which
is a swirling vortex of force. This creates the magnetic pull
which begins to attract the physical substance for the
building of the physical body. This magnetic center is said
to be where the life is anchored, The heart center is often
pictured as a radiating sun. It is the first fully established
center in this process of incarnating.

As soon as this is accomplished a vortex of energy ap-
pears at the top head center and at the base of the spine.

83

84 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

These three vortices of energy establish the three centers
and this makes possible the establishing of four more cen-
ters —two above the heart center and two below the heart
center.

Then the building of the physical body proceeds. The
physical permanent atom (according to the ancient
wisdom teaching) is simply the pattern on which it is pos-
sible for those energies to build the physical body. The
quality of substance depends on the stage of evolution and
the karma of the individual. The life thread comes in from
the top head center, and the energy of substance from
the center at the base of the spine. Both of these energies
are anchored in the heart center where we find conscious-
ness centered. Figuratively speaking, Christ or con-
sciousness is born in the heart.

The life or Spirit energy is the Father. The energy of
matter is the Mother. The two meet in the heart center
where the Son is born. This is the magnetic center. The
same happens in the two other bodies or vehicles, the
astral and the mental. ~*~

The important principle is that whenever a positive
energy meets with a negative energy in a harmonious
union, magnetism results; and where there Is a magnetic
vortex there is creation and manifestation. In other words,
the same process takes place in the forming of solar
systems.

Thirty students were present in class.

Esoteric Aspects of Physiology

December 10, 1961
Night Class
Recalled by Viola Petitt Neal

This seemed to be a survey course with the idea that
certain specific points would be taken up and discussed
later dealing with the esoteric aspects of physiology.

The teacher began by saying that there were three sys-
tems in the human body that correspond to the three
planes in the three worlds: the physical-etheric, the astral,
and the mental.

The blood corresponds to the physical plane. It sustains
the actual physical life of the body by providing food and
nourishment and carrying away certain waste products.
It is Third Ray—which is physical manifestation.

The lymphatic system corresponds to the astral plane.
It is Second Ray, Love-Wisdom. It deals with the
magnetic field of the body, magnetic attraction. If we
realized that it maintains the magnetic field of the body,
we would understand a little more about what it means
in the physical body, for it corresponds to the Love-
Wisdom aspect.

The nervous system corresponds to the mental plane,
It carries the life aspect. It is First Ray or Will Ray.

There is a polarity in the body between the brain and
the liver. The brazn is the positive charge related to the

85

86 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

mental plane and, on a higher level, to the Soul aspect;
in a sense the focal point of the Soul aspect is in the brain.
The liver is the minus charge related to the astral plane
and, on a higher level, to the personality aspect; in a sense
we might say that the whole personality has a focal point
in the liver. When the liver is too poisoned, the brain does
not work,

There are within the brain plus and minus polarities.
There is a repetition in the brain of the seven vortices of
force that constitute the whole human being. In the brain
polarity, there is a correspondence to the liver in the
liver/brain polarity.

Carotid bodies in the head/neck correspond to the liver.
He did not say the alta major center. The carotid bodies
on the physical level correspond to the liver on the physical
level in relation to the main structure of the brain which
is the top area, the cerebrum.

The alta major center as a vortex of force in the etheric
body corresponds to the kundalini center as a vortex of
force in the etheric body. The discussion was about the
etheric body and the alta major center and its relation-
ship to the top head center in the brain. In other words,
if we took the top head center in the etheric brain, it has
a polarity to the alta major center as a repetition of and
corresponding to the top head center and the kundalini
center.

The extra-pyramidal system will be developed more in
the physical brain of future mankind.

The caudate nucleus deals with the head antennae —
millions of antennae which in the future will deal with
the ability of all the extrasensory perception abilities, such
as the ability to see events at a distance and the ability
for telepathic contact. The sending and receiving station
for telepathic contact is located in the caudate nucleus.
This nucleus is the mechanism that would be activated

are

EsoTERIC EMBRYOLOGY AND PHYSIOLOGY 87
and used as the race develops. Some people have a cer-
tain amount of development. The ability to read the
planetary records (Akashic) has something to do with cer-
tain antennae activated in the caudate nucleus. This is
the physical mechanism used by the interplay of the top
head center and the kundalini center (base of the spine
or root center), with its outer focus in the ajna center.
This would be the physical mechanism for handling this
ability from the etheric to the physical. This physical
mechanism is the caudate nucleus. The ventricles of the
brain act as a screen (like a screen for moving pictures).

SK Could you describe the caudate nucleus as you saw
it in thoughtform presented in class?

VPN This thoughtform was about three feet long and
about two to three feet deep, depending upon which part
of it, it was. The teacher projected it in midair but did
not discuss it completely because there were a lot of things
which were interesting in that large projection. There were
innumerable lines like the radiations of the sun. There
were different centers for higher sense perception (HSP
or ESP).

There were very fine lines, thousands of them, and the
caudate nucleus is like a miniature brain for higher stages
of development. The centers for higher sense perception
were located in different points in this caudate nucleus
and the antennae for these were focused at a point. There
were certain foci which were pointed out in it that had
to do with each higher sense development. In most peo-
ple the circuits in the caudate nucleus are not connected.
This is the best way to describe it.

When the esoteric teaching talked about antaskarana,
or the bridge in the brain, it was really referring to a con-
necting of the caudate nucleus with the rest of the
brain—at least the connecting of these antennae circuits.

88 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

Each circuit has a sending and a receiving station. With
some people, certain circuits are connected. For exam-
ple, in those who have telepathic ability—the circuit is
connected with higher hearing. In those who can see at
a distance or can see the Akashic or planetary records,
the center is connected with the region of seeing in the
brain,

In many cases there are several of these centers already
connected in a given human being. For example, those
who can hear telepathically, not with their ears but tele-
pathically, and also can see, have the hearing and seeing
senses connected.

The higher sense of smell is connected in some people.
If this is connected, these persons find the word nostalgic
has a very powerful meaning to them. The teacher did
not explain this. At times, instead of tuning in on the pic-
tures or information they tune in on the feeling tone of
something. This, curiously, has to do with the sense of
smell, which is odd, but he did not explain.

The antaskarana is built by the student, first, in the
etheric brain and then in the physical brain and the cau-
date nucleus. Naturally, there is a circulation and nerve
connection, but the actual use of this caudate nucleus is
not known yet and has not been experienced except very
slightly by some people who are students, who have gone
ahead with their own development.

In summary, it was stated that more will be found out
about the lymphatic system, the caudate nucleus and the
carotid bodies and their relationships. They have a chem-
ical relationship which deals with the development and
use of the caudate nucleus.

Often students who experience a certain amount of this
adjustment of the physical vehicle in the caudate nucleus
area have tachycardia (rapid heart beat) of the type that
is produced by a little imbalance in the carotid bodies

EsoTERIC EMBRYOLOGY AND PHYSIOLOGY 89

which disturbs the function of the heart, but it is not a
pathological condition. This is due simply to the adjust-
ment that is required for a careful chemical adjustment
of the physical body, especially the digestive tract where
all toxic conditions begin. In some overloading of the di-
gestive system, he said that certain foods contain those
products which are most suited to the physical vehicle and
others are not because of the hereditary makeup of the
physical body. As we know more about biochemistry, we
will be more careful in the selection of food, especially
in the case of the disciple. At all times the disciples or
students have known that they have to accept certain dis-
ciplines in food. For the most part this has been blindly
done without a knowledge of the chemistry of which foods
are most suited to the physical body of an individual at
a certain stage of development. The time will come when
we will have a science of the foods most suited to people
at certain frequency bands; then we will avoid toxic con-
ditions in our digestive tract, which in turn disturb the
liver and the blood stream.

The elimination of disease hinges upon elimination of
the toxic condition of the body. The chemistry laboratory
of the body in perfect chemical balance would be prac-
tically impervious to disease for at least 125 years. The
present physical vehicle of mankind was designed to last
for from 100 to 125 years without breaking down. We
know nothing about the science of the body chemistry.
So far our efforts in healing have been primarily directed
toward alleviating the pathology or a bad malfunction
when it occurs.

The teacher used a lot of medical terms. I think most
of the students knew medicine, but I didn’t. I think this
is why this lecture was for SK. He said the future of the
care of the physical body and the overcoming of dis-ease
had to do with biochemistry and an understanding of the

I) THROUGH THE CURTAIN EsoTERIC EMBRYOLOGY AND PHYSIOLOGY 91
chemical structure of the body. Many people today are
studying biochemistry. They study the protein molecules
of the body and the other types of things that he men-

quickly disappeared because of the healing qualities of the
energies they contacted. But this was not the normal or
desirable way of life.

tioned. One of the scientists who received a Nobel Prize % This was a survey of a course that is being given in these
for the study of protein molecules was LP, who is known <= ] H _ . .

h h . a ¥ classes. He was giving the high points of some of the things
to SK. But, t e teacher said, this is an example of the & co he discussed Laker:
type of study going on so far. He said it had not crystal- =

lized into a system of treatment because the old method ~
of putting foreign things in the body and giving drugs for
the alleviation of bodily ailments, especially synthetic
drugs, was very well entrenched at the present time. That
since no better system is known, it seems to be the best
that people can do.

Herbal remedies are excellent; but he said that you
couldn't really call them remedies, They are plants pro-
vided for the use of mankind to help adjust and re-
establish the chemical balance in the body. They should

and the more primitive people, had an excellent knowl-
edge of herbal lore. In some cases it was incorrect, but
basically it is a very correct knowledge and could be very
quickly adjusted. When the human body needs fluid in
the future, it will be administered through herbal teas.
The man whom we both know, Dr. B, was attuned to some
of this knowledge and was bringing it through. There were
many others mentioned —LP, too.

He said a more cleansed and perfectly-functioning phys-
ical body or vehicle would make possible a higher use of
the brain structure. In this regard, spirituality has a con-
nection with the physical vehicle.

We were quite right about the saints, or the mystics,
who were trying to take a higher voltage of spiritual energy
in a physical vehicle not well adapted to it. They experi-
enced tremendous functional upheavals, which often
Poe Ee

IV

Healing

Who ts God

The Chinese sage

With his ivory balls

Carved in beauty each inside each.
Seven dimensions

Seven worlds.

He ponders long

And his quiet face

Shines with wisdom and inner grace.
“Who is God?” I gently ask.

“Hold this symbol and look within
God ts ever becoming more

Ever a life in greater life,

Worlds without end and lives without end.

Each life lives in a life more vast,
Until at last the Absolute.”

The Study of the Etheric Body in
Different Centers of the World

September 17, 1960
Night Class of Viola Petitt Neal
Taped by SK

SK What is the best way of making the study of the
etheric body and its centers available to the medical pro-
fession or the rest of the world? Is the approach being
made at present by humanity correct or should there be
modifications?

VPN Very little is being done, because up to now man
knew very little about the etheric centers or anything of
this, so not much has been done.

SK Is there anyone who is studying these things now?
VPN Yes, several places in the world.

SK Where?
VPN In India.

SK Which part of India?
VPN Somewhere in the North of India, there are some
people but they are clairvoyants. They are like yogis.

SK What is the name of the town in India?
VPN Somewhere up in the mountains in a small village.
I think this is a mystery school and the name is not given.

95

96 ‘THROUGH THE CURTAIN

They are Initiates of the White Lodge. It is a kind of in-
formation like that given by the Tibetan. It is too high,
too technical at the moment.

SK What other places?
VPN “X” works with it.

SK “X” works on it? Is “X” working in the correct
manner?

VPN “X” is working under the Ashram too, “X” tries
to do practical things in the West—the Western way of
approach, which is fine.

SK Do you think “X”’s approach is correct?
VPN _ This is the best approach for the present and “X”
knows that.

SK What?
VPN “X” ought to know that.

SK Could “X” improve on the technique?

VPN This is the best thing to do now. There will be
someone else a little later who will and can be of assistance
to “X". I think someone connected with the Ashram who
will be of assistance in this effort.

SK Will it be a doctor or a clairvoyant?

VPN _ It probably will be a person who has some kind
of professional standing. That person has had some train-
ing, He has got very clear gifts, like the other person. He
will be clairvoyant.

SK Which other person?
VPN The Deva.

SK Is the Deva good?
VPN_ The Deva is very good and sees the world of sub-
stance and the energies in the world of substance.

HEALING 97

SK What is her name or his name?
VPN She has the body of a disciple— feminine vehicle.

SK But it is a Deva?
VPN Devic being.

SK Would it be possible to continue the work with the
Deva next year?

VPN Yes, she probably has family problems coming up,
but she must be held to the work. This is her destiny.

SK Do you think she will be away for some time next
year in India?

VPN Well, maybe not.

SK Is “X” able to study the centers in mental patients
or should there be a delay?

VPN _ The next step seems to be a glandular problem — -
pituitary, thyroid, especially — if possible. “X” gets infor-
mation in class. The reason “X” is so determined and feels
so strongly that certain things must be done and stays with
this kind of work is because of the instruction in class.
When “X” sees in the class what the work is and what

the need is, then “X” becomes dedicated to that work or
need.

Various Types of Healing

September 17, 1960

Night Class
Recalled by Viola Petitt Neal

Faith Healing

This is related to the state of the astral body affecting
the physical body. There are certain things as regards this
that may clarify the concept. In the class the discussion
about the astral body and the lack of its proper alignment
affecting the etheric body, is very interesting. It was stated
that many of the illnesses of mankind began in a dishar-
mony of the frequencies of the astral body affecting the
corresponding center or centers in the etheric body, and
then resulting in an effect on the physical body. |

Faith healing and the healing at Lourdes and the possi-
bility for an individual to be healed through an act of
faith from the Soul level, in which he knew and was sure
he could be healed, brings about an almost instant align-
ment of the centers of the astral or emotional body. This
would be so tremendous and dynamic that it would in-
stantly affect the etheric centers in the physical body and
bring about a healing such as those recorded in Lourdes
and others which are known and experienced by some
people.

This act of faith explains what is meant by that term
because the person knows suddenly so clearly that he can

98

HEALING 99

be healed that there is a flow of energy from the Soul
level. You might say from the Buddhic plane which vital-
izes, readjusts and re-aligns the astral body and produces
this instant healing; or if not instant, a fairly quick-healing
process which sometimes takes a matter of days or even
weeks. The type of healing which is recorded at Lourdes
is one of the most outstanding examples. It was mentioned
because over the years there have been records of these

‘unusual types of healing.

Healing the Astral Body by Symbols or Ritual

This establishes a state of harmony in the astral body
and will do more towards a total state of health in the
physical body than anything else. For the most part karma
is registered in the astral body until humanity has reached
a greater sense of development. That is the karmic pat-
tern. The emotional pattern that an individual has when
he comes into incarnation is primarily his karmic pattern
that he is working with. Through ritual and symbols it
would be possible to bring in those energies which will
adjust the karmic pattern, which is negative and dishar-
monious and, therefore, establish a better state of health
for human beings and a better karmic pattern to work
with.

The symbol mentioned in class was the winged circle
of Egypt. We have seen it on Egyptian symbology. It was
a white luminous disc; the wings appeared to have col-

ors, but this, I think, is because we think of wings as hav-
ing feathers.

Healing the Etheric Body by Sound

With the physical etheric body there will be the use of
sound, as a method of affecting substance immediately.
In the beginning, the form world was made through

100 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

sound, and sound at that level, without concept, can be
used to begin to establish harmony in the etheric body
and in the dense physical. If the imposed rhythm of the
astral body continues to be negative and destructive, then
the same or similar condition will come about or can come
about in the physical and etheric bodies and yet in order
to help the individual to find ways to adjust the astral
body he can be relieved of some of the problems and pres-
sures of the physical body through the use of sound.

This will have to be a beginning, because it would take
longer to adjust the astral body than the physical etheric.
So, healing methods will work in the future very definitely
with sound to give the incarnating individual breathing
spaces to adjust the astral. In a state of health established
through the level of sound, the physical and etheric level
can be maintained—and this is the beginning.

In the beginning, the Form was perfectly made through
sound—but the imposed rhythms of astral and mental
levels can destroy the harmony. The harmony can be re-
established through sound and maintained if the incar-
nating individual is able to establish a right emotional and
mental outlook.

SK Why is the winged circle used? To which center is
it related?

VPN The ajna center or brow. This was said last night
at some point in the lecture and is interesting because the
ajna center is the center of the integrated personality and
not the solar plexus, as I would think myself.

SK Could you see in the demonstration in class how this
pulls energy from other levels?

VPN _I was shown exactly what the symbol looked like:
a luminous white light. It glowed as a thoughtform in the
center of the space in front of us in the class.

HEALING 101
Healing the Mental Body

People can be taught to achieve a development of the
mental body quickly through methods of teaching mathe-
matics. Today, people are taught mathematics by memo-
rizing it. They do not see it as the science of relationships.
Mathematics is the pure science of relationships.

The human race has almost entirely developed the
astral body. In the process of doing so it has misshaped
and disturbed and warped it, and, now the next step in
the human race is through ritual and symbol to adjust
and align and establish harmony in the astral body. In
a sense it is easier to do this because the astral body is
more fluid than the physical. The disharmonies we have
brought about in the physical body are in some ways
harder to adjust because they are the dense physical body,
which is not so fluidic. The astral body could be adjusted
more quickly than we think in the overall pattern of ad-
justment of the human race.

Summary

The following methods will be used in healing:
a. Physical etheric level—sound will be used.

b. Astral level—the use of symbol and ritual to adjust
and restore the harmony of all the centers in the
astral body.

c. Mental level—mathematics and science; but in an
expanding concept of science and mathematics one

can be taught to see more quickly relationships
through mathematics.

102 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

d. Color was discussed as the bridge. It pervades all
three methods. Color was the uniting field of force
of the three methods, that is of sound, symbol and
ritual, and mathematics and science. All three of
these methods were unified by a field of color and
so color was an overall unifying field of force.

el nes ae I, nT,

Alignment of the Centers

September 17, 1960
Night Class of Viola Petitt Neal
Taped by SK

VPN _ The astral centers should be in alignment with the
etheric. Most of the time they are not. They are all on
octaves of frequency that are in resonance and have a har-
mony like music, or the music of the spheres. First, all
the etheric centers have a frequency rate like an octave
of music. The astral centers are on the next octave of fre-
quency and then the mental. But it is the astral ones that
are always out of tune, like a piano out of tune. They
should be on a higher octave of frequency.

If you think of the heart center as middle “C” in the
etheric body — this is just an illustration—then in the astral
body the heart center should be the “C” an octave above.
When this frequency relationship exists in perfect har-
mony, you have a condition of health. When it is in dis-
harmony you have disease. For example, the solar plexus
center is the one in the astral body that gives a lot of
trouble. So, also, in the etheric. I think he has something
to say about leaks.

Leaks

Leaks are due to disharmony in the astral body caus-
ing the leak in the etheric. The leaks are really when there

103

104 ‘THROUGH THE CURTAIN

is disharmony between the corresponding center in the
astral body. The astral body is anaemic and the etheric
body tends to leak all over. The main problem of human-
ity today is in the emotions, in the astral body.

SK How could one stop the leaks? Any suggestion as to
treatment of the leaks in the different parts of the body?
VPN_ Generally speaking, leaks are from the astral body
in the sense that disharmonious frequency affects the
etheric. But sometimes the leak in the center of the etheric
body is simply due to etheric causes. But most of the time
it is from the astral body. Leaks can be cured or helped
by helping the person change his emotional pattern, if it
is from the astral body. Sometimes it is just from the
etheric and physical levels.

SK Is there anything else one could do on the physical
and etheric levels to help the leak?

VPN The Life Force of the physical body comes in to
the etheric where it is modified and modulated by the
astral and the mental bodies, but mostly by the astral
body. Sometimes people are born with damage in the
etheric body from other incarnations and then it is hard
to do much about it even from the astral level.

SK What would be the best thing, for example, to treat
the leak in VPN’s throat? How to treat it and what would
be the best way of dealing with it?

VPN It is temporary, it is partly physical. A little trouble
with the physical thyroid from a toxic condition in the
body. Also, from all level work.

It is possible to treat with sound. These higher frequen-
cies of sound will help to establish the right frequency re-
lationship in the different centers in the astral body and
also in the relationship of the astral to the etheric.

SK How do you impose the frequency?
VPN They are using sound, ultrasonic.

HEALING 105

SK How many octaves above the audible?

VPN It depends on the keynote of the person—the triad.
Each person has his own keynote and depends on what
it is on the scale of audible sound. There is some kind
of mathematical frequency about this, if we knew the

mathematics. You find the person's keynote in the musical
scale.

SK How does one find that exactly?

VPN _ Simply find out which note is most pleasing to the
person.

SK In one octave or in any of the seven octaves?
VPN Whichever note in all of the seven octaves he likes
best. Then you take the octave seven octaves above the
audible sound and you find the corresponding note in the
corresponding octave in the ultrasonic.

SK Seven octaves above the personal note?

VPN _ No, there are seven octaves of audible; seven oc-
taves above, inaudible. The note in whatever octave in
the audible sound —find the corresponding one in the cor-
responding octave of inaudible sound —ultra-sonic. This
is the sound that will help to establish a greater harmony
in the astral body, So, then you treat the etheric with the
audible and the astral with the inaudible octave. There

has to be a way of helping astral bodies of mankind. They
are so confused —cannot reach them.

SK How long do you play this note or octave?
VPN Not very long, not more than three minutes.

SK How many times does one repeat it?
VPN It could be done three times a day.

SK How does one know which center would benefit best?
VPN This kind of treatment is the beginning and
general treatment for a general sort of bringing the
centers, the astral body into alignment. Specific treatment
106 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

would also be worked out. It could be worked out In a

mathematical scale.

t looked at the astral body or

SK If a good clairvoyan eel ase

astral centers and the etheric centers,
relationships?

VPN Yes, and it would help if this was done. It could

be done—say with the throat center and the son plexus
center. Just start by looking at two centers an sad
ing the etheric and astral parts and how they a ‘i tee
This would give a line of research which wou y

profitable.
SK You mean to look at the etheric center and then the

I?
VPN Let us say the throat center. If you have aan
who has a bad physical condition of thyroid, then loo

|
at the etheric throat center and, also, look at the astra

throat center.

Photographing the Etheric

September 17, 1960
Night Class of Viola Petitt Neal
Taped by SK

SK Would it be possible to photograph the etheric body
and the centers?

VPN _ It would be possible to photograph the etheric and
in the distant future, possibly the astral.

An interesting thoughtform is presented to the stu-
dents— what it would look like. You see the etheric centers
very clearly and then, sort of interpenetrating and hav-
ing a different quality, the astral. The astral centers are
larger than the etheric in the thoughtform that is
presented. You can see the outline of the etheric centers
clearly and the energies moving and scintillating. Then
you see the astral centers.

In the thoughtform the lecturer brightens up the etheric
centers so that you identify them, then kind of dims the
etheric centers and brightens up the astral centers. When
he does this you can see the outline of the etheric centers
clearly. Next he brightens up the astral centers so that
you can see their relationship to the etheric . Then he sort
of dims the astral centers and pulls up the etheric and
they are brightened. You can see how they interpenetrate.

SK How do they interpenetrate?
VPN You know, one is over the other more or less.

107

108 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

SK Is the astral larger or smaller than the etheric

centers? .
VPN The astral centers are larger in this thoughtform.

SK Some clairvoyants see them smaller.
VPN They are shown larger in this picture.

SK Is there any way of photographing the etheric

centers? .
VPN There should be a discovery to do with crystals.

SK What kind of crystals?
VPN Some kind of thin sheet of crystal.

SK Any specific crystal?
VPN Quartz—the crystals are some of the elements
which might be useful in this.

SK How could one photograph through it?

VPN _ Just to look through it at first. Try sheets of crystal
like those used on radio. Try looking through and photo-
graphing through, The secret for this is to be found in
crystals, because they have to do with the di-electrical
energy which is really etheric energy.

SK Does one use ordinary film?

VPN It is not so much the film as what you photograph
through. You need a sensitive film, but it is going to be
possible to photograph with substances that pick up
something more than the physical plane.

SK Will it modify if one used the crystal with a lens
camera or must one use a camera without lenses?
VPN You can use an ordinary camera and then use
crystal in front of the lens. Try it.

Se ee ee ee

The Astral Body of Disciples
on the Path

September 17, 1960

Night Class of Viola Petitt Neal
Taped by SK

This is a discussion of the astral body as it relates you
to the world of form. The astral body is your antenna in
the world of form. The discussion does not deal with the
astral body from the healing aspect, but rather from the
point of view of the disciple on the path who has gained
a certain amount of control of the astral body.

The desire aspect of the astral body is that dynamic part
which keeps humanity moving forward in the earlier stages
of evolution. Because we grow and evolve through desire.
The desires that attract mankind in the earlier stages of
evolution are those desires best indicated to help him
achieve growth in consciousness in that stage of evolution
that is right and good.

But as he approaches the stage of the Aspirant and Pro-
bationer on the Path, the astral body has a different use
and purpose. It should no longer be the body of desire
in the sense of the desire for things in the outer world,
desire for prestige or this or that. It should become a very
sensitive instrument for sensing his world, the disciple’s
world, being aware of the state of consciousness, state of

109

110 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

emotions of the world around him, so that he can rightly
evaluate his world.

The mental body is the discriminating vehicle in higher
levels and should become his discriminating vehicle in the
world of form, in the outer physical world. It is like a sen-
sitive antenna giving him the feeling tone of any situa-
tion of people in general of the world around him. Very
specially it is the instrument for reaching out and becom-
ing aware of the outer world for the disciple on the Path.
The mind is for manipulating the outer world. The con-
crete mind with the higher mind uses those inspired ideas
in the outer world.

The astral body is used as an instrument for reacting
to the outer world as long as the individual is centered
in the world of form— personality centered.

The disciple must not react, but act. If he reacts then
his astral body is involved, but if he acts from the Soul
level by way of the higher mind, the concrete mind, then
truly he changes his world. You do not change your world
by reacting, but by acting.

The person who acts from the center of himself must
do so without being disturbed by the emotional reaction
of the outer world. He must say, “This I must do,” and
do it and not be involved in what the outer world thinks.
So he acts upon his environment instead of reacting emo-
tionally. The astral body is secondary; a reservoir of energy
for action in the outer world of form.

Astral energy is related to the Cosmic Buddhic plane
and to the physical cosmic. Energy can flow from the Bud-
dhic plane into the astral body when it is rightly disci-
plined and controlled, in order to give the energy or fuel
for action in the world of form. This should be the pur-
pose and intent of the astral body.

In the disciple on the Path the symbol for achieving
this kind of use of the astral body is the winged circle of

oe a ARTE sets

peer

HEALING lll

ancient Egypt. This is one of the reasons for the class in
symbols of Egypt a short time ago. In the Mystery School
of Egypt the student meditated upon the symbol of the

winged circle in order to achieve this kind of use of the
astral body.

SK _ Does the student use the form or the color or both?
VPN Sort of luminous white as if one saw it illumined
with a white light behind it. A thoughtform is shown
which is very good—as if it were etched in glass with a

white light behind it to give the students a picture as to
how to visualize it.

SK Are you in your own class? c
VPN _ It is MJ’s class in the course I am in.

SK How many are present tonight?

VPN Eight or nine students. If the astral centers are
really in harmonious relationship it can bring about a
humanity where there would be very little disease. But
most of humanity has a dis-harmony in the astral centers
and this modulates and disturbs the etheric energy in the
etheric body. There is a line of cause and effect. Through
symbol and ritual the astral body could be directed
trained and brought into harmony in time. :

It is interesting, this energy from the Buddhic level

when it comes into the astral body (a thoughtform is
shown). This winged circle is like a button or valve that
opens a channel to let in energy from the Buddhic plane
in small amounts as the astral body can take it. Energy
from the Buddhic plane to help achieve this use of the
astral body. (A thoughtform was presented — it spreads in-
to this astral body; you can see the color change in the
thoughtform.) This symbol can be used by disciples on

the Path who are probationary or disciples. It is safe to
use it.

112 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

SK For how many minutes a day?
VPN Visualize it for four or five minutes a day. It would
be very helpful. Today, mankind’s biggest problem is the
astral body in the sense of their emotional reaction to
things, especially the great mass of mankind. There will
be an effort through ritual and symbol to work with the
astral body on the astral level. And with the etheric and
physical body sound will be used because you have to work
from both aspects. You have to work on the etheric and
physical bodies. There is no use working on the physical
without working on the etheric. Even drugs and medicines
affect the etheric first and the physical second. Their ef-
fectiveness is because they have an etheric frequency.
You have to begin the healing field on the etheric level
by the use of sound from the physical plane level of
modern science, and from the esoteric level using the Bud-
dhic energy through the use of symbol and ritual to treat
the astral body.

SK What about color?
VPN _ This will help more on the physical-etheric first.
Sound is the key to substance.

Hot Flashes

SK What is the cause of hot flashes and what could be
done to be relieved of them?

VPN It has to do with unbalance of —a disturbance be-
tween the pituitary and the sacral center—ovaries or
gonads,

The energy interchange is disturbed in the physical
body around 45 years of age. There is often an imbalance
of —no it is a lack of right energy exchange in the physical
body. It is mostly the physical chemistry of the body.
There are diseases due to physical conditions, but this goes
back to etheric self structure.

fet Relates oo gc

a ee Te 4 ——

HEALING 113

SK Is it better to handle it with diet or with actual re-
placement of the hormone that is absent?

VPN Diet and rest and fresh air and normal procedures
are better than medications. They don’t solve the pro-

blem, that is, medications, but they short circuit it and
cause other problems.

The College of Healing

March 3, 1961

4:30 A.M.—6:00 A.M.

Night Class of Viola Petitt Neal
Taped by SK

VPN During conditioning classes energy is directed to
the personality unit, the physical-etheric, the astral or the
mental body, or all three. Sometimes this takes a whole
class hour. It’s under the energy impact for a certain
period of time. This helps to improve the memory and
it generally helps to improve the alignment, because some
people don’t remember things that are said to them in
the classes. This is not always the reason for the energy.
This energy field is a kind of conditioning energy. It is
a pattern and it is along certain lines of force. The teacher
says:
“We can see a thoughtform of how it works.”

VPN It takes time. It seems very difficult how long it
takes people to wake up, to register impressions from the
Soul level or from other higher levels. They seem to do
it very slowly.
This energy force-field has different colors too—som
are golden-yellow, some are blue, green. There is one
which seems more violet. I think this is one of the more
advanced disciples. It’s an alignment for contact with his
Soul and personality and then perhaps Monadic later on.

114

ae

“aa

HEALING 115

SK How is this field created or generated?
VPN It's hard to say. It seems to have a connection with
the centers of the teacher in charge. The different centers
are used in the etheric, astral or mental body. It is a mat-
ter of different centers in each case, so the centers and
the quality of the centers is really what makes the instru-
ment more useful or resilient. That is, the substance of
the centers or the kind of energy that goes through is de-
pendent upon the kind of substance that is there in the
first place. Those who are more advanced people in the
world have a higher type of substance in the etheric or
astral or mental body. Sometimes there is conflict with
a higher type of substance in the astral and physical-
etheric, but perhaps the mental body doesn’t have the
substance it should and then the person doesn’t have the
well-rounded development he needs to have. I suppose this
is partly a matter of conditioning too. A part of condi-
tioning energy. The teacher says:

“Much of this energy is really sound. Sound and

color. But it is higher octaves of sound that af-

fect and condition the aspirant and disciple, so

that they can comprehend concepts and ideas.”
VPN There are quite a number of disciples and students
who . . . It is interesting that many of these disciples seem
to be asleep. They are not aware of being in another
dimension. They are being conditioned with their own
consent, really, but they show lack of awareness — not all
of them, but lots of them act as if they were sound asleep.
It’s very odd.

SK What is odd about it?
VPN Iam used to seeing students here aware of what
goes on. I have not seen these that are not aware.

SK How many are present?
VPN It is a great sort of theatre of people, but each one
has a particular beam of energy on him, as if everybody

116 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

were under a different type of impact or frequency. Each
‘ndividual is subjected to his own particular impact of
energy frequencies, but it seems this energy is a little hard
to take sometimes. I am under it too. It is a different kind
of energy in my case from that of the ones close to me.
It’s a kind of energy impact that seems to open up your
consciousness.

SK What is the one you are getting? What is its color?
VPN _ It's a golden yellow with some violet. The instruc-

tor says:

“Disciples get this impact of energy whether they
realize it or not. Often when they are out at
night in the astral or mental body they receive
help and energy and conditioning.”

VPN I think this could help the physical body too. He

says:
“Often someone who is feeling ill recovers rather
quickly because he is sensitive to these treatments
and they very quickly pull him out; but some-
times people are slow to react or respond to the
frequencies, so it doesn’t seem to make much
difference immediately, but the effect is that a
change in the bodies takes place.

““X? has a problem with heat regulation of the
physical-etheric body. It has to do with the
etheric body and the physical body, and it is due
to the thyroid or throat center. The thyroid is
activated so that it sends an alarm signal to the
physical body and this begins with the pitui-
tary—and the pituitary gland is the governing
gland —and there is in the normal process of liv-
ing the pituitary in the physical body which has
control of the physical body. The pituitary dele-
gates work to the different glands—the work
they must do.

i ~

ee

HEALING 117

“If *X’ could get down inside her liver —if she
had that minute state of consciousness— she
would find a liver that is not as harmonious as
it should be. It would look cloudy.”

VPN I can see the thoughtform of this. It looks cloudy
and in some places lots of cells aren't functioning at all
and in other places the function is very poor. In some
places it brightens up. It is like moving around in a cor-
ridor. You see it as if you were a miniature or something.
He says:
“The pituitary sends messages to the ovarian
system and says, ‘Work on cleaning up the liver.
Get rid of these toxins.’ And there isn’t any
ovarian system, and so then the pituitary looks
around for somebody else to handle the prob-
lems and he finds the thyroid, the strong fellow.
The thyroid can do its usual job and a little ex-
tra. It is kind of like a work group where some-
body is absent and the others have to take on
his work. These are absent entirely, so the
thyroid is made to work.”
VPN I was just seeing a thoughtform again.

The thyroid says, “Well I only have certain avenues to
handle this and I will have to do it the best way I can.”
This is a thoughtform and a sort of animated way of
describing this. He looks around at the situation and says,
“Well, the skin is good. There are millions of channels
and the skin is a good way, with all these channels avail-
able, for dumping out this trash.” So, he sort of presses
a button and the trash gets dumped out through the skin.
He says:

“The liver has to do with the astral body, so
for two reasons the liver has problems with any-
body. ‘X’s’ liver is the one we are looking at.

“Maybe things taken into the physical body
have a very definite effect on the liver and poison

118 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

the blood stream. The liver reaches up with
many hands and takes them out. It is a very self-
sacrificing organ; it sometimes kills portions of
itself —sacrifices to prevent poison materials from
getting into the blood stream too much. The
liver is also affected from the astral body. It
might be called the astral organ in that people
have lots of fears or sorrows or griefs or resent-
ments or negative emotions. These also affect the
etheric liver and the physical liver. It is primarily
the astral body, not the mental body, that af-
fects the liver. The mental body can affect other
organs.

“It is a good thing that the liver is self-
regenerating. If the other parts of the body had
the same ability for self-regeneration, it would
make a great difference in the life and the youth
of the physical body. Of course it begins always
in the etheric—the etheric liver then the physical
liver. A person who has a glandular system that
keeps tossing out rubbish is very lucky; he lives
longer.

“In a few months ‘X’ will feel much better
about this because the toxic—well, no, there is
a lot of rubbish stored in the liver too.”

VPN It is very interesting. I see a thoughtform of it.
Rows and rows and rows of rubbish. It seems so mag-
nified, sometimes really the cell has lost its life force, but
it is still in the storeroom where the rubbish is stored.

SK Where is this rubbish coming from?

VPN It has been taken out of the blood stream and it's
also somehow connected with the astral body and this
whole thing is very interesting. The liver has a self-
regenerating capacity and every now and then it looks at
the whole system and says, “Perhaps I can get rid of a

-

ite a

HEALING 119

little of this rubbish.” And so, it puts some of it out in
a conveyor —the blood stream. Then, the pituitary says,
“Well, I have to handle this,” and it tries to get the ovaries
to, but they aren't there, so then, the thyroid decides it
goes out through the channels of the skin.

But, “X” is regenerating the liver pretty well. And this
has to do with the regeneration of the liver —it’s not just
food eaten now, but it’s an old story, the house has got
an attic full of rubbish and the closets full. It is a kind
of housecleaning. It means that “X” will live longer and
be stronger once the liver can get rid of the rubbish and
rebuild. It could go out through the intestinal tract, but
the adrenals are not quite strong enough. There is a weak-
ness there; it is not serious, but they can’t take on an ex-
tra load. If the adrenals were stronger this rubbish would
go out through the intestines and colon. The thyroid is
kind of busy—a busy one.

SK Through what center is the liver affected? Which
center is related to it?

VPN _ The solar plexus center in both the astral body and
the physical-etheric.

SK What does he suggest to help the liver?
VPN He says:

“It is pretty far along now, but it will ease off.
The liver is getting straightened out. A good diet
helps.”

SK What kind of diet does he suggest?

VPN Just a minute. He is going to tell me something
about . . . This is very interesting, because a lot of these
people are under impacts of energies to help them with
some of these problems too, Lots of disciples. He says:

“The thyroid has a harmonious frequency kin-

ship with fruit. Also, the whole system of heal-
ing goes into herbs. The plant kingdom includes

( 120)

—¥"

THROUGH THE CURTAIN HEALING 121

body,
see frequencies that affect

vegetables and fruits and has a very wonderful
affinity for the etheric body and it is the etheric
frequency of the different plants that affects the
physical body. The Chinese know a lot about old
herbal remedies. They are Atlanteans. Different
plants have frequencies and they take them into
the body. They think we take the herb and it
affects the physical body, but it doesn't. It af-
fects the etheric body and then the etheric af-
fects the physical.”

VPN This is very interesting—you can sec it in the
thoughtform. He kind of puts you inside the physical
as if you were very, very miniature. Then you can
the etheric body and then, the
etheric body affects the physical and this is how the her-
bal remedies work. He says:

“This is the principle behind the homeopathic
treating. It gets the etheric body first and then

the physical.”

VPN Also, the vegetable kingdom and fruits. He comes
back again and he says:

“Fruits have a beneficial effect on the
thyroid—not to excess, of course, because you
have to balance and adjust with other parts of
the body. So maybe you need vegetables too. It
is a sort of balance.

“Some vegetables have an etheric frequency
that is more harmonious to certain parts of the
body than others. There are some vegetables
that have a harmonious frequency to the liver
and this would help the thyroid too, because it
would help the liver. If the poor thyroid has got
to help the liver, then you can help the liver
directly.”

VPN It is this whole College of Healing, really, that has
to do with all these things. He says:

“The reasons why for lots of things are quite

different from what people have thought in the
therapy.”

VPN [I'll ask him a question about ‘B’. He says:

“Somebody else wanted that too. ‘B’ is a man
who is tuned in on some of this and he really
sees these things as if he were inside the body.
He doesn’t admit it, but he has a peculiar type
of clairsentience. Oh, it is very different from
most. He can get inside the body and feel what
is wrong with it. Minute parts—not just a
general feeling that there is a pain somewhere.
He can get inside the liver and look at it; or he
can get inside the kidneys or he can sense what
is going on. He even does it with patients quite
a different way from other clairsentients. He
tunes into this College of Healing. He does it at
night—he goes to night classes and he
remembers things.

“Well, we will go down the hall and see one
of these rooms in these classes.”

VPN Fascinating! Here is one. All students are study-
ing the liver. “B” stays here a lot of the time. This is the
class he goes to often. You can see—you are inside the
liver —it's as if you were inside a great machine. It is more
than a machine —it’s a precision instrument. It is a ter-

rific precision instrument and you see what happens. Oh,
yes, he says:

“When people eat the wrong foods and they
eat too much—it’s not so much the wrong
food—some part of the digestive tract isn’t work-
ing, the food isn’t digested, so then it’s toxic.

122

THROUGH THE CURTAIN

This is the most tremendously vast and com-
plicated system, this digestive system. One little
thing doesn’t work, one kind of food does not
digest, so it makes the rubbish like unburned
things.”

VPN Oh! there is a transformation. He says:

VPN _ This is interesting, I didn’t know this before. He
says:

“Digestion is a process of transmutation. On
spiritual levels, we talk about transmutation. But
the digestive system is a very complicated sys-
tem — fascinating — it is very interesting when you
see it that way. So certain things you don’t di-
gest, because some little part of the apparatus
isn’t functioning. A little faucet doesn’t turn on
somewhere for a certain kind of thing that helps
to transmute the food. The food we eat is not
just a matter of the physical aspect, but the
etheric energy we get from it too.”

“We get etheric energy from it. So certain
foods don't need to be toxic to you, but they are
because some parts of the digestive tract don’t
handle it. And so you get rubbish. It gets picked
up and then the liver has it dumped on it. The
liver is really a sacrificial organ. All this rubbish
comes in and the liver has to find something to
do with it. If too much of it gets dumped in the
blood stream, it is going to poison the heart or
the brain, so the liver gets busy quick and stores
it—in its storerooms— hundreds and hundreds
of storerooms. It says, ‘Well, maybe I can get
rid of it another time, but we had better not let
it out right now.’

HEALING 123

““Dr. B’ is always here studying the liver and
the glandular system. He goes to these classes at
night and then he gets his ideas and works on
them. After awhile, he tunes in on the patient
when he comes in and he knows he is really
working on a system where he is choosing the
fruits and vegetables that give the greatest
etheric energy, because it can be helped from
the etheric, back to the physical. It is both
things. With these people he works with, it takes
a long time to get some of that rubbish out of
the liver. The patient kind of gets tired of it.”

SK Does he suggest anything for the liver of “X”?
VPN He says— “fruit juices.”

SK What kind?

VPN Apple juice is good and, he says, carrot juice and
the zucchini juice. The raw will do it quicker than the
cooked. Yes, things happen to it when it is cooked. It
digests more easily if it is raw—that's curious. The teacher
says:

“It is not curious because nature made it that
way.
VPN He is kind of laughing at me. He is right. He says:

“*X’s liver is looking better. Soon the load will
be off the thyroid a little more. Although ‘X’
doesn’t realize it, it is much better than it was.
She doesn’t have as bad or as many of these and
they are going to ease off in the next few months
and get down to very little. Only once in a
while.”

SK Does he say there is something else she can do that
would be helpful?

124

VPN

THROUGH THE CURTAIN

emotional outlook. He says:

“Fear is one of the things that causes the liver
to have a bad time. She doesn’t have too much
of that anymore. And she has gotten over the
grief or the self-punishment. She is getting over
the ‘hair shirt’.

“She is going through the conflict where the
Soul takes over the personality, and she is han-
dling it pretty well. She doesn’t need to be fear-
ful. She thinks she is afraid of this or that or
something else, but the point of all her fear is
the fear of the Soul taking over the personality
and all the other fears spring from this. It is the
central pivot.

“This is a fear that all disciples have that
students have as they endeavor to come up to
that point. It is a fear of losing one’s identity.
Through many and long incarnations we build
up our identity and this is necessary and essen-
tial. It takes many incarnations to achieve a
focused and well-integrated identity conscious-
ness, In order to be well integrated we have to
have a strong sense of identity. It is really the
fear of death — death of one’s identity — not dy-
ing in the physical body, but the death of one’s
identity. Actually you don’t lose your identity —
you find it, because the Soul is the True Self.
The personality is the Form and you are iden-
tified with the personality and you have a fear
of losing your identity. So, then, you have the
struggle. The Soul seeks to give you Life and an
eternal and glorious identity and you refuse it
and hide in the corner and shiver and shake.
Human beings do. ‘X’ is going through this stage

She has been doing a great deal by changing her

HEALING 125

of her development where she calls it ‘losing con-
trol’. But, this is what she thinks about it on the
personality level. Actually, the Soul takes over
the personality. She gains control, so there need
not be any fear.”

VPN_ Oh, he says to me that this is why I don’t have
fears like that, but I have other problems. When the Soul
takes over there is much more vitality in the etheric
body—the etheric body immediately begins to be vital-
ized and it helps the physical too. He says:

“Right diet, especially using the advantages
of the fruit and vegetable kingdom, is excellent.
It is a discipline that ‘X’ accepts. She is still
working to achieve this union or marriage of
Soul and personality. But she has got her astral
body much more under control and yet she
doesn’t wear the hair shirt and punish herself
with old hurts and aches and pains— emotional
ones.

“The light of love is an illuminating and an
aligning energy on the astral body. If she can
relax a little bit about letting the Soul take over
and get over the fear of losing her identity, it
will help. This is something she is working at
pretty well. She has a lot of work to do in the
field of the etheric body and this is the real field
of healing of the future. Others are doing the
biochemistry work which is on the physical level.

She is doing a very good job about the etheric
body.”

VPN This is sort of a privately conducted tour. He says:

“Let's go down the hall. There is a laboratory.
They are trying to find out how to photograph
the etheric body.

126 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

“There are some things being done in pho-
tography, some kinds of films that are being
brought through. Even with the films we have at
the present time, if we could get the right crys-
tals—very thin layers to photograph through . . .”

SK What sort of crystals?
VPN He says:

“*X’ has worked some with this—and it de-
pends partly upon the axis of the crystals. She
tried some and didn’t get much result because
she couldn’t get the right axis—crystals cut in
the right planes.”

SK What is the axis?
VPN Geometrical planes. I'll ask the question about

that. He says:
“You might try also doing a photograph
through any kind of a cut stone you have —like
an alexandrite.”

VPN_ I want to ask him a question here, A synthetic
stone? He says:

“Try it—even try to photograph through a
synthetic stone. Perhaps you could pick up some
lines of force if you could get the right axis. This
is a precision thing and you would have to get
the people who could cut this and know the axis
of crystals. It will be done eventually through
the crystals.”

VPN _ I will ask him a question. “What about some
natural crystals?” is what I want to know. If I could just
get some natural crystals like quartz. Or something that
is pretty clear. He says:
“Yes, try this, you might get a crude result
that would lead to something. This is mathe-
matical and has to do with some precision work,

HEALING 127

but there is work being done in different places
and something is going to come through on it
that will help you. Help you to see why. Help
us to see how these crystals can be done. The
key tool will be photography through crystal
forms. Don't be impatient about it, but try ex-
periments yourself. You might hit on something
using some of these —if you got some that have
the right mathematical faces.”

SK Can he suggest what faces it should be, so that we
can find someone to cut one for us?

VPN He says that this involves a process of knowledge
of how crystals are cut. If we would wait a little while
there would be some things done that we can use. In the
meantime, we could do experiments. In the next few
months, there will be some things coming out. We should
watch the newspapers and scientific magazines. I'll ask
which ones. There are an awful lot of them. He says:

“Some of the electronic things —like the maga-
zine we bought on the light-beam and New
Scientific American—see it—read it—look it
through each time and find some hints in it and
sooner or later it will be in that, and the news-
papers, where you will see scientific things. If
we have it in our minds we will pick up the
things that have it and not worry about having
to read hundreds of magazines. Look at the elec-
tronic one. That one that had the red light-
beam story in it was a good one. Watch that
one. We will get some information about it from
Scientific American and newspapers we see.

“This is the key to the photography of the
etheric body; and other people who come to
these classes are doing research on crystals. ‘X’
is doing this very well. She is finding out all she

128

THROUGH THE CURTAIN

can about crystals because she has to know a lit-
tle bit. She doesn’t have to go into the field per-
manently, but know enough about them so that
she can appreciate and use what other people
do in their discoveries. Let other people do the
minute and detailed research, but know enough
to take advantage of that research. Disciples
should know enough about a number of subjects
so that they can take advantage of the research
that other students do.”

“In the meantime, she should find out what
she can about the centers of the etheric body
with her assistant—especially the glandular,
thyroid, pituitary.”

VPN _ I must ask him a question. He says:

“People come in with different types of
physical bodies with certain things not quite
right or not quite adjusted because of karmic
conditions. They don't have an absolutely
perfect chemistry laboratory. These things have
to be adjusted through life. This is in the future.
You will study what you might call the
hereditary makeup of the physical and etheric
bodies. But really it is your karma which is writ-
ten in your physical and etheric bodies. It is writ-
ten there just as it is anywhere else. What you
will be doing is finding out the hereditary or kar-
mic condition as one comes into incarnation.
What kind of physical and etheric body does he
karmically or hereditary-wise possess?

“It is just a word —hereditary— because peo-
ple in the past did not know better. You come
into a certain family where you get certain
factors—the lines of force crossing to give you
certain kinds of bodies because karmically that

HEALING

is the kind of body you can have. We will call
it your karmic physical body and etheric body.
So you will know which things need to be cor-
rected, which things you need to be concerned
about and work with. You'll begin to see the
astral pattern that is contributing to this. Work
on it from the level of the astral body—usually
it is an astral problem. This is the whole theory
of healing.

“This is why ‘X’ is so concerned about the
etheric body. She goes to classes. She is a very
eager beaver. She is one of those disciples work-
ing right there in the same college that ‘B’ is in.
He is working on one thing—she is on another.
He is really interested in the liver.

“But the whole approach to healing is the use
of the plant kingdom—the food, fruit and
vegetables to help assist the physical-etheric
body. You refrain from putting into the body
the things you can’t handle, so that you don’t
poison the liver, while you are giving it a chance
to adjust itself karmically from the astral level.
Also, you work from the physical level with the
right foods, the right herbal remedies and
plants.

“All this artificial stuff isn’t so good, but some
of it helps. All the artificial stuff they give
you — shoot into you —is Just a stop-gap because
they don’t know any better. They don’t know
what else to do so they try. It is not too good.

“You work from the level of the astral body
to adjust those astral conditions that cause
trouble, and you work the physical-etheric level
with the right fruits and vegetables, herbal
remedies and things to relieve the strains and
pressures on the karmic body that you brought

129

130 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

in. So you work to relieve undue strain and pres-
sure. This requires some discipline. You work
from the astral level to straighten out the con-
ditions that are putting pressure on the etheric
and physical body and disturbing its frequen-
cies, causing dis-harmony and dis-ease.

“Tal-Mar goes to some of these classes in heal-
ing. But he also has to go to the classes on some
of the geometry. It is going to be so slow with
him because his mental body is kind of poorly
furnished. Space Intelligences (people of a
higher frequency or stage of development) take
over. They have to talk to him and tell him how
to do some of the mechanical things. But the
thing he is doing is to affect the substance of the
etheric body. The basic substance of the etheric
body brings in a higher frequency. It will have
a rejuvenating effect. But people will have to
straighten out their astral bodies some time
before they can react to this rejuvenating effect.
The materialistic ones wouldn't get anything out
of it.”

VPN This is all the most beautiful pattern. It all works
together like the pieces of a lovely design—like a wheel—a
mandala. Each student in different parts of the world is
working with different interests. He says:

*“*X’ is the only one doing any really good
work on the etheric body.”

SK Does he suggest any improvement in the method of
approach?
VPN He says:
“Tt is all right. Do what you can do now. Go
ahead with the devic clairvoyant. Find out what
happens to the thyroid and pituitary when they

HEALING 13]

are not in good function, so that when you can
photograph you will know what you are seeing.
This is very important —it can be done now; the
other—even if you could do it—you wouldn't
know what you were getting, finding out what
the centers look like, occasionally referring back
to the astral body condition, Focus on the gen-
eral etheric body— whether there are patholog-
ical conditions in it. What the throat center and
brow center look like. These will serve to give
a clue for anything else. When you have this in-
formation, then when you can photograph
something, you will know what you see more
quickly. So go ahead.”

VPN _ This is the most fascinating college. It seems to be
built like a mandala too. But all the colleges here are in
that form.

SK On what plane is this? Lower mental?

VPN No. It’s the higher mental plane, because you have
to have a good alignment with the causal body to get the
information and be able to remember it.

SK But “X” doesn’t remember going to class.
VPN I guess it is because “X” doesn’t have a good union
between Soul and personality yet. He says:

““X’ has a fear of losing her identity. The Soul
needs to get more control of the personality and
then she could remember. She gets impressions
anyway, lots of them. She gets it here, and then
you have to put a book under her nose with the
information in it to make her remember what
she got here.”

SK Who puts the book under her nose?
VPN He says:

132 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

“Oh, her friends— different people. She gets
interested in some book, goes hunting it. The
Ashrams work through people. Through her
own interests.”

VPN All these colleges are built as a mandala. All
knowledge is organized like a mandala. Different disciples
are working out on the periphery of the wheel. But even-
tually all their knowledge fits like sections of the
mandala — all together in one central focus. Then you see
a whole pattern. This is true with these other classes I go

to. Even the colleges on the mental plane are in this form, .

the form of a mandala. Oh, of course, the mental plane
is all mathematical really. It is geometrical. The astral
plane has wild, turbulent storms of energy. But the mental
plane, especially the higher mental plane, has beautiful
precision. These thoughtforms—no, archetypal forms—
are often in the mandala patterns. It is very interesting.

Angelic Forces, the Third Aspect of Healing

I was a little tired when we started, but it is fascinating.
I feel much better, you know. He says:

“The angelic forces try to work with us very
often. This is another source of help in healing
too. It is a third aspect of help. The angelic
forces are the life aspect and they would help
us much more if we would be aware of them and
ask for their help. Ask for help from the angelic
forces, whose office and joy it is to be of assis-
tance. This is their work and their purpose.
Mankind seems to totally ignore the angelic
forces, although all his Holy Books talk about
them. People act as if they think it is a fairy story
or something.”

|

HEALING 133

VPN Then he laughed, and said:
“Of course, fairies are real too.”
VPN He is a very nice person. He said:

“Let us go to the chapel before you are fin-
ished for tonight.”

Chapel of the Union of Life and Form

VPN It is a very lovely place. It is called the Chapel of
the Union of Life and Form.

SK What do you see there?

VPN I have to see. . . It is very beautiful. It is made
of semi-transparent columns and walls of sort of a milky
crystalline form. Crystalline substance — and through all
this is circulating a very soft, pure, white light. But it is
pleasant. It is not disturbing. You don’t feel a busyness.
The total effect is scintillating clear crystal—and that is
the focal point of the chapel. He says:

“This is why all churches have altars. They
must have a focal point for energy. The focal
point of the chapel is like the altar. It has a sun-
burst, but it has all the colors—and many other
colors besides—well, more fragile colors, higher
octaves than our colors.”

VPN There is a sunburst that goes out from a central
core of white light. It is the symbol of the manifested uni-
verse. There is some kind of ceremony about to begin.
There are disciples and students and others here. It is very
beautiful. The One who is officiating is like a priest —
like the office of a priest from the Nirmanakaya group
line of service. The teacher says:

“He is a very splendid person.”

134 THROUGH THE CURTAIN | HEALING 135

VPN There is a great aura of light around him. He is “Let your desire be for life. As you aspire to
beginning to speak. He says: life, life will aspire to you. And you will know
“Spirit and Matter meet in the cosmic union the joyous meeting of life and form and you will
of eternal ecstasy. There is forever joy in the grow in consciousness.”
meeting of the separated selves. This is why it VPN _ This is very interesting—there is a great play of
is said that the morning stars sing together. color. This is the end —it is not a service, but a ritual for
“There is a divine ecstasy and joy throughout mankind. It is a center for sending out life and under-
the universe —in the cosmic meeting of Life and standing to mankind. It is one of the Chapels of the Nir-
Form — Spirit and Matter. And the flame of con- manakaya activity. One of the centers of it. The teacher
sciousness is the crowning glory of this meeting. says:

Consciousness on many levels. Cosmic conscious-
ness of the cosmic universe. The flower of con-
sciousness is of the human kingdom, on all
planets, in all solar systems.

“If man could only know his destiny as a
Divine Son of God—a son of joy—a son of light.
If he could only realize his divine destiny to join
the suns of the morning, in all the work of
manifestation in creation—then he wouldn’t be
so confined within the prison house of his five
senses.

“Be aware of the joy of Life meeting Form.
Basically, desire is Matter reaching for Spirit.
Will is Spirit reaching for Matter. The sorrow
and pain of man is when matter desires matter
instead of desiring spirit. Matter turns its desire
in upon itself and we have man desiring material
things and sensation.

“If desire is turned to spirit, so that substance
desires life as the greatest good, then we have
a right relationship established — harmonious.
But when substance desires substance and it is
turned in upon itself, then disharmony results
in the universe or in the life of man.

“This is all for tonight. Better go back
through the curtain.”

VPN And he will walk with me.

Halls of the Sun

I walked in a body of light

Through the halls of the sun

And stood on its parapets

Facing the blue night of space.

The planets that wheel in obedience
Sang as they moved.

And the songs of the planets were music
That molded the forms

Of all things that have been,

That are and shall be,

In the realm of the sun.

Creation was music and song

And the splendor of light

As we moved on a star-spangled path

At the galaxy’s rim.

Healing By Sound, Form and Color

February 17, 1962
Night Class
Recalled by Viola Petitt Neal

Sound may be considered as having a positive charge,
geometrical forms as having a negative charge. These two
have a polarity aspect together which gives rise to color.
In this particular trinity the seven colors correspond to
the seven planes of manifestation. It is the triune form
that breaks light into seven colors, which we can observe.

Crystals are the key to this polarity relationship because
they are exact geometrical forms. Greater knowledge of
relationship between crystal forms and sound will be found
in the future than we have yet discovered. At present we
use, to a lesser degree, crystal sets such as radios. We will
have musical instruments made of crystal forms which will
bring in “the music of the spheres.” This kind of music
could be used for therapy, Platonic solids are the basic
forms for studying relationships to sound.

The cone of ninety degrees on four sides is the key pat-
tern—a bridging form. There are two more forms in ad-
dition to the platonic solids, making in all seven forms.
The sphere is one of these seven forms and represents the
top head center. The world of form in its essence means
geometrical forms. Dense physical forms are the final
manifestation of these geometrical forms. Crystalline forms

137

138 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

are the best condensation of this abstract world of form
and give us an understanding so that we can picture it.
Algebra and arithmetic are derived from geometry.

Audible sound is a very small section of the sound spec-
trum. Light on our planet or any planet is the result of
sound frequencies from the sun, intersecting with form
frequencies from the earth, producing light and in the
lower octave, heat. The angle of intersection determines
the degree of light and heat. This is sound in marriage
to form —and from this, light is born. This concept of the
origin of light is contrary to views held by science on our
planet. However, there are a number of scientists mov-
ing to this concept.

The reason that a five by seven rectangle is pleasing
is because it is a basic form in manifestation and also it
is related to the five centers in the trunk, to the seven
centers in the whole body.

When mankind learns the correct use of sound com-
bined with geometrical form (seventh ray) activity, he will
create an orderly society and a beautiful one on the
planet. This is an activity of the sons of mankind in
microcosm performing the same rituals that in macrocosm
are performed in the Temples of the Sun. These rituals
will be centers of frequencies moving out over the planet
and bringing the consciousness of man into resonance.
They will create harmony where now disharmony exists.

The conquest of the forces of evil will ultimately be
accomplished by use of rituals of sound and form. For
evil is that which is disharmonious and cannot exist in a
harmonious pattern of sound and form. The word “ritual”
in its true defining is an orderly movement of sound and
geometrical form in sequential patterns.

To digress, even the magicians of the Middle Ages knew
this and performed their magical ceremonies using geo-
metrical forms and their so-called ‘sacred names” which
were actually sound. They sometimes achieved actual ef-

HEALING 139

fect in the material world, as well as the astral world.
These attempts were amateurish and for selfish purposes.

The Masonic rituals, builders of the universe, belonged
in this same tradition where some knowledge of ritual
combining geometrical forms and sound was their great
secret, The Masonic order has more of this concept than
any group on the planet. They do not know what it
means. Some of their more advanced members have spent
a lifetime on the lost word. Actually if they only knew it,
they are seeking to comprehend the correct mantrams and
their relationship to correct geometrical forms. Their sym-
bols of the compass and the square are more correct than
the religious symbols in religious rituals. This is one reason
for the conflict and human jealousy between them and
the Catholic Church, because both of them are close to
discovering a great truth, a great secret.

Three students were spoken to individually. The stu-
dent interested in physics was told to apply this knowledge
in the field of physics, but that the knowledge should not
be given out as yet.

Remember the basic concept given in the lecture that
when life or spirit moves outward from a center, it is
energy and when energy moves inward to a center or
vortex it becomes matter. Matter is a pattern rather than
a solid, a pattern of energy moving into a center. As long

as the pattern is manifested, we have the so-called solid
matter.

February 28, 1962
Night Class
Recalled by Viola Petitt Neal

Healing can take place on the dense physical, etheric,
and astral levels. Sound affects the actual physical sub-
stance itself. Form affects the etheric body. Color affects

140 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

the astral body. This is an overall principle, although the
three types, that is, sound, form and color, affect all three
bodies. The right combination of sound, form and color
will bring about speedy healing although any one method
shows beneficial effects.

Herbal and Natural Remedies
Compared to Synthetic Drugs

The effect of drugs is a physical effect due to. the fre-
quency of the drugs affecting the dense physical frequency
of substance. Herbal and natural remedies produce their
effect by not disturbing other frequencies of the body.
Synthetic drugs may have a spectacular effect in one par-
ticular area or disease, but almost without exception these
have a destructive effect on some other organ or tissue
or cell structure. Various herbal and natural remedies —
natural calcium in egg shell—could be used instead of
sound in combination with color and form.

The mechanism of using sound has to be set up so that
the person administering it is not disturbed by the sound
frequency which is not good for him or compatible with
his frequencies.

A colored lamp could be set up which has colored plates
of certain geometrical forms to be used.

The violet circle affects the astral body if placed at the
solar plexus center and in turn affects the physical and
etheric bodies.

March 1, 1962
Night Class
Recalled by Viola Petitt Neal

The key to the different bodies is the form. Sometimes
one has to begin with the mental body, but more often

HEALING 141

one begins with the astral body to get at the originating
cause.

The circle is the key to the astral body when used with
color. The diamond is the key to the etheric body when
used with color. The triangle (equilateral) is the key to
the mental body when used with color. The mental body
completes the trinity of the personality, and basically it
is the manifestation for humanity generally. Should the
cause of disease originate at the mental body level, then
it affects the astral and physical. With most people the
cause of disease originates at the astral body.

For a long-range program for establishing a better con-
dition in the physical-etheric with mentally polarized peo-
ple, one works from the mental body down to the astral

and etheric— and the colors most useful now on all three
levels are:

yellow used in case of low energy, vitality and poor
function;

green for harmonizing, equalizing energies, normalcy:

blue to be used in case of congestion, fevers and tension.

One should begin by using either blue or yellow,
whichever is indicated, and then end up with using the
color green. The treatment could be given on the same
day; that is, the use of blue, yellow and green, or an in-
terval of a few days could be allowed between the use of
the different colors.

The individual who is being treated has to be favorable
to being helped. It is not possible to treat a totally negative
and destructive person who does not cooperate with the
forces of good. Most people who are sick are receptive to
any help and are favorable to receiving it. People who
are more disciplined could use these methods on them-
selves, but it could also be done for them.

The great treatment that humanity on this planet needs

: is more of the Soul grip on the personality vehicle and

Satan! any

142 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

where there is enough development there is one fun-
damental type of treatment that establishes a state of
health in the personality unit. Many more people could
be responsive to this at this stage of evolution. It is a long-
range program that could be used parallel to any other
immediate treatment of the physical-etheric, astral and
mental bodies.

If the Soul had the control of the personality vehicle
which is indicated for any particular stage of evolution
(that is, the degree of control possible at the stage of evolu-
tion of the individual) it would be possible to establish
a maximum state of health very quickly in all three bodies
with, of course, karmic limitations.

The colored diamond form affects the physical-etheric
body. Visualize it over an organ and/or over the center
which controls that organ. For example, a person with
a disturbance in the digestive tract and liver could use
the diamond form over the liver area or gall bladder as
well as over the solar plexus center. In the first case, you
are treating the dense physical etheric organ and in the
second, the etheric center itself.

The circle form affects the astral body when used with
color. The form automatically directs the treatment to the
astral body and you treat the center in the area involved.

In using the colored triangle, it should be placed first
on the ajna or brow center, then whichever center is the
area involved. The flow of mental energy via the ajna or
brow center is to the total personality from the mental
plane. Mental energy is the cohesive force which holds a
personality vehicle in manifestation. The mind is the dis-
tinguishing mark of human man.

Love is the cohesive force that holds Divine man in
manifestation. He is distinguished by being “I” conscious,
the Soul. The personality has been unified with the Soul.

Etheric energy is the cohesive force for animal man. He
is distinguished as “I” the physical being, belonging to a

ee + A

HEALING 145

group soul on the astral plane. The cohesive force is
etheric energy which comes through the spleen.

The cross is the symbol on the Soul level. There are
three colors that could be used. The ethereal scarlet cross,
which comes close to rose color is used to energize the
personality. It should be visualized on the top of the head
or in front of the person. This is helpful if the individual
has a state of weariness in the struggle of life.

The gold cross (like the metal gold) could be used for
protection at all levels. It could be used for spiritual il-
lumination for establishing better contact of the Soul with
the personality—to better use the personality vehicles to
carry out the Soul’s intention.

The violet cross—(ethereal type of violet) could be used
to bring Monadic energy into the Soul-personality unit.
It brings in life force directly, without having to bring it
by indirect methods, This Monadic energy helps in-
dividuals more quickly and clearly to see and to know
divine purpose in their own life and for humanity. This
is helpful to use when one is way down by seeing negative
forces in the outside world and blocks to constructive work
and action. It can bring the kind of illumination that
shows a student how to override these blocks. It can bring
the clear-seeing that gives reassurance that God’s Plan will
triumph.

Each of these three colored crosses can be used in order:
the rose colored cross, the gold colored cross, and the
violet colored cross. They can be meditated upon by the
student without harm and it is beneficial at this time.
Anyone who is too negative will probably block any bene-
fit, but will not be harmed.

The cross should be visualized in color and placed on
the top of the head or in front of you. Different people
would use different methods according to ray types. The
first ray type finds it easier to visualize the cross on top
of the head; the second ray finds it easier to visualize the

144 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

cross through the whole body with the arms being the
arms of the cross; and the third ray type would visualize
it outside themselves,

The black cross is a symbol of the Eighth Sphere, and
should never be used. It is used to invoke the power of
substance and temporary guards of substance.

Twenty students were present.

April 27, 1962
Night Class
Recalled by Viola Petitt Neal

Sound affects basically the etheric body and in turn
the other bodies.

Color affects basically the astral body.
Form affects the mental body.

At this stage of human evolution, it is possible to set
up a system for the development of culture and refine-
ment of the personality vehicles. The people would have
free choice to avail themselves of this development. It
could not be forced upon them. At the present time, they
are having negative things thrown at them, such as por-
nography and brutality, without any alternative choice for
a tangible method that would give them more spiritual
development. As soon as possible, it is desirable to start
with these methods.

The Catholic Church is the only ritual procedure avail-
able to the public that has any merit at all. It is not
really available to the general public because of centuries
of rigid demands on its adherents, and it is really hap-
hazard in its effects on the vehicles.

ee ee

HEALING 145

There are musical compositions already in use in cer-
tain keys that could be used to begin with. In specific
chapels, with certain form and color, music in special keys
will be used. The sound should be soft, as a general rule.
Violin and piano will be for general use. Organ music
helps to establish Soul-personality contact. It breaks up
negative astral patterns in the vicinity, and is very helpful
specifically in detaching elementals from the solar plexus
or other places in a human being. There are occasional
people from the time of Atlantis, because of magic prac-
tices, who have elementals attached to them which disrupt
their whole etheric and astral bodies. Organ music could
have helped Mrs. “R” and probably detached the elemen-
tal that was present, but a mending process would have
been required also.

In the past the church has given mostly inspirational
worship services. In the future the church must give
ordered procedure for development of the personality
vehicles for growth in awareness, healing and adjustment
of the vehicles, and their integration in preparation of the
house of the personality for the occupancy of its Self or
Soul. The church or temple must become the focal center
for establishing a new civilization and culture, the culture
of the Soul, which the Christ called the Kingdom of God
on Earth.

There will be new music specifically designed to get
specific effects. The Theremin was a type of musical in-
strument that had possibilities for producing some of this
type of music. Other instruments like the Theremin will
be produced where the individual is part of the instrument.
Such music produced by highly evolved individuals could
be very useful in ritual procedure. The music could be
piped into the chapels and synchronized with the form and
the color being used. Yellow and blue and clear scarlet
could be used for average humanity. Violet, golden yellow

146 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

and ethereal rose could be used for serious students. Green
could be used as a harmonizing color with all groups. It
would be used at the end of what is called color treatment
to harmonize and equalize the different bodies. Indigo will
have a special use. It is not blue; it is a different color.
It has to do with Soul/ personality contact. It will be used
in special ceremonies, using the OM for disciples prepar-
ing for initiation.

With pigments you have substances which absorb
some light frequencies and reflect others. For example,
when they reflect both red and yellow you get or see
orange; but this is not necessarily orange light.

eer emt en

=: a

Adjustment of the Different Bodies
in Disciples

September 12, 1962
Night Class
Recalled by Viola Petitt Neal

Seven students were present at this class. The discus-
sion was on the adjustment of the different bodies as we
expand in consciousness.

There are three main impacts which bring about these
changes in consciousness.

Our experience in the outer world which includes the
pressures of events in a strenuous period of history as well
as the personal and individual life experiences. In every
life there is change and always this change is toward growth
in consciousness. Whether this is accomplished depends
upon the person himself. He may resist growth and achieve
only the minimum of growth. But with the disciple on the
Path, there is a great deal of cooperation in the process
of growth where the changes and experiences of the outer
environment are concerned.

Personal efforts bring about growth and develop-
ment —such as meditation, study and a steady effort to
grow.

When the student becomes a disciple and seeks aid from
his own higher Self and the Ashram, there is assistance

147

148 ‘THROUGH THE CURTAIN

from those in the Ashram which brings to bear energy im-
pacts upon the centers of the different bodies to systema-
tically aid in the adjustment of the vehicles—etheric, astral
and mental. With each forward step in consciousness, the
vehicle must be adjusted and this must not be done too
suddenly or too drastically.

When the centers in the astral body are stepped up in
frequency there has to be an adjustment to the whole per-
sonality vehicle to the frequencies of the etheric and mental
bodies. These adjustments must take place in such a way
as not to disrupt the personality vehicles so that the in-
dividual can still function adequately in the outer world.
Sometimes there is a period of being jittery for a day or
so, or a feeling of being in no man’s land; or simply a feel-
ing of having no reaction to life either of enthusiasm or
depression. The adjustment in the astral body is probably
most noticeable to the disciple, for it affects his feeling
tone.

When it is the mental body that is being adjusted it is
not usually so noticeable. He finds that he isn’t as creative
or as alert on the mental level for a few days. This passes
almost unnoticed.

On the etheric physical level, there may be tension or
a low energy level for a few hours or a few days.

In the case of a disciple under training with the Ashram
and working with the Ashram consciously, these changes
may be more defined and the discomfort more marked
because he is a soldier in the army, so to speak, and has
to take it. However, it is always a matter of careful super-
vision by the Ashram so that no harm comes to him.

Re OAT ate a

ee ee ae

HEALING 149

May 22, 1965
Night Class
Recalled by Viola Petitt Neal

An algebraic formula was presented to the student: the
physical is to the astral as the etheric is to the mental.

Mental healers direct their minds to visualizing the
physical body in a state of perfect health. This is not the
correct way to do it. The mind should be directed toward
visualizing the etheric body instead of the physical and see-
ing it as a web of light with no shadow and no congestion,
but as a scintillating field of force. It is via the mind that
it is possible to direct etheric energy to the etheric body,
thus vitalizing it, and as a natural result the physical body
begins to improve, depending upon the karmic possibility.

A thoughtform of the etheric body was then presented
showing within it brighter, denser channels which looked
like the nervous system in the physical body. Then the
splenic center was superimposed where earth and solar
prana entered. The seven centers up the spine were super-
imposed and were finally followed by the alta major center.

The lecturer explained that it should be in the caudate
nucleus area that pranic energy should be changed into
electrical energy to flow along the nervous system. In
average man, at present, it is the carotid bodies that are
associated with the alta major center and this change takes
place largely in the carotid body rather than in the caudate
nucleus. In more evolved man this changeover takes place
almost entirely in the caudate nucleus. Eventually, the alta
major center will entirely express outwardly through the
caudate nucleus instead of the carotid bodies.

In Atlantis, the alta major center was used for purposes
of magic and there was great misuse of pranic energy
and disturbance of the physical body.

150 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

The caudate nucleus is really the organ of a higher type
of clairvoyance and perception. It contains millions of
antennae to sense higher worlds of frequencies. It is the
outpicturing of the alta major center in more evolved man.

After the end of the class, one student (SK) asked the
lecturer why the physical body puts on excess weight in
the case of many people as they grow older. Was it due
to the function of the glandular system, ovaries, pituitary
or thyroid?

The lecturer replied that there were different types of
cases and some were more complicated than others, but
that generally speaking the kind of thing referred to was
due to sluggish liver. He suggested:

“Visualize the liver as a pattern of clear and
scintillating white light with no shadow and this
will help to establish a better condition in the
etheric liver and then in the physical.”

Know the etheric body is like scintillating light and try
to treat the etheric body with the mind. You don’t treat
the physical body with the mind.

March 9, 1961
Night Class
Recalled by Viola Petitt Neal

The creative use of the throat center includes three
aspects: The dynamic voice, using the Will Ray or First
Ray energy, shatters old thought patterns and builds new
ones, as new ideas penetrate the mental bodies of the
hearers. The hearers are receptive in this case.

The magnetic voice has the Love-Wisdom quality or Sec-
ond Ray. It heals, enlightens, lights up consciousness,
speaks to the Soul, draws forth the hearer’s own Soul qual-
ity and Soul participation.

a gr REE

HEALING 151

The creative voice uses the Active Intelligence energy
or Third Ray. It invites the hearers to participate in con-
sciousness, with creative thinking on their own. They are
stimulated to explore the world of ideas on their own.

Remember humanity is the throat center of the Plane-
tary Logos.

The Effect of Man’s Emotions on
Nature’s Upheavals

October 15, 1961
Night Class
Recalled by Viola Petitt Neal

The teacher was discussing the fact that often in a
great crisis in the human kingdom there are also great
upheavals in nature —extremes of heat and cold, cyclones
and winds, earthquakes and volcanic eruptions— and ex-
plaining in terms of what we know is true. He said:

“You are all familiar with psychosomatic
medicine and its theories that the emotional and
mental, but mostly the emotional states of the
patient, bring on the physical conditions. This
has been a recent development in modern
medical thinking. However, the esoteric teaching
has always taught this is true. According to
knowledge we have, more than ninety-five per-
cent of the physical ailments of human beings
are due to the emotional states. They affect the
etheric body and then the physical body. An in-
dividual who is given to explosions of anger and
resentment and other negative emotions will
eventually have a bad liver, or he may have a

152

HEALING

stroke. The individual who is constantly dis-
turbed by fear and insecurity and worry, which
is a type of fear (you might say that worry is a
mild degree of fear) may find himself disurbed
with heart conditions or circulatory diseases.
“If you indulged in violent emotions you
might eventually have a liver disease and you
might call that an earthquake of the liver, or
it might affect the stomach and the digestion —
stomach ulcers and hemorrhage or vomiting
attacks—which is very much like a volcanic
upheaval in the physical body of the planet.
“Our planet also has its physical, etheric,
astral and mental bodies. Mankind on our
planet is very especially associated with all of the
emotional aspects of the planet. The condition
of all kingdoms on the planet —the mineral, the
plant, the animal, the human and the Fifth
Kingdom — has an effect on what happens to the
planet. The human kingdom on a planet, if con-
stantly indulging in negative and destructive
emotions, eventually affects the astral, the
etheric and the physical bodies of the planet.
“In synchronization with the emotional states
of humanity and the crises that may come
because of this, there are also upheavals in
nature in the physical body of the planet —
earthquakes, volcanic eruptions, cyclones, winds,
violent heat and cold. We might say when an
individual indulges in too long a time of anger,
he has an earthquake in his liver, or he may
have an asthmatic condition, and we might say
there is a cyclone in his breathing apparatus. Or
he may succumb to some disease where there is

153

154 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

high fever and violences and extremes of heat,
or correspondingly extremes of cold, in the
physical body of the individual, so by cor-
respondence to the physical body of the planet.

“These things take place because humanity as
a kingdom is an organic entity, just as the in-
dividual human being is an organic entity. As an
organic whole, the human kingdom very in-
tensely affects the astral body.”

VPN He said that our period in history on the planet was
at a great point of crisis where, after centuries and
thousands of years of certain behavior patterns of the
human kingdom, we have come to a point of crisis. A
point where the energy impacts become so great that some-
thing has to give. If energy is poured into certain patterns
for a long period of time, in a human life or on the planet
in a planetary pattern, there comes a point where those
energies are going to produce some kind of a change,
which we call crisis. In our modern American slang we
say that “something has to give.”

Today we have reached such a point of crisis on our
planet. There will be a tremendous physical upheaval on
the planet as time goes on. Even our exploding atomic
bombs have hastened this because they have affected the
etheric and physical bodies of the planet tremendously.
There will be problems and difficulties in the human
kingdom, such as war. This will be destructive to many
people in the sense of their going out of incarnation, but
to go out of incarnation is not a tragedy. It would be a
disaster if there were not a better civilization to come
into in our next incarnation.

If one indulged in violent emotions he might eventu-
ally have ‘‘an earthquake of the liver.” Similarly, by corre-
spondence, precisely the same thing takes place on a higher
level on the planet. As above, so below, the lesser is made

HEALING 155

in the image of the greater and the greater in the image
of the lesser. He referred also to the fact that we had many
circulatory diseases today. The fluids of the body are very
definitely affected by every emotional change in the human
being. Individuals who indulge in fear and worry and
resentment also show problems in the circulatory system.

Summary of Correspondences

Planet Human Kingdom
1. Cyclones, winds 1. Diseases of respiration,
asthma
2. Temperature changes 2. Fevers, subnormal
heat, cold temperature
3. Earthquakes 3. Liver upsets, violent
emotions
4. Volcanic eruption 4, Vomiting
5. Tides 5, Circulatory diseases

Crystals

Illumination

Perhaps once in a lifetime
Do we know

That we are Spirit;

For in our house of earth
We cannot bear
Knowledge so glorious.

Naked we stand before the light of lights.

We seize our covering of clay and flee
Into the darkness,

Lest the light destroy,

All that we know

Of that which we call life.

Crystals— A Source of Energy

September 4, 1960
Night Class of Viola Petitt Neal
Taped by SK

SK What about crystals?
VPN _ All kinds of crystals kept in geometrical form.

SK In which Ashram is this class being held?
VPN I think Third Ray Ashram.

SK What are they saying about crystals?

VPN Because crystals are the highest development of
the mineral kingdom they are the key to the fourth ether
and also key to “F” energy.

SK What crystals should be studied in relationship to
the fourth ether?

VPN The five Platonic solids in crystal form are the
keys to the energy which is equal and opposite to electri-
city. They are arranged in an ascending spiral. Let me see
what connects them. Because they are parts of a spiral,
they seem to be connected with a di-electric substance.

SK What are the di-electric substances connected with
it?

VPN Now the spiral is like a wire only it is di-electric
substance. Crystals are placed in ascending order of a
geometrical pattern. Well, when you see the form, the

159
160 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

first one and the second turn of the spiral is right in front
of me. The spiral makes two more turns. One and a half,
I guess, then the crystal is directly on the other side. Next
one, here on the side facing me. The next one on the op-
posite side. This is the arrangement—a crystal, a little
larger than the size of the end of my thumb. Oh, they use
sound on this crystal.

SK How do they use sound on crystals?

VPN _ Certain sound —it has an effect on the arrangement
of the crystals and the “F” energy. But it is energy from
cutting the lines of force of the earth.

SK How does the use of sound on crystal cut the lines
of force?

VPN _ The spiral movement is the same movement as the
earth—if you make a spiral in order to cut these lines of
force.

SK How does one make the spiral?

VPN Just like you make it with a coil of wire. Oh, it is
like an etheric spine. You make spirals like the Rod of
Mercury.

SK Do you make the spiral out of the crystal substance?
VPN_ No, you place the crystals at different points of the
spiral. It is made of di-electric substance.

SK What is the di-electric substance being used?
VPN Silk or glass—something more practical. You take
a metal that does not conduct electricity and you make
a spiral of it. Actually, the spirals are like the Rod of Mer-
cury, the caduceus with a glass rod down the middle. The
crystals —the five crystals—are placed like the five centers
on the spiral.

SK What kind of crystals would you use?
VPN Quartz.

CRYSTALS 161

SK Small quartz or special quartz?
VPN _ As it comes— natural.

SK Do you place it in different positions on the spiral?
VPN _ Simple form in ascending order —the five Platonic

solids represent the five centers in man, in the trunk of
the body.

SK Which center does the tetrahedron represent?

VPN _ The lowest one. Then in the order of complexity
to the top.

SK What are the five centers? The base of the spine, the
solar plexus, the heart, the throat, the head center?
VPN _ No, the root center, sex center, solar plexus, heart,
throat center—in the trunk of the body.

SK What about the head center?

VPN The centers are repeated in the head, but the body
is an energy system and is based on the centers. It takes
the pranic energy. The centers are like the crystals — it is
an energy system.

SK How does one apply the sound to the spiral with the
crystals?

VPN _ Certain sounds will affect the crystals and produce
energy.

SK What kind of sounds—sonic, ultrasonic or infrasonic?
VPN There are several levels: a) below the threshold of
hearing—these are dangerous; b) audible sounds —these
are useful in mechanical energy, heat, and light as we use
energy; c) another octave above the audible —that one has
many possibilities in healing; d) the second octave deals
with higher forms of energy, especially teleportation. I
think it is the fourth octave above the audible, which has
to do with teleportation.

162 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

SK Which one deals with healing?
VPN The first and second octaves above the audible

sound.

SK What about ultra-sound?

VPN There is a lot of exploration to be done on it. It
is dangerous to use. Some of it could be destructive, but
it could be harnessed and handled.

SK Does one produce healing in these centers by sound?
VPN You will find that certain sounds acting through
this crystal arrangement will affect the energy rhythm in
the centers and establish a harmonious frequency. The
health of the physical body is a state of harmony —a har-
monious frequency of the pattern. The physical body is
a pattern of energies, although it appears solid. When the
pattern is disturbed there is dissonance (a thoughtform
of the energies is shown). When you have disease, you have
the harmonious pattern disturbed and broken up and it
can be restored by sound.

SK How?

VPN Sound directed through these different crystals
when they are all together or one at a time —even audi-
ble sound is the first beginning in establishing the rhythm.
The Ego or Soul on its own level directs the orchestra
which is the human physical body. But at the personal-
ity level there are interferences—the mind and the emo-
tions impose other rhythms. At the physical level you
could do a great deal to establish a state of harmony.
There must also be change in the mental and emotional
self.

In the future, people will be told about the art of heal-
ing. The patient will be fully instructed in how he can
cooperate with the healing process so that there will be
the will to adjust with mental and emotional states which

CRYSTALS 163

produce interference in the rhythm and the harmony of
that orchestra which is the human body.

SK How are we able to tell the state of any center in
disease and then restore it to its normal rhythm?

VPN_ Each person has a keynote and a triad based on
the keynote. To begin with, it is not perfect. Begin by
finding the person’s keynote. It is done by finding out
what musical note he likes best. It is a kind of crude begin-
ning by which the first 258 in the sonic treatment, I mean
in the audible, could be tried. In the next level above the
audible, try the same keynote in the octave.

SK Do you mean, if a person likes “G” in an octave, then
you try “G” above the audible?

VPN. Try “G” and the triad of “G” in the audible first.
You could see how he reacts and what the effect is. Then
you could try it in the octave above the audible. This must
be done cautiously. Too much amplitude is loudness and
would not be good. It should be done softly.

There seems to be a class on basic energy —the energy
animating the form —all forms, atoms and its equal and
opposite polarity, electricity. Electricity is in a sense the
physical polarity. So we use the word, di-electricity to con-
vey the idea of opposite to electricity.

SK If someone has a leak in one of the centers how could
we help the person to close that leak?

VPN You might try his keynote very softly and the triad
of that keynote for about sixty seconds.

SK Do you repeat it?
VPN _ Yes, or you could have a sustained sound elec-
tronically.

SK Do you apply it over the center? Or does it matter
where applied?

164 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

VPN _ It does not matter. Use it just in the room where
the person is. Only here is the problem. You know the triad
for that person— but it might be disturbing to others pres-
ent. He could have it with earphones by himself and not
for more than sixty seconds to begin with. So he hears it.
It is not necessary to place it over that center. If he hears
it, it goes through the body—the whole body.

SK Can we go back to the question in which you were
describing how to get “F” energy with that spiral? You sug-
gested the spiral be made of di-electric substance and that
crystals are placed on different points of that spiral. The
lowest one on the turn of the spiral and the next one bet-
ween the points where you put the first and the second, etc.
VPN It looks like a one-and-a-half turn—they are put
on the positive spiral. There are two, like the caduceus.
The one that passes from right to left as you stand in front
of it is positive. This is how it is shown in the thoughtform.

SK How does it cross the earth’s field?
VPN It is like the spiral. The person directs sound
lengthwise of the spiral.

SK What kind of sound? A note or one frequency or
what?

VPN _ In the beginning if you make one, just work with
the octave 256 beginning with middle “C” on the piano
to 512.

SK You mean the vibration 256?
VPN Yes, the musical sound. You could work with the
piano using the notes on the piano.

SK But how do you get energy out of this?

VPN I want to find out if I can. This is what happens
in the human body—the spleen is not in the circuit of the
spine. That is something else on the side. I am trying to

CRYSTALS 165

understand this. It is curious. It is just the sounds coming
in through the spleen. It is almost like a membrane or
something, I don't quite see—sound comes in through the
spleen. That is why it is not a center like the others. It af-
fects the centers of the spine. Sound comes in through the
spleen. It is like fine wires around each center, but not ex-
actly. I guess the frequencies travel in the ether.

SK But how do you get “F” energy?

VPN The spiral is connected in the system. It is like a
machine. It is interesting —the second coil or wire is like
the caduceus—a secondary coil. The primary coil cor-
responds to the one that has the crystals on it and the
secondary coil is like the secondary coil in an electrical
system. The coils are worn like the caduceus. The primary
coil is connected with the center of sound, Now I can hear
wonderful sound. The secondary coil is connected to the
machine or mechanical device.

SK What kind of sound do you put through the primary
coil?

VPN You can begin experimenting with audible keynote
256 to 512.

SK Do you pass that through the primary coil?
VPN Yes.

SK What kind of machine could we use on the second
spiral to show there is energy flowing through it? How is
the energy set up there?

VPN Iam trying to see it. It seems kind of simple. You
have to put something in the circuit which will give you
either light or heat. Something like a copper plate. It is
an electrical conductor and, therefore, is resistant to di-
electrical energy. At first, I thought it could not be cop-
per, but it was shown that it is a non-conductor of di-
electrical energy and is resistant to it and, therefore, should
166 ‘THROUGH THE CURTAIN

heat up. This is a simple system like the simple system in
electricity.

The splenic crystal, the one that corresponds to the
spleen in the human body, is a cone — two cones together.
When they are placed together it is a solid crystal. It is
shown as if it were taken apart. But if you put the two
cones together with the right angle where you have the
faces of cones—also a plane passed through the cones will
give you a square passed through the central axis of the
cones — because the angle at the point of each cone is also
a right angle.

SK What type of a cone would you use?

VPN Quartz, glass, but the angle at the tip of the cone
must be a right angle one if the plane is passed through
it at any point.

SK _ How are the two cones over the spleen producing the
energy?

VPN The spleen has an etheric one. All the sounds of
the Universe play upon us, but we resonate to certain ones.
If our thinking is negative, the emotions disorganized, we
resonate to some of the disharmonies and affect the splenic
center and all the other centers. Most dis-ease originates
at the present time in the astral body of humanity.

SK Now we come back to the mechanism of generation
of “F” energy? What kind of specific crystals should be
placed on each one-and-a-half turns of the spiral?
VPN Quartz crystals and beginning with the first platonic
solid.

SK You mean the Platonic solids have to be made of
quartz crystals?

VPN Yes. That is, you put a tetrahedron on the tip of
the lowest one. Then on the next one-and-a-half spiral,
the cube, etc. in their ascending order.

CRYSTALS 167

SK Will they all be made of crystals?

VPN Yes. It is simple. You can make a mold for the
crystals, but you could begin with what is called crystal
glass.

SK You mean the crystal glass would also do?
VPN You have to have the form. Glass is di-electric.

SK _ If one of the spirals is made of di-electric, what
about the other spiral?

VPN _ The spiral wire is made of any di-electric substance.
It is the points that are the crystals.

SK Do you have the two spirals made of glass and also
put crystals on them?
VPN _ It could be, but it is not practical. Use some other
di-electric substance.

SK Does the instructor suggest any other ones?
VPN He said just look them up.

SK Do you apply sound to one tip of this spiral?
VPN Yes, Platonic solids and you keep it sounding over
the highest portion of the solids.

SK Can it go through the di-electric coil?
VPN _ Yes and the second coil acts as a conductor. You
close the spiral and that is what the splenic analogy is.

SK How do you close the spiral?

VPN At the top and the bottom you bring the ends of
the spiral extended together at a point at right angles to
each other on one side, the right hand side, and the
secondary coil you bring to a point on the other side.

SK You mean you join the two spirals separately?

VPN Yes. They are not joined together, but are joined
at right angles. In the human body there is a joining of
the sushumna. Both spirals join the sushumna on top and

168 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

bottom. But you are trying to make a mechanical device.
We have to pull it out and look at it and work with it. The
sushumna is where the spirals are closed. It is the closing
link. It is like the Rod of Mercury, but the sushumna con-
tinues into the medulla oblongata. The two energies fuse
at the top of the neck. A model is shown as if it were made
of wires. Two wires, two spirals, are connected to the rod
at the bottom. They are also connected at the top. The
rod continues and in a sense, although it is not the same,
the rod is a miniature of Sanat Kumara’s Rod.

September 5, 1960
Night Class
Recalled by Viola Petitt Neal

Crystals show the highest development of the mineral
kingdom and are the key to healing through sound, and
“F” energy. Crystals include precious stones. Preliminary
work has been done in India using gems for healing. In
the future, different gems will be used for the different
octaves of sound. For example, a ruby cut in a special way
will transmit a certain frequency of sound. Individuals will
be able to wear a ruby which will be cut in a special man-
ner and will transmit certain frequencies to that individual
but not to others around him. Different crystalline forms
of different minerals could be adopted in healing and all
crystals transmit sound which may or may not be audible.

The Hope Diamond has a special cut and because of
that it transmits certain destructive energies. That is why
it has been associated with bringing bad luck to those who
wear it. Because of its beauty, there is associated with it
a great deal of emotional jealousy and envy, the combina-
tion of which has always resulted in bad luck to those who
possess it. The diamond is at present at the Smithsonian
Institution, Washington, D.C.

CRYSTALS 169

The Opal is helpful to people of high intelligence. It
is destructive to individuals with a lower I.Q. That is why
it has been considered as bad luck at times. It transmits
a number of frequencies. It could be used to transmit the
frequencies desired. It has the widest range of frequencies
of any crystalline form.

The topaz is constructive to ‘G” because of its cut.

The ruby and emerald transmit different frequencies.
If an individual loves a stone and has a strong feeling for
it, it may indicate a need within him for that frequency.

It would be interesting to look up references dealing
with the superstition of gems and jewels throughout the
ages.

Before the invention of radio, certain secret societies
discovered this process of transmitting sound through
crystals and cut the crystals in some form which helped
to transmit and receive messages throughout the world.

Sound frequencies, even if they are not audible, will
have the same effect on the individual. (Example: the
demonstration shown the other day of the use of inaudi-
ble sound in water which in turn was transmitted to the
physical body of the subject and from whom, through a
microphone, we could hear the music played). It is the
frequencies which go through the body that are important,
though they may not be heard. In future, the manner in
which the crystal is cut will modify the frequencies
transmitted and will be the key to the keynote and triads
of the individual being treated and who needs that fre-
quency without affecting others around him.

Because of the axis of crystals, photographing through
them may help to photograph the etheric body. Crystals
photograph patterns of energy. It may be advisable to get
a very fine crystal film—these are thin sheets of crystals —
and photograph through them. Crystals used in radio are
the finest available; even rejects may be good for this use.
Thirty-two Crystalline Forms —
The Key Pattern

February 23, 1962
Night Class
Recalled by Viola Petitt Neal

The thirty-two crystalline forms are the key patterns for
the way the energies are built in the universe; and the key
to unlocking energy in a constructive way. The atomic
bomb is a destructive way to unlocking energy. It may be

called the left-hand-path method. .
Knowledge of the crystalline forms may be considered

the right-hand-path method for unlocking energy by the
use of crystalline forms and sound in the audible, super-
sonic and infra-sonic, to manipulate and direct forces. Man
has not yet become basically creative. His movement into
creative fields is close at hand. He will discover how to use
crystalline forms to unlock, direct, and control energy and
to modify and mold substance. Remember the universe was
created by sound. Very shortly the scientists will be say-
ing this.

It is curious and yet not strange that man here on this
planet first discovered the destructive method for break-
ing into creative patterns of matter and energy — the left-
hand-path method.

170

CRYSTALS 171

The Van Allen Belt is a band of supersonic sound
around the earth and is constituted of a depository of
tremendous radiatory energy that is related to the etheric
poles and axis, which are at right angles to the magnetic
poles and axis of the earth. It is radiating. The radiations
seem to move in a circular path round and round within
the Van Allen Belt. This belt is very powerful and potent
radiatory energy. It attracts cosmic rays and appears to
confine the energy within the belt. Also it was remarked
that it does not trap all the cosmic radiations, but a large
portion of them.

There is a pattern in the thirty-two crystalline forms and
the thirty-two vertebrae in man. These have patterns of
different energy levels, which later on are to be made clear.
These different crystalline forms are the control buttons
for handling sound of all levels and for directing and con-
trolling it.

The five Platonic solids have a mathematical relation-
ship to the fact that 2 multiplied by itself five times gives
the number 32 —(2x2x2x2x2 = 32). The cross is for the ajna
or brow center. It is the meeting of Spirit and Matter.

February 24, 1962
Night Class
Recalled by Viola Petitt Neal

Present in class were seven students, two of whom were
esoteric scientists.

Crystals are orderly arranged molecularly and magnets
have an orderly arrangement of molecules also which
makes possible the magnetic lines of force. By cor-
respondence: a) the magnet is the Matter polarity and b)
172 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

crystals are the Spirit polarity. The orderly arrangement
of molecules in crystals produces an etheric field. The
etheric field is similar to the magnetic field of force. Just
as the magnetic field is a key to electricity, so the etheric
field of crystals is the key to di-electric energy. (Refer to
the magnetic and etheric axis of the earth.)

There was in the middle of the room a beautiful cut
crystal of icosahedron which was revolving and reflecting
light as it revolved. Almost like moving in two ways at once,
like a gyroscope at right angles to each other. In the
crystalline forms we have the pure geometrical patterns of
the creative process.

Concentrating on a particular geometrical form first at
his throat center, then at a point in the brain, made it
possible to start the “K” motor. The motor itself required
a certain type of construction which was no secret, but once
he had started it by this method it continued to operate
until he shut it off, either by mechanical means or again
by focusing on certain geometrical forms in his brain. “K”
happened on this through experimentation. He knew it was
dangerous to give it to people and never said how he did it.

Energy systems could be constructed through the use
of crystalline forms, and how much energy and the kind of
energy could be regulated by the kind of crystals. This
would not involve the use of wires as in our present
methods. Light produced by such method of energy will
be soft and more beautiful than harsh light of electricity
and will be beneficial to the physical and etheric bodies
of mankind. The basic first product of “F” energy from
an energy unit made of crystals will be light and this light
could be transformed into heat and mechanical motion.

There must be at least seven people in the world who
could make them and use them so that when there was
a breakdown in society “F” could be made available for
light and heat to assist mankind to survive, without much

CRYSTALS 173

cost. Such light could be produced in abundance and
directed on a small plot of land, producing fantastically
rapid growth of food. A family of six could be supported
by a plot twenty-five feet by twenty-five feet for needed

food, for both light and temperature could be controlled
like a spotlight.

The class discussion ended with the following:
“Ask and it shall be given you
Seek and ye shall find
Knock and the door shall be opened unto you.”

The Therapeutic and Scientific Uses
of Crystals

May 10, 1962
Night Class
Recalled by Viola Petitt Neal

The jewel in the heart of the lotus mentioned in the
esoteric teachings is also referred to as the diamond, and
there is a symbolism here which also exists in the physical
world. The symbolism is that the black carbon becomes
the scintillating diamond of flaming light. All physical life
is based on carbon, ordinary amorphous carbon, It is the
basis of organic life and eventually through many trans-
mutations, the jewel of the Soul is born, which is symbol-
ically the diamond. Both the amorphous and diamond are
pure carbon.

So the diamond is the symbol of the material life
transmuted into Spiritual life. Because this has basic truth
and symbolism in life, people value the diamond greatly.
There is even a symbolism in the fact that only so many
diamonds are permitted on world markets by materialists.
Actually, this parallels the people in the human kingdom
who have brought forth the birth of the Soul. The
materialistic people feel that by possessing the diamond
they possess something very valuable because underlying
it is the true symbolism of a diamond. Usually they in no

174

CRYSTALS 175

way possess what the diamond stands for. Even the fact
that the diamond must be cut and polished is a symbol
of the cutting and polishing of the Soul in experiences of
the personality in earthly life. There is written in the Book
of Life the evolution of the mineral kingdom. A diamond
has a very high frequency and often for people who are
greedy, selfish, or evil, the diamond high frequency is such
that the wearer cannot take it and may be shattered by it
unless he is too insensitive to respond to it.

Those who owned the Hope diamond were more evolved
people, but selfish, and some of them truly evil, and so
it had a shattering effect on them. People build up
thoughtforms around such jewels that may also be de-
structive to the owner. This is why the crown jewels in
England are kept in a museum and only used briefly at
some great ceremony, like the coronation, where the power
of their frequency is distributed to many people. That is
why many people keep their jewels in a safe deposit box
and wear imitations. They cannot take the frequency of
the jewels, although they do not know this.

Old crystals are symbolical of the higher frequencies
in the cosmic scheme of things. They are also in a purely
practical level of experience resonant to higher physical
frequencies and they have.an effect on the physical body.
Crystals establish either a more harmonious frequency in
the physical body or, if the individual has too negative a
pattern in his emotions and mental body, the frequencies
fight each other and the result is not helpful; and it is not
because the jewel is not good.

Crystals have given man an open door to the contact
with and use of higher frequencies of energy to build and
to mold his civilization. We are at the beginning of the
use of crystals, and on the knowledge of crystals we will
build the physical structure of the new civilization. For
example, the new discovery of the laser beam, and what

176 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

has been found so far is the key to “F” energy and uses
of all kinds. The secret of the crystal is in its geometrical
form, as well as the quality of its substance. The diamond
is the most evolved crystal.

As soon as more of humanity brings the birth of the
Christ in the heart, there can be a rapid development of
consciousness by the use of geometrical forms and also by
the use of crystals themselves which the disciple will wear.
This is understood to a limited degree in the Masonic
order where a certain degree entitles the wearer to a ring
with a diamond in the symbol.

The energy flow into the center could be handled thera-
peutically by the use of crystalline forms in the form of
the five platonic solids. These forms could be placed on
the periphery of whirling discs and whirled at so many
revolutions per second, with the person placed in front of
it to help establish a steady rhythm of a given frequency
in the etheric centers. This kind of healing will be per-
manently effected only if the person is cooperating by his
own mental and emotional attitude. A person harboring
a great resentment could not be permanently cured, if ill,
because of it.

The whirling disc would be best made of eighteen carat
gold or copper plated with gold. The size should be about
six inches in diameter. A crystal form is placed on the edge
of the disc which revolves at two hundred times per second
for ordinary humanity and six hundred times per second
for more evolved individuals. This depends on their
development. One crystalline form is used at one time
depending on the center involved. The duration must be
for brief periods—one minute and up, maybe once a week
or three times a week. The disc faces toward the person,
in line with the center to be treated and moving clockwise
relative to the person.

CRYSTALS 177

Crystals can be made of quartz, but with certain diseases
other crystalline substances would be more beneficial. The
form used depends on the center to be treated according
to the platonic solids. The crystals could be in the range
of one-quarter inch or one inch in size. Actual size is not
too important, but the form is important. One center
should be treated at any one time. The effect of this would
be to impose a harmonious rhythm on the center and cor-
rect and steady the inflow of energy of the right frequency.
The individual can disrupt the rhythm by his own negative
emotions and thoughts, but such treatment relieves him
physically so he can direct his mind to correcting the
causes.

Present: Twenty-five or thirty students.

June 21, 1962
Night Class
Recalled by Viola Petitt Neal

We live in an ocean of frequencies as a fish lives in the
water, The fish is unaware of the many possibilities of the
medium in which he moves. So man has been totally
unaware of the possibilities of the vast ocean of frequen-
cies in which he lives. The many energy frequencies move
in geometrical patterns. When the geometrical patterns
are altered, their manifestation is altered. Crystals are
those substances which alter the geometrical pattern of fre-
quencies, We must realize that these frequency patterns
are more or less stable, but that crystals because of their
strength of geometrical pattern can modify and reform the
frequency pattern. In doing so, energy can be released and
directed to man’s purposes.
178 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

Actually, light results from a change in frequency pat-
tern. Emphasis is on the pattern — geometrical form. Light
can be produced by using an arrangement of crystals which
can modify certain frequency patterns. This does not re-
quire solar energy or light. It can be done equally at night
as well as daytime. This can be done without wearing out
the crystals. Light could be produced in a house with such
an arrangement of crystals and turned on and off by a sim-
ple button that would arrange the crystals in the right pat-
tern or disarrange the pattern.

Another type of crystal arrangement in a certain pat-
tern could produce heat. This is an access to energy by
altering the geometrical pattern of selected energy fre-
quencies. Various crystalline forms can be used to key into
patterns of frequencies and give specific types of results.
Synthetic emerald is the key to producing light. Quartz
crystals are the most versatile of all crystal forms. For tap-
ping a new source of energy the geometrical forms are the
key — hexagonal forms.

The Use of Crystals for Lighting

March 17, 1962
Night Class
Recalled by Viola Petitt Neal

Light does not travel as we think, but there is a band
of frequencies which, when intersecting each other at given
angles, gives rise to light. Light is an effect of two causes.
The two intersecting frequencies have a relationship of (+ )
positive and (— ) negative polarity. The nature of light is
different from what we think. It is produced by positive
and negative frequencies meeting at an angle. We have
thought of positive and negative electrodes, but we have
not yet thought of positive and negative frequencies.

In the “world of frequency” when two frequencies meet
each other, you get, (a) the sum of the frequencies; and
(b) the difference of the frequencies.

In the case of the two frequencies that produce light:
(a) the sum is equal to light; and (b) the difference of the
frequency is heat. The angle of intersection determines the
intensity of light and the amount of heat. Instead of us-
ing electricity to make light, we will use light to make elec-
tricity. Not only is there an abundance of light to be used
for energy, but we are immersed in an ocean of frequency
that could be harnessed in a simple way to give light, heat,
mechanical energy.

179

180 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

It would be possible to produce whatever climate we
desire over an acre of ground. It would be possible to set
up a small crystal reflector to cover an acre and grow any
kind of food in mid-winter if necessary. It would produce
a climate of a certain temperature in a small area.

Just as metals are keys to electricity, so crystals are keys
to this new development of the use of energy by man. We
will find a vast amount of crystalline forms in the earth.

Actually there are diamond forms. The discovery of the
laser effect is just the beginning of a series of discoveries.

The secret of the “K” motor was a crystalline form that VI
was used and no one knew. It was under everybody's nose,
but no one felt a crystal had an effect on a motor. “K”
found out that just by visualizing the geometrical form of
the crystal he could get the motor to start. But there were Science
crystals in the mechanism of the motor. Simpler devices
than “K’s” motor could be made. A simple combination
of magnets and crystals could give you all the energy need-
ed to run a house.

The magnet represents the most orderly focus of what
we may call the matter polarity. The crystal represents the j
most orderly focus of what we may call the Spirit polar-
ity. Creativity takes place always between two polarities.
Therefore, the right combination of magnets and crystals
will produce the creative effect of energy.

We have already discovered in the cutting of crystals how
to get certain sound effects at different frequencies. This
would also give us a different frequency of energies for use.
Light on the crystal and magnet, that is, lines of force from
the magnet, are the components of a new energy system.
Future lighting will be glowing crystals.

“When we contemplate the atom, we stand at the dawn
of creation. The creation of the atom ts the beginning of
time and space.”

—Night Class, February 1980

How Far

How far ts space?

How long ts time?

Thes boggled my mind when I was three.

“Space is as far as far can be,

Time is as long as long can be,”

My Black Mammy said

When I was three.

That seemed as right as right could be.

Man — Life — Form — Light

March 29, 30, 1961
Night Class
Recalled by Viola Petitt Neal

With man, seven planes of frequencies are interwoven.
In the case of the three higher planes, there are fewer fre-
quencies interwoven. The tapestry that is man has many
patterns within the framework of the pattern we call
“Man.” The more evolved individual has a pattern of con-
sciousness which includes more of the higher frequencies.

The meeting of Spirit and Substance is the beginning
of movement — the origin of frequency which moves out
on a spiral path. The oscillating circuit in electricity is the
pattern of the creative process. It is the pattern of the
cosmic marriage from which are born the outward mov-
ing spiral frequencies which make up the web of the
created universe.

Sound is the frequency which builds the form. The form
is a spheroid. This is the basic pattern of form. This is due
to the fact that all motion of frequency is spiral — galaxies
and solar systems show this spheroidal pattern —so does a
raindrop.

When life meets form, mathematics originates. Mathe-
matics can be defined as how life and form interact. It is
the Law of Spiral Motion. Einstein said that space is curv-
ed. He had in a measure tuned in on this spiral motion

183
184 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

of frequency and the spheroidal form which is the result
of this motion of the frequencies of the created universe.

The oscillating circuit—Spirit and Substance —is the
cosmic dance in ordered pattern, the Dance of Shiva. This
cosmic dance, in ordered patterns, which produces form
through which the life expresses, is copied by primitive
people in their ritual dances. The planets circling in the
solar system perform a cosmic dance. Eventually, we realize
that all mathematical relationships can be defined in terms
of intersecting spirals.

The life aspect being the positive polarity, the first thrust
of form outward to matter conditions the type of form that
is built. Therefore, we say that life commands the form.

Not only is the universe a pattern of frequencies, but
the angle at which frequencies intersect determines what
kind of manifestation we have. When certain frequency
rates intersect at certain angles, physical light is the result.
It, in its turn, is also a frequency. Leght does not travel
all the way from the sun—frequencies do, and when they
intersect with earth frequencies, light ts the result of this
meeting. Light is the sum of the frequencies as they beat
against each other. Heat ts the difference of the two fre-
quencies. In winter, although we are closer to the sun, we
in the Northern hemisphere experience winter, less light
and heat. This is due to the angle of intersection. So the
angle of intersection of the particular frequencies which
make light and heat is the important thing, not the
nearness to the sun. The more oblique angle to the sun
causes winter.

The Book of the Universe —
Correspondences in Patterns of Energy

October 16, 1961
Night Class

Recalled by Viola Petitt Neal

The lecture had various correspondences in the fact
that the pattern is endlessly repeated in the universe. The
lecturer made several points about these correspondences
some of which we are already familiar with and yet thew
1s a more profound understanding of the meaning. First
of all, in this pattern that is always repeated throughout
the universe, there are always two polarities: spirit and
matter, mind and emotion, masculine and feminine, etc.
This pattern originates from the interplay of two polar op-
posites. This interplay produces other pairs of polar op-
posites which again produce interplay. This is how the pat-
tern is formed. (There were thoughtforms demonstrating
this. )

The two polarities make an interplay —there moves out
from this meeting of polar opposites something like the
spokes of a wheel. The way this thoughtform was made
showed that at the end of each spoke was another circular
point, a circle indicating another point of energy. These
points of energy were separated and they alternated plus
and minus around the wheel. Immediately there was an

185
186 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

interplay between these points—plus and minus points,
which indicated positive/negative polarity. They seemed
to separate from the parent wheel and there was an in-
terplay between them and again a moving out like the
spokes of a wheel, until you saw the pattern of the universe
like a tremendous globe with points of energy. I could tell
there was a tremendous interplay and the pattern was
always circular and the lines of force were always spiral.

The whole universe is patterned as solid geometry —
spiral—the energy moving out in a spiral form. The
geometrical forms are sections of a globe, rather than ac-
tual straight lines, although we think of them as straight
lines. They are all sections of a great globe or arcs of a
circle, you might say, instead of just straight-line patterns.
For example, you see a triangle form which is the arc of
a circle—three arcs intersecting rather than three straight
lines intersecting.

It is true that a straight line is the shortest distance be-
tween two points, but in the universe all space is curved.
The arc of a circle or of a sphere is the shortest distance
between two points. He said that when Einstein talked
about space being curved this was the concept he was try-
ing to present. Einstein did not quite clearly understand
himself, and he was not able to present a pictorial form
so that people really understood it.

When two opposite polarities meet, these energy pat-
terns, the spokes of the wheel that we see when we look
at them closer, are spiral not just straight lines of energy.
Eventually there is such an interweaving of them in the
universe that we get an atom or a solar system where there
is a tremendous interweaving of these lines of force.

An atom is where the lines of force curve in on each
other and move into an interior pattern instead of mov-
ing outward. They cease then to be energy and become
substance. If they are still moving outward they are energy.

A,

SCIENCE 187

The interweaving of these energies preserves the spiral form
or motion, because all energies move this way as they in-
tersect each other, and continue to give each other momen-
tum which is spiral, circular.

The lecturer said that tonight we are reading the Book
of the Universe. There are simple principles which will
make it very easy for the scientific minds on any planet
to unravel much of the mystery of energy and substance,
if these principles are more clearly understood. Because
the universe works in this way, then it is obvious that the
correspondences would work on the analogy because you
know how the pattern works. It works the same way with
an atom or solar system. There is a neutral point of the
opposite polarities — plus and minus, positive and negative.

I am trying to remember what that was—to remember
the rest of this lecture, because there was a great deal to
it and the lecture tomorrow night is on magnetism, so I

have to try to remember what the story was on this
discussion.

Origin of Magnetism

October 16, 1961

Night Class
Recalled by Viola Petitt Neal

This discussion has something to do with the origin of
magnetism or what magnetism is.

Whenever there is an interplay of opposites which is the
pattern of the universe, the origin of all energy, all sub-
stance and all form —this interplay of opposite polarities
is almost as if the universe were divided in some way that
is beyond my comprehension into a neutral point, or the
homogeneous universe, and is made heterogeneous by
dividing into polar opposites.

He reminded us of Spencer's definition of evolution:
“Evolution is the integration of matter and a concomitant
dissipation of motion by which an indefinite incoherent
homogeneity passes to a definite coherent heterogeneity
and the forces involved undergo a parallel transformation.”

This interplay was the origin of all manifestation in the
universe. In this great activity there are points of rest, or
“neutral points;” for example, in the heart beat there are
points of rest and points of activity. We are familiar with
this and he was trying to give us analogies. He said that
there are neutral points. He went back to the discussion
of an atom as being interlaced spirals of energy —they move
in on themselves. Whenever these out-rushing great spirals
of energy turn in upon themselves and form a pattern, you

188

eee ad

SCIENCE 189

have an atom, or a solar system, or a human being, a plant
or animal, a form through which the life is moving. The
pattern is always the same.

The energies move in this pattern — in at one vortex and
out at the other—so you always have a slight depression
in the top of an atom, or planet, or a sun and a slight pro-
trusion in the outward movement; but the pattern remains
in the way in which the spiral energies move in upon each
other through the center of every form, whether it is visi-
ble to the eye or not. There is a point where these energies
move around each other as if they were moving around
a rod. Now that rod (and this is a schematic portrayal)
is the neutral point. This pattern is ever-moving, but ap-
pears to be stable because the pattern is stable. The
energies are moving all the time.

All forms, such as an atom through which two polarities
express, are patterns of energy. They appear to be stable
because the patterns appear to be stable, but the energies
are always moving and changing. This was a new concept
to the minds of the students present. It was probably a new
concept or different concept of an atom. These spirals of
energy move in forming the stable pattern, but the energies
are ever-changing.

Taking for example a picture of an atom (which he
flashed as a teaching aide — although it was three dimen-
sional like a thoughtform) you could see the energy mov-
ing. The two energies were making different colors in the
thoughtform, the minus ( — ) energy was blue and the plus
(+) energy was red, he said, simply to give us a contrast,
They move in and where they move into an atom, a planet
or sun or anything else, there is a slight depression; and
where they move out, a slight protrusion. All globe forms
are slightly off the globular form. Where they move in,
there is this so-called “neutral point” in the center. It is
schematically portrayed like a rod. The energies moved

190 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

across each other. These spiral energy forms moved back
and forth around this rod—or back and forth. They really
formed the rod—the rod wasn’t there to begin with, but
the fact that they moved in like this, like the Rod of Mer-
cury that doctors use as their symbol. They move in. Mov-
ing back and forth across each other, they move in a spiral
form. The Rod of Mercury is a flat form and this was three
dimensional. As they do this, they create a “neutral point”
in the center of the atom or the form.

This is what held a human being — life in manifestation.
Life in a form. This neutral point was really what held
an atom in manifestation. The modern scientists refer to
this as a “neutrino.” They call it a “neutral particle,” no
doubt for lack of a better way of describing it because it
required certain concepts in thinking that were abstract
and not easy to give in a concrete form. This “neutral
point” is a type of energy and has something to do with
magnetism, the binding force of the universe.

These innumerable rods or neutral points of every atom,
every form in the universe, were what held it in manifesta-
tion. The secret of magnetism is, in this concept, what it
is, Although these “neutral points” held the universe in
manifestation from an atom to a solar system, or a sun,
or a planet; if these points were unduly disturbed it would
be very destructive. But it would be destructive to the life
more than to the form. In a sense for a time you would
produce dead atoms. It is only a way of describing it rather
than an actual factual concept.

In a sense the “neutral point” holds the two polarities
sufficiently apart to guarantee interplay. It is kind of like
a buffer between the two. It holds them sufficiently apart
to produce interplay and yet preserve the pattern. He says
that you have to produce interplay between these two forces
or energies. You cannot produce it—you have to keep it
in continuation, is the correct way to say it. You have to

SCIENCE 191

keep the interplay in a continuous process and yet held
sufficiently apart so that they do not rush together.

The “neutral point” is that so-called rod, for lack of a
better name. That holding-apart field is related to
magnetism. This will explain the phenomenon called
magnetism, sometimes referred to as the third energy. It
appears to be static magnetism because it is the “neutral
points.” It isn’t moving like electricity or other energies we
talk about. It is the holding apart and it is the holding
together of energies at the “neutral point” of the universe.
The holding apart of the two great polarities and the
holding together of all of the forms that are made by those
two polarities. This is a very interesting concept. Mag-
netism is the attraction and the repulsion.

May 23, 1962
Tuning in to Knowledge
by Viola Petitt Neal

During a discussion between SK and VPN about
magnetism, there was a period of silence and VPN gave
her impressions of what she was able to obtain about the
subject. These were the impressions, as she tuned in to this
field of knowledge:

Magnetism is the creative result or manifestation of the
meeting of two opposite polarities: Spirit and Substance
or Matter. In the overall concept, the Soul zs a magnet.

An actual physical magnet is made up of two opposite
polarities: positive (+) and negative (— ) electricity held
in balance. A magnet can be separated into its compo-
nent parts of positive and negative electricity by passing
a conductor through the magnetic field at right angles to
the field. A permanent magnet is a magnetic vortex where
192 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

positive and negative electricity continue to mix in equal
amounts in an eternal pattern.

Passing a conductor at right angles gives us the symbol
of the cross. A temporary magnet is set up in a circuit;
there isn't a permanent pattern. A pattern exists for the
current flow. Example: Electro-magnetism. A wire carry-
ing a current has a weak magnetic field around it because
all along its length, while the current flows, there is an
equal amount of positive and negative electricity. So you
have a magnetic condition which is temporary.

Magnetism on the physical plane is an equal amount
of positive and negative electricity held in a pattern either
permanently or temporarily. The physical plane manifesta-
tion of magnetism is an overall pattern of the whole
creative process.

The Soul as a magnet partakes equally of Spirit and
Substance and is always described as magnetic.

Magnetism should be described not so much in terms
of attracting as in terms of manifestation partaking equally
of two opposite polarities, either permanently or tempo-
rarily. This type of description of the nature of magnetism
could be more clearly understood. In a sense the attract-
ing aspect is incidental to this basic fact.

The Magnet (the Soul or iron magnet) attracts what may
be termed imperfect creation because it is endeavoring to
establish the perfect creation of equal amounts of opposite
polarities in that which it attracts. Example: The physical
magnet that attracts a steel pin for the time being has equal
amounts of opposite polarities established in the pin.

Of course, people who are more conscious of themselves
as “I, the Soul,” have an attractiveness to those still strug-
gling as “I, the personality.” This is the mystery of the at-
tractiveness of the Christ to the people of Palestine as the
perfect expression as a magnet.

It is interesting to point out at this juncture that some
clairvoyants are able to see blue, the Spirit aspect, and

SCIENCE 193

pink, the Matter aspect, at either end of a magnet. In a
way, these two colors are the polar opposites of the color
spectrum. It is a repetition of the polarity pattern.

Crystal is a magnet of di-electric polarities having equal
amounts of positive and negative energy, which is equal
and opposite to that of electric energy in this relationship.
Di-electric energy is Spirit and electrical energy is the Mat-
ter polarity,

Dia-magnet is equal charges of positive and negative di-
electric energy, which helps in a permanent or temporary
pattern. The relationship of di-electric and electric energy,
where they are in a creative pattern, is a solar system which

is actually a magnet where the two energies, di-electric and
electric, are held in equal relationship.

The Neutron

September 20, 1964
Night Class
Recalled by Viola Petitt Neal

The neutron is the sound binder of substance. The
ultimate secret of the atom is not in the electron or pro-
ton, but in the neutron. A study of the different elements
will reveal what might be described as a harmonious varia-
tion in the sound binder (the neutron). If you look at a
periodic table you will find there a pattern of how the
sound binder works in a pattern of order and one might
say harmony. The words atomic weight could be replaced
by the words atomic sound binder.

Kepler's discovery of the ratios of planetary orbits is
another example of the pattern of the sound binder. What
we might call a cosmic atom scale, for let us remember
an atom is like a solar system and a solar system is like an
atom. Throughout the universe you will find solar systems
that correpsond in their structure to every atom of sub-
stance. In other words, a sun with one planet will corre-
spond in pattern and in actual structure to a hydrogen
atom, etc. Such things as asteroids will show a faithful cor-
respondence to other particles of the atom. One might say
that the music of the spheres is not just poetic fancy.

This lecture is being given at this time because of dis-
coveries that had been more or less accidentally made in
the nation of the Soviet Union. The mysterious death of

194

SCIENCE 195
some of the scientific personnel led almost by accident to
the discovery of a certain sound frequency which affects
the sound binder of the iron atom. This is a supersonic
frequency. It is an extremely narrow band of the super-
sonic scale, but lethal because it affects the red blood cells
of man and animals.

In plant life it could greatly distort and disturb our pres-
ent plant kingdom, but is not as instantly lethal. For-
tunately, the method has not yet been discovered for direc-
ting and controlling this supersonic frequency so that it
would kill only one group of people in one part of the
world, say London, and not kill those who send it out.
Those who have made this discovery know that the risk
and danger is tremendous and it has cost them serious
casualties even in very small and controlled laboratory
experiments.

With this particular supersonic frequency, the “note”
or frequency of the sound binder of iron is changed so that
the iron is broken down into another element (transmuta-
tion of one element into another) but this is fatal when
it affects the iron in the blood stream, Let us remember
it will also affect the iron in any object within range. You
can, therefore, imagine what man could do to his planet.
Those who have stumbled on this discovery do not yet know
what they are doing—certainly do not know the full im-
plications. They will not dare to use it because of the fear
of destroying themselves or the whole human race, and this
is most certainly possible if they did use it.

When the sound binder of the atom is tampered with
there is no radio activity—the phenomenon involved is
something totally different. In the sound binder or neutron
of the atom is the secret of magnetism. The neutron is
magnetic. The electron and proton are electrical. In their
movement the electron and proton are intensely stable—a
pattern of energy is set up which is an atom of hydrogen,

196 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

or an atom of iron, or an atom of gold, etc. The actual
frequency of the sound binder (or strength of magnet)
determines how many electrons— how much the proton
charge.

It is an interesting fact that in the element iron is a key,
or a door we might say, to the secret of the constitution
of matter. The relationship of electricity as we know it to
the iron magnet tells us how this cosmic pattern works.
In the case of iron there is not a completely closed system.
In the case of so-called conductors there is not a closed
system. By relating copper, for example, to the field of
iron of an iron magnet, a trickle of energy which we call
positive and negative electricity flows through the gap in
the cosmic wall of substance and we have an energy that
we can control and use.

We go back to the concept that the sound binder is
magnetic as we conceive of magnetism. It is significant that
the breakthrough in electricity and breakthrough in the
discovery of a sonic frequency that will affect the neutron
has to do with the element iron. For iron constitutes this
loophole or door in the cosmic wall of substance. The
discovery was made in the Soviet Union through a study
of the Van Allen belt and the application of Tesla’s work.
Knowledge of this sound binder could result in a control
of energy from the atom which will not involve death or
danger to the planet; which will not involve radioactivity
and which could give a new energy source.

There is a third method that is neither fusion nor fis-
sion. It has to do with sonic frequencies used in a different
way from what the Russians are doing with their new so-
called weapon. Their discovery can result in a new break-
through in energy for man which could be beneficial to
the whole evolutionary process— could come about hun-
dreds of years ahead of time. These things are not always,
therefore, disastrous. Sometimes they force a development

SCIENCE 197

for good that would lag behind for centuries. As so often
happens, man’s danger forces progress.

Every atom is a closed electromagnetic system, The
neutron is magnetic. The electron and proton are elec-
trical. From the outside it presents an appearance and
reality of an atom of a definite substance. That is
hydrogen, gold, etc. In future lectures, we will discuss other
aspects of this breakthrough.

Sixteen students were present, at least five of whom
seemed to be English or American. | think they were scien-
tists. I seem to be an interested auditor.
Time and Space

October 4, 1964
Night Class

Recalled by Viola Petitt Neal

VPN He says:

“In this discussion we will endeavor to achieve
some different concepts from those usually held
within your framework of thinking. In order to
think of the world which you perceive with your
five senses and interpret with your mind and
color with your emotions, you must have certain
concepts.

“Two of these concepts—time and space—
come under our discussion tonight. Let us use a
somewhat inadequate analogy and say that time
and space are the picture frame and glass
through which you look at the universe which is
the picture. Time and space are an invention of
the human mind as its tools and methods for
dealing with what it perceives in terms of
thought.

“Tonight we want to think in terms of sound
and sequence: sound we will roughly equate with
space, sequence we will roughly equate with
time. Sequence and sound, therefore, we will

198

SCIENCE

*

equate with time and space moving from ac-
cepted concepts to more expanded concepts.

“The visible material universe is put together
by sound in an orderly sequence, This orderly
sequence is the basis of mathematics. And
mathematics is really the science of what you call
‘time.’ Let us remember here the ordinary con-
cepts of time are inadequate.

“Sequence is a more expanded concept and we
must define sequence to mean instantaneous or
timeless, and many stages in between.

“We have said that the universe is put together
by sound and we speak of the material universe.
At this point let us define substance as definitely
different from matter: matter meaning material
as we commonly think of this word. You are
familiar in chemistry with a saturated solution
just before a compound begins to precipitate out
of the solution. At a certain critical point the
slightest change will start the precipitation out
of solution. Up to that point it is held in an in-
visible state.

“Now let us define substance: Substance is that
state in the universe similar to the condition in
solution just before the point of precipitation and
matter is the precipitate.

“In the larger picture of the universe, sound
moving in orderly sequence causes substance to
precipitate and it becomes matter with the stamp
of orderly sequence upon it and a perfect pat-
tern which we call different elements. This order-
ly sequence is the Time Binder of the universe.
We might for the present discussion define
mathematics as the science of the t2me binder of
the universe and physics as the science of the

199

200

THROUGH THE CURTAIN

sound binder of the universe. The two sciences,
of course, are interdependent and cannot be
separated.

“I want you to think of orderly sequence as
something much more than your ordinary con-
cept of time. Orderly sequence determines wave
length. In the vaster structure of the universe
wave length determines which and what element.
A combination of sequence of sound produces
a certain element of material matter. Sound
moving in specific orderly sequences to a point
of intersection precipitates out of substance an
orderly arrangement of electrons and protons
with the sound binder, the neutron which we call
matter. The sequence is the time binder of the
atom.

“This time binder accounts for the mathe-
matical and orderly arrangement of the atom of
matter. It also ¢zmes its length of life. You can
apprehend the atom’s orderly arrangement, but
except for radioactive substance, you can
discover very little about the atom’s length of
duration.

“At this point let us discuss a new concept of
space. Let us admit all these definitions are in-
adequate; nevertheless, they are used to expand
your thinking.

“Space is an infinite web of sound moving in
orderly sequence. What you call space is the
vaster area in which substance has not yet pre-
cipitated into matter. You perceive atoms or solar
systems as existing in what you call space. They
exist within an orderly sequence of sound. In
these concepts are new frontiers of science. Of
necessity the perceiver of this orderly sequence

_ aa ens pes PE

SCIENCE

of sound and of the material universe stands at
a Strategic point of vantage. To some extent he
becomes a modifier of the pattern. Man can
modify to his own destruction or he can modify
the pattern so that he becomes more the master
of this material environment, extending the cir-
cle of his comprehension and achieving higher
levels of moral responsibility in an orderly
universe.

“The developing in man of moral responsi-
bility in an orderly universe ultimately requires
a knowledge of science and an understanding of
the world of meaning which you are getting in
your courses of study in another department of
this college.”

201

VPN _ Seventeen persons were present, of whom four were
women. One person sitting on the right of this student
should have been present at the preceding lecture on sound
binder. This whole college is from the First Ray Ashram.
The sound binder lecture is from the Seventh Ray Ashram.
SCIENCE _ 203
energy moving into the center of the pattern at
high rates of speed. This center you are ac-
customed to thinking of as the nucleus of the
atom. The energy moves out in ever-widening
spiral cones from this center of input. The energy
is positive or plus as it moves in, and negative
or minus in the outmoving spiral cones. Every
atom has a field which is produced by the out-
moving spiral cone. The pattern of these spiral
cones is also a stable pattern. Depending on the

January 24, 1972 element, there may be one spiral cone as in

Night Class hydrogen or many as in the case of the atom.

Recalled by Viola Pettit Neal These spiral cones you now refer to as electrons.

The total atom, including the inmoving vortex

VPN_ This was a scientific lecture in the department of the of energy and the outward moving spiral cones,
Fifth Ray Ashram, with over one hundred people present. has a spin on an axis of rotation.

He says: “I would refer to this as the Life Energy of the

Esoteric Concept of Matter and Energy

“In your scientific world today you are familiar
with the statement that matter is energy. This is
literally true beginning with the building blocks of
all forms, the atoms. The actual structure of the
atom is a matter of tight vortices of energy. The
pattern of every atom in the universe, or we might
say the pattern structure is relatively stable, to all
intents and purposes very stable. But contrary to
what you may have thought, the energy moves in
and out of the area constantly at given rates of
speed. These rates of speed are modified to some
degree by temperature and other causes which we
can go into later. What I want to present to your
minds is not a static particle of matter, but a stable
pattern with the energies constantly moving in and
out.

“The atom is composed of a stable pattern
with a tight and dynamic spiral vortex of subtle

202

universe, but the term life energy has connota-
tions for you which will make it difficult for you
to keep your minds clear to think creatively.
Therefore, we will call it etheric energy, mean-
ing ‘a subtle, powerful and all-pervading energy.’
We might say that all space is an ocean of energy
and wherever we find matter or substance we
find this energy moving in and out of stable pat-
terns, We could describe a solid object (let's
remember solid to our five senses) as a web of
energy patterns which are the atoms that make
up its form.

“When we come to living forms, and here
again I must use a term familiar to you, such as
a plant, an animal, a human being, we have
energy patterns again. A plant has two fairly
large energy vortices similar to the energy vor-
tices of the atom. Again the energy flows in to
204

THROUGH THE CURTAIN

the center or core in a tight spiral and moves out
in expanding spiral cones. In the case of the plant
form, the outmoving cones of the two vortices
form the field around the plant and the sensitive
who can perceive these vortices can describe the
conditions of the plants as healthy or diseased (or
about to be diseased) by the condition of the vor-
tices and the field. In living plants, animals and
human beings many things can disturb the pat-
tern and the inflowing energies, though the pat-
tern again is fairly stable. The atoms composing
the form are not disturbed in their pattern or
energy. In the case of the plant, as with the atom,
the energy flowing into the center core of the
vortex is plus and the outward flow of the
expanding cones is minus.”

The Hymn of Isis

February 2, 1980
Night Class
Recalled by Viola Petitt Neal

I am Isis the Virgin Mother

I am mathematics

I am science

I am medicine

I am the substance of which all forms are
built in this world

I am the energy of substance

I build the forms, many and diverse
through which life expresses

I am the Divine Mother of Consciousness.

Perhaps the mysteries of Isis will give clues to a new kind
of energy. (Etheric neutron of the atom —first etheric
neutron of the atom —first etheric level.)

Love is seeing and perceiving relationships and related-
ness. Wisdom for action and understanding is a result of
perceiving relationships and relatedness.

205
206 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

The term Holy Spirit, used in the Christian faith to sig-
nify the matter polarity, is strictly speaking the energy of
substance. The vast intricacies of the form must have an
overall simplifying aspect.

February 2, 1980
Night Class
Recalled by Viola Petitt Neal

Finding the discovery. of a new kind of energy, man pro-
gresses by using physical, emotional and mental energy.

When we know the mystery of the neutron of the atom
we will have opened a door or a tube to siphon off the en-
ergy that constantly flows through the atoms and we will
catch it as it enters the atom, which will be pure electric-
ity. The atom is an energy pattern which concentrates the
energy which is flowing in and out of the pattern at very
rapid rates all the time. It is the concentration of energy
that gives the appearance of solids. The energy of the
universe is flowing constantly through atoms. Pure energy
flows in the neutron and at this point accepts a plus (+)
and a minus (— ) charge, and it is at this point of mani-
festation of the universe—all atoms of substance have
similar patterns.

We are moving in space in our evolution in consciousness
to the point that we will know how to intercept this energy
at its point of entry and differentiation, and channel
measured and controlled portions (without danger) to uses
in the material world very specifically, but also to the emo-
tional and mental worlds. In a sense we will be intercept-
ing energy at the point of the beginning of all things.

Some of this was known to the Mysteries of Isis in an-
cient Egypt. The teacher said:

SCIENCE

“You are aware of this, of ancient schools in
Egypt, and that is why you feel sure there is a
kind of energy not yet discovered or being used.
We are moving close to the time when this energy
will be discovered and used, as there begins to
be an externalization of the Spiritual Hierarchy
on the planet.

“The knowledge is in the consciousness of a
number of disciples in incarnation at the present
time. It will come to the surface of consciousness
in due time. It is being cautiously manifested by
members of the Fifth Kingdom so that the time
is right — but be sure it will come. It is possible
that it will be handled by a few seasoned dis-
ciples, initiates and adepts without the total pro-
cess being revealed to the masses or greedy
materialists.”’

207

VII

Education in the Future

The Book of Life

Life speaks a language
Through its myriad forms.
A firefly

Joyful in the summer dusk,
A hieroglyph of life.

A rabbit

Listening in a daisy field,
The word made flesh.

My fellow man,

A lyric of the Lord.

The book of life ws open
To be read.

Iam a child in kindergarten

Learning words.

aE eae

eer

Ritual and Consciousness and
Their Effect on Education

September, 1960
Night Class
Recalled by Viola Petitt Neal

Correct ritual is the educational method of the future.
Defining ritual in its broadest sense:

Ritual ts an ordinary sequence of words, movements or acts
performed in right and correct order in order to invoke
and direct energies (physical, etheric, astral, mental, and
spiritual) toward definitely-intended purpose.

For example, in modern advertising, the purpose of a
ritual mantram with an accompanying picture on televi-
sion such as “Winston tastes good like a cigarette should,”
is to get people to buy this type of cigarette. Many of these
in modern advertising get results, but are hit or miss.

There is a science of ritual by which the desired results
can be accomplished. The religions of the world know
something of this science. The armed forces of the world
use the principle rather effectively. The secret societies —
Masons—have bound their members most effectively to
purposed activity through the use of ritual. However, the
secret of ritual has never been known to mankind on this
planet. The fact is a certain simple procedure performed

211

212 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

in correct order could change a civilization almost over-
night; on the other hand, wrongly used, could be very
destructive. In a sense, ritual is drama; the drama of the
solar system; the drama of the life process; the drama of
the dance of Shiva. We might here further define ritual
as man repeating God's processes—in symbolical action.
Ritual implies symbolic forms—symbolic words or man-
trams—and symbolic acts. The mass of the Catholic
Church can be observed as an example of this. For at least
fifteen minutes to six hours after attending the mass, the
individual has a raised or expanded state of consciousness.

The ritual dance performed in correct order as some of
the ritual dances of India, Java—religious dances—can put
both the audience and dancer in resonance with tremen-
dous spiritual energies for a short time. The dancer can
become “divinely possessed” by spiritual energies he or she
is interpreting. What must be emphasized is the exact and
precise ritual which can make an individual or a group
resonate to an exact and precise energy and force, pro-
ducing calculated and purposed results in consciousness
and subsequently in behavior. Rightly used, such ritual in
no way interferes with free will but promotes the nor-
mal process of growth as sunlight promotes the normal
growth of the plant. On the other hand, there are rituals
which invoke the forces of evil and produce destructive
resonances in individuals and groups. Some of these rituals
are known and are being used in the world today. It was
such ritual discovered and widely used which brought
about the destruction of Atlantis.

Remember, humanity on this planet can resonate to the
widest range of frequencies of any humanity in this solar
system. The time has come when the disciples of the White
Lodge and its initiates and adepts are being prepared to
put out in to the human kingdom rituals of the White

ee

EDUCATION IN THE FUTURE 213

Lodge to which humanity can and will resonate, thus pro-
ducing constructive growth in consciousness very quickly.
This ritual must and will emerge in the center and in the
midst of countries and civilizations today —like the bloom-
ing of flowers of light that have been hidden and unnoticed
buds. These rituals can change the resonance of humani-
ty from the material aspects of life to the consciousness or
Soul aspect.

Here and there tentative approaches to this use of ritual
have been made. The Biometric program is one of these
tentative approaches with a simple but very useful ritual
for an adjustment in the astral body. The three symbolic
forms bring in the energy of the three rays for achieving
a certain type of adjustment. This is given in passing as
an illustration.

As you can observe, the growth of plants, types of marine
life, follow certain logarithmic spirals and mathematical
proportions such as the golden section (golden rectangle)
and all rituals have a mathematical foundation. Har-
monious sounds have a mathematical foundation. Mathe-
matics is the basis of sound and creation proceeds from
orderly mathematical relationships to the sounds that
arrange all matter, all substance in orderly pattern. We
might say in overall concept, mathematics is the archetype
and the creative universe is the manifestation of that ar-
chetype. Mathematics is the purest expression of relation-
ships, and creation of a manifested universe is a series of
orderly relationships. In the human kingdom the scientist
is simply discovering these relationships.

To come back again to the ritual, there is a basic princi-
ple involved. If, and as, man follows through in his rituals
on the pattern of the creative process, he will tune in to
the energies of the universe or resonate to them because
he is working in the same mathematical pattern as the

214 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

energies. For example, in the field of education, to pour
facts into the child’s mind is not truly education at all.
Education must successively by ritual processes put the
child in resonance with the energies of the world of ideas.
In this way his consciousness is /ed out into the recogni-
tion of new relationships, which is true growth in con-
sciousness. The education of the world today gives him
dissociated groups of facts and it is almost by accident or
chance that he truly sees relationships.

In the field of religion true access to Spiritual energies
can be achieved through right rituals, and in the future
these rituals will be graded series like classes in a school,
designed for each state of consciousness. Such rituals can
promote an orderly growth into the next succeeding state
of consciousness.

Specific rituals will be given to accomplish certain types
of resonance. These could be used first with smaller groups
and later with much larger groups of people.

The Purpose and Future Methods
of Education

March 5, 1961
Night Class
Recalled by Viola Petitt Neal

The teacher said that we had been totally confused
about the real purpose of education in the human
kingdom. We have thought it was a case of cramming a
child’s mind with facts. Other people have had the con-
cept that education was a leading out of the mind, which
is not too bad a definition. But, as we come into a period
of greater understanding we will have a new concept of
what the purpose of education is,

First of all, the real purpose of education is the align-
ment of the bodies, especially the emotional and mental
bodies and an integration of the personality unit. When
we come to an understanding in the human kingdom that
this is what we want to achieve in education, well-
integrated personality units so that the individual is able
to register the impact of the Soul, we will have a true
definition of education.

Some people are at the level where primarily the astral
body needs to be adjusted, integrated, aligned. Others
need to concentrate, primarily, on integrating and align-
ing the mental body and, ultimately on the synthesis and

215

216 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

integration of the total personality unit, which should be
the object of education,

The second purpose is to assist the individual in the
ability to see relationships and, in this regard, certain prin-
ciples could be taught. First of all, the great and outstand-
ing principle of analogy which was first given in the
Hermetic teaching in ancient Egypt —the principle of as
above, so below, the lesser is made in the image of the
greater and the greater in the image of the lesser. But ac-
tually man is a self-conscious individual seeking to discover
new relationships in his world and in the universe. He
should be taught to think of himself in this way.

Thirdly, to train the individual to recognize the sequence
of cause and effect on every plane. This is very simple on
the physical plane. The laws of physics and mathematics
can be pointed out with this understanding on the phys-
ical plane level. On the emotional and the mental plane
we are beginning to approach this concept with our very,
you might say, elementary approach to psychosomatic
medicine. But there are many other aspects of the law of
cause and effect on the emotional and the mental level.

So, the educational concept at which we start is: man
is an immortal self-conscious individual seeking to perfect
his vehicles of expression—physical, etheric, astral and
mental; seeking to become more aware of relationships
in the world in which he lives and on all the levels: and
intelligently aware of the law of cause and effect on every
plane of life. Schools of the future will be dedicated to this
concept of education.

The method will not be so much the cramming of a
child’s mind, or an adult’s mind, with facts, as it will be
a method of pointing out relationships, and the mechanics
or technique of this method of education is one that is best
described by the word ritual using it in its broadest sense.

f
a

EDUCATION IN THE FUTURE 217

There are certain rituals that will impose upon the per-
sonality unit — physical, etheric body, astral body, or the
mental body —right rhythms and frequencies; or we might
say harmonious rhythms and frequencies.

The Masonic ritual is one of these key rituals. The
teacher hastened to explain that most of the people who
are in the Masonic order today do not really understand
the meaning of ritual, are not able to profit by it and, in
fact, often take it very lightly. But in the inner Masonic
order there are preserved certain ritual procedures —con-
cepts and movements within the lodge and the use of
geometrical form that could be very valuable in an educa-
tional method. At least, it is an example of this.

Of course, he went on to say that there are both con-
structive and destructive people in the Masonic order and

_ this has always been true. The French Revolution was

largely the result of certain procedures within some of the
Masonic groups and orders, because they used the secrecy
of the society as a cloak under which to produce revolu-
tion and sedition. But this in no way invalidates the value
of the ritual or method, nor is it in any way a criticism
of those constructive people who have been in the order
and still are in the Masonic order.

He said that the fact that the square and the compass
are the symbols of Masonry is very interesting. In its an-
cient and esoteric origin the Masonic order had to do with
the building up of the personality unit.

At this point, I will go back a little bit in the lecture
of last night to explain that the two symbols of Masonry,
the compass and the square, are two of the basic mathe-
matical symbols. It was said that with the compass and
the square the builder could build the universe. Those two
basic concepts, the compass and the square, give us unity
and duality. So, we move from unity to duality to the trin-

218 ‘THROUGH THE CURTAIN

ity of manifestation. The white and black pillars in the
Masonic order symbolize the two opposite polarities, the
positive and negative—light and darkness.

It is possible to study the Masonic ritual and find a
number of interesting principles and relationships, And
to do this, disassociating myself from any feeling of ap-
proving or disapproving, the present Masonic order has
unconsciously preserved a very ancient ritual which means
very little to the average individual in the order. Never-
theless, it is something that should not be lost, in the same
way that a great many of the esoteric principles were
preserved in the Tarot cards only to eventually become
playing cards for games.

He said that the building to be built was the personal-
ity vehicle through which the Soul or Life would express.
This is the real symbolism. Both the Catholic Church and
the Masonic Order took their ritual procedures from the
very ancient lodge of the Master Jupiter, one of the very
ancient esoteric lodges. Certain things used in the Catholic
Mass have a very definite effect on the astral body and to
some degree on the mental body.

He said that the personality units— physical, etheric,
astral and mental bodies — are mathematical patterns. The
use of certain geometrical forms, both in actual physical
movements and in concentration on these forms, has a
definite effect on these energy patterns. This is a principle
we will become more familiar with as we go on. There will
be certain orderly, rhythmically, harmonious procedures
in the school of the future that will produce certain effects
upon these different bodies. Remember again, that the
purpose of education is the perfecting of the vehicles
through which the Soul or Immortal Self expresses.

He said that there had always been an interest in a school
or college that would produce the greatest amount of ex-
pansion of consciousness in the least time with a har-

EDUCATION IN THE FUTURE 219

monious development that would be in no way one-sided
or disturbing to the individual. Such a system of educa-
tion could be achieved through the use of certain ritual
procedures, through the use of certain geometrical forms,
sound and color. In the future we would decide what
school a person was in, rather than what grade he was in.
What school he was in would be a matter of whether he
had a problem in the astral or mental bodies that needed
solving and adjusting. The grades in school would be our
grades and stages in evolution in consciousness.

With the eighty percent of people who are not yet do-
ing much to develop the mental body, the primary study
would be in the law of cause and effect, especially in the
physical and the emotional worlds. This is basic and is the
only principle upon which any morality or ethics can be
built that is stable and lasting.

For those people who are in the upper twenty percent,
it is very important to teach them to see relationships
because they have the mental equipment with which to
do this. Usually, they will be working on the mental level,
although if there is some lack in the astral vehicle of sta-
bility or alignment, there will also be classes for this.

People would get a lot of facts in their process of educa-
tion, but the emphasis would not be on them. However,
the value, the meaning and the relationship of the facts,
would be emphasized. Incidentally, we will get the facts
that we need without too much difficulty. There could be
a graded order, ritual, and the use of mathematical or
geometrical form to affect the patterns in the mental, as-
tral and physical etheric bodies. Sound and color will be
used as well as music and color.

Primarily, the lecture seems to be important because
of the new approach to the purpose of education. As an
illustration of the use of geometrical form, he said that the
Biometric use of the circle, the cross and the triangle is

220 ‘THROUGH THE CURTAIN

an example of a formula for making an adjustment in the
astral body of the individual. This is just one little thread
of the principle of using the geometrical form. Primarily,
it adjusts the energy level in the astral body as well as bring-
ing about a better alignment in the astral body and its
centers. There are other specific formulas that will achieve
other types of things. But in the future we will be able to
use these.

Our educational system will be something totally dif-
ferent from what we now conceive of as education. Our
present concept is very superficial. It is primarily aimed
at equipping the individual to fight the economic battle
in the world. Most parents think of education in those
terms. A child must be educated so that he can make more
money and get a better job; generally, fight the economic
battle and struggle for economic goods and establish some
prestige in his society.

He said that the new form of education will establish,
of course, a different kind of society automatically. This
could start with one school using these principles. It does
not have to be a whole system imposed upon a whole coun-
try or any one country at one time. It can begin with just
one school that uses such a method.

He mentioned some of the educational principles of
Steiner as being an approach to this type of outlook, and
some of the methods he used. Rhythmics for the physical
body are very good, and were inspired from this level of
concepts in which we were in contact in our discussion.

I asked him about Professor Aitken of Edinburgh
University who has such a tremendous memory -- incredible
beyond any ordinary human ability — and who also has the
ability to instantly tune in upon the answer to the square
root of some long number and give the answer more quick-
ly than he could by using a calculator. He said that this
type of ability would be discussed in future lectures. He

EDUCATION IN THE FUTURE 221

and two members of the Aitken family (I think this was
what was said) came into incarnation in the same family
in order to give each other moral support. These three peo-
ple developed a very amazing alignment of a type that
would be discussed in another one of the night classes.
Otherwise, they would have found it a little lonely and
disturbing to be totally alone in such a capacity and ability.

He said this had nothing to do with heredity. That he-
redity was a concept we had for the lack of anything bet-
ter. You do not inherit anything from your parents. You
came to certain parents because they had the combina-
tion of genes and physical characteristics to give you the
kind of vehicle which karmically you were entitled to or
deserved to have. These three brothers did not inherit any-
thing from their parents. The kind of physical bodies they
had were the physical bodies which they could achieve
through these parents. He said it was just like going out
to buy something. You find what firm has the quality pro-
duct you want and you go and buy it from them. So, you
go and look for the parents who have the quality product
you can afford to buy from the point of view of the physical
etheric vehicle you are going to get.

He said that the child gets his physical body from his
mother, and during the time that his body is being built
he is getting most of his etheric vehicle from his father.
It doesn’t matter if the father is present or close by or not,
he can be on the other side of the world and the child is
still getting the early building blocks of his etheric vehicle
from the father and the physical from the mother.

The three individuals in Professor Aitken’s family, came
into a family where they could get the type of physical
vehicles that were suited to the ability they had. They came
in together in order to have some moral support and, also,
to see how useful their particular development of facilities
could be to the society of their time and age. There were

222 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

other aspects that they had not developed. It was a one-
sided development, but one which they would need to
develop and that this particular type of alignment which
produced this particular type of special ability would be
discussed in future lectures.

The teacher suggested that I look up my books on magic
squares and on other mathematical concepts and, also, the
books I have on Masonry and I would discover relation-
ships I hadn’t seen before. He said that the magic squares
had concealed in them some of the secrets of this method.
Other types of mathematical games, you might call them,
also had certain ideas that were valuable. This whole con-
cept had to do with mathematical or geometrical form.
He mentioned thePlatonic sol solidsyand he said it was quite
true that Tesla achieved a lot of his concepts by observ-
ing thesefive Platonic solids thinking about them. They
had an ability to stimulate the mind to see relationships
and in the future such forms as these would be used. He
said that the ancients were correct when they put such an
emphasis on the study of mathematics and by that he
especially referred to geometrical form and pattern as well
as to numbers.

Pythagoras said that he who understood the meaning
of the 3-4-5 right triangle —the square of the hypotenuse
is equal to the sum of the squares of the other two sides —
would understand the secret of the universe. He said this
3-4-5 right triangle did have a very important principle
and we were to think about it.

The three of us in this class were interested in educa-
tion. Especially an education that would produce an or-
derly development, instead of a haphazard development
of the human personality.

———

Vill

Planetary Types

Halls of the Sun

I walked in a body of light

Through the halls of the sun

And stood on its parapets

Facing the blue night of space.

The planets that wheel in obedience
Sang as they moved.

And the songs of the planets were music
That molded the forms

Of all things that have been,

That are and shall be,

In the realm of the sun.

Creation was music and song

And the splendor of light

As we moved on a star-spangled path
At the galaxy’s rim.

_ Planetary Types and Their
Psychological Patterns

The term “individualization” is used in the ancient
wisdom teaching to indicate the time when animal man
became human man. At that moment self-consciousness
was born. It is believed that not all of our present earth
humanity attained this stage of evolution on the planet
earth. The teaching states that some of present earth hu-
manity had individualized on other planetary schemes.
For example, it is said that the Lord Buddha had come
from the “moon chain” evolution—and that the ensoul-
ing Life of our planet came from the Venusian scheme.
Others might have come from the Martian scheme, or the
Mercurian scheme. Some of those souls incarnated in a
physical body on the planet earth millions of years ago,
yet retained some of the characteristics of the scheme on
which they had individualized. This section may explain
the various basic characteristics found among our earth
humanity. They may become our future psychological
types.

The sections were left as they were given at various dates
of the night classes. (Editor’s Note—S.K.)

225

226 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

January 3, 1962
Night Class
Recalled by Viola Petitt Neal

The Eighth Sphere is begotten of two parents: The Life
of Substance (Father) and Substance itself (Mother). There
is no spirit aspect as such. This life of substance is a black
light. The progeny of this union are the misbegotten
demons of darkness, the Soulless spawn of evil because
there is no spirit aspect. It is a hopeless sphere.

The Eighth Sphere had its origin on Pluto. Its creators
are powerful and integrated human beings denying spirit
and integrated at the matter polarity. The ultimate end
of this sphere is annihilation because it endures for a time
along with its creators. It is an evil center of power.

Denizens of this sphere are on the planet earth with some
of the creators of this evil. These demoniac beings are to-
tally evil whereas their creators can never be totally evil.
These demoniac beings are a temporary creation. They
do the work of their creators in demoralizing and corrupt-
ing and terrifying mankind. These soulless beings will be
more visible to mankind in the time ahead when the forces
of evil will come into full manifestation with the appear-
ance of the antichrist. These are some of the terrors men-
tioned in the Book of Revelation. Today these demoniac
beings are like anchor points for a great network of evil
on the planet. Once and for all mankind, especially earth
humanity, will truly experience what evil is and choose.
New Guinea is a focal center for the Eighth Sphere.

The sign of the cross is a great protection against the
demoniac beings for it is a cosmic symbol of the divine
marriage of spirit and matter. Before the symbol of the
cross the demons flee, for they have no part in the divine
creation. The symbol should be used thus: Throat, right

a ate a

PLANETARY TYPES 227

shoulder, left shoulder, heart. Ajna, right eye, left eye,
throat.

Jupiterians are conscious on many levels, aware of the
psychic world around them. They are mediums in a sense.
They are conscious mediums. They are able to see the
elemental life on planet earth and may be considered as
scouts. They are fuzzy because they see too much. They
can seesthe Deiros—the elemental life and how they feel.

Jupiterians practically always use the etheric body as the
vehicle of experience. Ordinary psychics use the astral body
as the vehicle. They are slow to learn, but when they come
to earth they learn quickly and also learn about evil.
Jupiterians incarnated on the planet earth are more eas-
ily contacted by so-called “saucer people.” Jupiterians are
receptive to the Soul or Buddhic plane, to physical etheric
and by-passing other bodies; thus they are not precise.

Martians who have been to Pluto develop the ability to
sense or “smell” the Plutonians. Smell is discrimination
on the spiritual level. Mars is the lower octave of Pluto,
because they pursue scientific knowledge and truth—the
material world. They are militant defenders of truth. War-
riors. They carry the banner of truth into the far frontiers
of the solar system.

Mercurzans are observers on the planet. They collect
knowledge and can be good teachers. Mercury has a
Fourth Ray energy which is Buddhic, intuitional and ex-
pressive of the Christ, as Mercury and Sun are One.

Neptunzans are vague—fuzzy in their thinking, not
aware of the evil forces; aware of the mental plane and
other planes, They have instant clear knowing from the
mental plane.

228 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

March 17, 1962
Night Class
Recalled by Viola Petitt Neal

Neptunians have a connection from the Buddhic to the
astral plane fairly-well established. They have a tendency
to bypass the mental body. They have a capacity for zn-
stant clear knowing in a situation as to what to do or say.
They often say things that are correct without really know-
ing what these things mean in terms of clear mental
analysis. They have the capacity to inspire people with the
energy of certain ideas without giving them the mental tool
with which to work. They could carry the energy of cer-
tain ideas and use it to stimulate others who have the men-
tal equipment to earth the ideas.

If they develop the mental body, they will have more
access to the use or earthing of their ideas. Classes for Nep-
tunians would encourage this Buddhic-astral contact, but
also develop the mental body more. They tend to have a
mystical quality, an intellectual vagueness that is ex-
asperating to the more trained mind. Because of their
Buddhic-astral channel, they have a spiritual quality that
is attractive—a type of magnetic attraction. They have
some of the joy of the Soul coming through to the per-
sonality and do give out energy to other people. They have
an energy coming through which gives them vitality. They
usually recover quickly from an illness. The mechanism
of their quick healing is Soul or Buddhic energy coming
through since the astral body in present humanity of any
planetary type is ninety-five per cent of the cause of illness
in the dense physical body via the etheric. This Soul energy
very quickly establishes harmony in the astral body and
consequently in the etheric and dense physical bodies.

Eartheans are responding to mental stimuli in a speeded-
up manner. There is a waking up to the mental plane.

PLANETARY TYPES 229

Earth humanity is basically sound and with its present in-
tellectual response the time has come for the opening of
esoteric schools that would have at least four departments:
basic true teaching about God and the Universe, evolu-
tion, reincarnation, and karma; esoteric mathematics,
numbers and geometry in their true sense and science;
thoughtform building and manifestation; and a new ap-
proach to art, drama, and sculpture. Earth humanity is
reaching a state of need where it would flock to these
schools.

Colleges of Healing would be associated with these
esoteric schools, training people with special gifts. There
will be graded series of instructions at different stages of
development. The above applies to other planetary types
also.

Jupiterians have a somewhat different type of etheric
body, which expands a little farther beyond the periphery
of the dense physical. The etheric body is more of an in-
strument than in other planetry types. It serves as an instru-
ment for contact with the whole etheric world around them
and to some degree with Monadic energy to the etheric
body.

Usually they do not have a too-well developed mental
body. They do not use the astral body as most people do.
They are constantly sensing with their etheric body —the
condition of things, especially the forces of nature. They
are good earthquake barometers if they only knew it.

March 22, 1962
Night Class
Recalled by Viola Petitt Neal

Jupiterians do not use the mental body as much as some.
They tune in and have etheric instinctive awareness which
helps them to deal with the world. They tune in in this

230 "THROUGH THE CURTAIN

way on human society and make right moves for their
material welfare. In investment, they do not reason it out
but sense it on the etheric level and act. They often have
a rigid mental outlook because they don’t think much.
They are not possessive or materialistic, but have a feel-
ing that the abundance of life belongs to them. Depend-
ing upon how evolved, this may be just on a pleasant
material level, or it may have a more spiritual implica-
tion. They give out a lot of etheric energy to people around
them.

Neptunzans are devoted to the goals of the human race,
ideals and people who seem to be the embodiment of those
ideals; devoted to creative activities. Their focus is more
on the ideal activity and creativity for themselves and
humanity than on the value of humanity itself. Their at-
titude is devotion rather than love. Humanity is impor-
tant because it is an instrument to produce the idea, and
people are incidental to creativity.

The Three Aspects of Trinity

The Martian has love of truth— First Ray.
The Venusian has love of humanity—Second Ray.
The Neptunian, love of creativity—Third Ray.

The Plutonian Control of
. Earth Humanity

June 10, 1962
Night Class
Recalled by Viola Petitt Neal

Present in a large auditorium were members of the Fifth
Kingdom and disciples of the Human Kingdom. This was
a convocation abstract from the lecture recalled.

The speaker seemed to be a being of great authority —
one of the Council of the Seven from Shamballa.

The Planet Pluto, the invader planet, eighth sphere,
within our solar system, constitutes an integrated and hard
core of evil. The invader planet chose the planet earth to
take over because the humanity on this planet is at a great
point of crisis in its evolution. Therefore, the planet earth
is the most vulnerable planet in the solar system.

The Planet Pluto has a deification of matter or substance
which is the pull-back on evolution. This deification of
matter anywhere in the universe in some small degree holds
the great creative process, which is the interplay of spirit
and matter as creative forces and sets up a small abortive
kingdom by using substance and the dark light of substance
as the creative polarities producing a cancer in a solar
system or a universe.

231

232 ‘THROUGH THE CURTAIN

The planet Pluto was thrown off from another solar
system and moved into orbit around our sun. It seeks
conquest of the planet earth to extend the kingdom of
darkness. The Plutonian forces are Herod, the King, seek-
ing the Chrest Child to destroy him. This is the basic prob-
lem with the planet earth.

The means of control of earth humanity by Plutonians
are: communication, including radio, television and the
press; education of children; governments of the world;
money of the world.

The Plutonians do not want earth humanity to get into
space. Since they follow expediency in any situation and
go along with what they cannot prevent until they find a
way to use it for their own advantage, they go along with
the space program because it is a way, in their thinking,
to bankrupt people and government with taxation.

Because the planet earth is important in the whole solar
system and because its Planetary Logos comes from the
planet Venus, at this time special assistance will be given
from the planets Venus and Mars. Unfortunately, it is
necessary for the humanity of earth to be more uncom-
fortable and distressed than they are now, in order for
them to get their eyes open to what evil does to them and
therefore enlist their own free choice, their desire for good
ple who do not know they are vemlaxed.. _

The forces of evil do not have the wealth of the planet
earth, but they have set up a control of the wealth through
money. As soon as the people of the planet really know
their predicament and ask for help, the frequencies for
cleansing will be directed on the planet. Those who are
too materialistic will go out of incarnation and not again
be incarnated on this planet.

Earth humanity will at first be bewildered with no effi-
cient Pluto to manipulate its wealth (wealth means food,

PLANETARY TYPES 233

clothing, shelter, etc.). A Government of the Planetary
Hierarchy will be set up with the Christ in outer physical
manifestation as its Head, until several generations of
humanity have been educated and human disciples and
initiates prepared to direct and govern the humanity of
this planet.

Apparently there was an intermission and the second
lecture was given by another member of the Hierarchy,
probably the Manu, but it is not certain.

August 26, 1962
Night Class
Recalled by Viola Petitt Neal

The following is a summary of what VPN was able to
remember of the lecture on the motivation of planetary
types. This was from a First Ray Ashram.

The upper twenty percent of the intellectual range of
humanity is composed of the following percentages:

Plutonians..... 6%
Martians...... 4%
Venusians..... 4%,
Mercurians.... 2%
Earthians...... pas
Jupiterians..... 1%
Neptunians.... 1%

The lower eighty percent are mostly earth humanity.

It is important to understand the motivation of the dif-
ferent groups.

Plutonians came to the planet earth to invade and ex-
ploit and take over. Scattered throughout all ranges is the
“X” group of the previous Third Ray solar system, rem-
nants who did not achieve the expected development and
were given a second chance in the Second Ray solar system,

234 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

Martians came to help earth humanity by the conquest
of nature—scientific advancement, implanting love for
truth and recognition of law and order in the universe.

Venusians are interested in assisting and helping hu-
manity seeking growth in consciousness. They are often
altruistic and love to serve.

Mercurians are the observers and recorders of the solar
system. They are often teachers, historians and collectors
of knowledge. They collect and impart knowledge. They
do not get involved in the turmoil of earth humanity.

Jupiterians tune to the etheric level and have a great
understanding of the forces of nature around them.

Neptunians are the mystical group and endeavor to give
mystical comprehension of God. Some of the Saints dur-
ing the Middle Ages were Neptunians. The better types
of Neptunians tune in, in a vague way, to the Buddhic
plane and register this as feeling at the astral body level.

Other Types. Very few have come from outside our solar
system, strayed in so to speak. And a very few are a
demoniac group.

How and When the Planetary Types
“Came to the Planet Earth

August 27, 1962
Night Class
Recalled by Viola Petitt Neal

At the time when animal man became human man on
the planet earth, over twenty million years ago, Venusians
of high development came in to help start earth human-
ity in its development. The number of Venusians who came
with Sanat Kumara were few.

During the Atlantean period of the third sub-race,
Venusians and Martians incarnated on the planet earth.
Some actually came in physical form by space ships to help
earth humanity. During the fourth swb-race, Neptunians,
Jupiterians and Mercurians incarnated on the planet earth.
During the fifth sub-race, Plutonians came en masse and
invaded the planet earth. Some came in space ships from
Pluto. During the sixth sub-race, the Martians and Venu-
sians who had come during the third sub-race had pre-
sented to earth humanity a very highly cultured civiliza-
tion. It was felt that by giving earth humanity the gift of
a type of civilization they would be inspired to make the
effort to evolve themselves to the point where they could
produce such a civilization themselves. (These were refer-
red to in the lecture as the gifts of the fairy godmother

235
236 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

in folklore.) This would have worked out had it not been
for the coming of the invaders from Pluto.

The Plutonians used a frequency band which affected
the physical brains and astral bodies of earth humanity
in such a way as to inhibit and delay their growth and
development. We may call it the first great “brain-
washing.” Brainwashing is exclusively a Plutonian inven-
tion. It is often spoken of in the fairytales of the world as
the “evil jinn” who comes at the christening of a child. For
example, in the Sleeping Beauty story the princess pricks
her finger with a needle and falls asleep for centuries. ‘The
fairy tales and folklore of the world tell the whole story
of humanity over and over again.

The frequencies used by the Plutonians had little or no
effect on Martians and Venusians, and very little effect on
the other three groups. But earth humanity has been be-
wildered and confused and has been in the wilderness ever
since. The time is close at hand when, as in the fairy tales,
the “spell will be lifted.” The Plutonians use a first ray
energy and the antidote is first ray energy wielded by the
Christ of this planet. Earth humanity will begin to make
up for its long sleep in matter. Venusians and Martians
will give knowledge and assistance which can be quickly
received and assimilated by earth humanity.

(Other parts of this lecture cannot be recalled at this
point.)

Plutonians, instead of achieving individual soul devel-
opment and individual immortal self-consciousness, de-
veloped a very strong, powerful race group soul on the con-
crete mental plane. Each individual is like a finger of
this monster race group soul, which because of its very
nature, is very powerful, integrated, one-pointed and one-
purposed for long ages of time; to all intents and purposes
it is immortal. This is why the highly intelligent Plutonians
have a feeling of being invincible and immortal, an at-
titude which impresses and awes ordinary earth humanity.

PLANETARY TYPES 237

The “X” Group of the Third Ray Solar System are
despised and expendable tools of the Plutonians. They con-
sider earth humanity sturdier stock and more useful slaves.

The caudate nucleus in the brain of earth humanity was
inhibited in its growth and function by the frequencies the
Plutonians used. This had a direct connection with the
thymus gland which has a direct relationship with the heart
center. So both the intellectual development of man and
his love aspect were inhibited. Therefore, both the caudate
nucleus and the thymus, which have a direct connection
together, were inhibited. Humanity will begin to use the
ability latent in the caudate nucleus. This development will
bring energy into the heart center of humanity to bring
about the development of wisdom and compassion along
with a telepathic ability to contact the world of knowledge.

. The caudate nucleus is a latent radar system which will
' make possible very amazing direct contact with knowledge
~ and the environment of man.

The band of frequency which was directed by the Pluto-
nians to humanity at the time of the Fifth Subrace of
Atlantis inhibited this development in earth humanity and
largely directed their motivation toward the material things
and sex. It did not have this effect on the Martian and
Venusian groups as far as motivation and direction goes,
but it has prevented their use of the caudate and thymus
because there was no response from earth humanity.

Today Venusians and Martians are under a strenuous
impact of energies to prepare them also for a change on
the planet and in the development of earth humanity.
Those members of the human kingdom who remain in in-
carnation after the upheaval incidental to the removing
of the Plutonians will very quickly begin to develop those
faculties Jatent in and symbolized by the caudate nucleus
and thymus. This is really a polarity established between
the heart and top head center, The Plutonian polarity is
between the base of the spine and the alta major center.
238 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

The Venusian, Martian, Neptunian, Jupiterian and Mer-
curian groups will even more quickly begin to function
through these two centers: the top head center and the
heart center. In that case, it will also be a matter of the
use of the top head center and the heart center in the brain
which are located in the region of the thalamus.

In passing, the pineal gland is the activator of the
caudate nucleus, but this function has been latent and
dormant.

There were other parts of this lecture which could not
be recalled.

Psychology of the Future

November 16, 1963
Night Class of SK
Obtained by Viola Petitt Neal

The psychology of the future will deal and be based on
the following three aspects: planetary type, motivation and
evolution in consciousness.

The planetary types determine the overall direction and
the line of endeavor of the individual. It might be called
“a point of orientation toward evolving consciousness.” In
our present period there are present some of the follow-
ing planetary types: Egos from the Third Ray solar system
belong to our present Third Ray solar system and should
be differentiated from a previous Third Ray solar system
which existed before our present universe.

In the present Third Ray solar system there is the evolu-
tion of the Intelligent Activity aspect, especially in regard
to the mental substance. By contrast the previous Third
Ray solar system developed the physical etheric and astral
substances; thus the desire and the sentient aspects are
prominent in our present solar system, There are at pre-
sent over one thousand on our planet earth who are from
outside our solar system and who belong to the Third Ray
solar system.

(The night previous to the lecture, “D,” a member of
the First Ray Ashram, indicated that the Third Ray solar

239

240 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

system developed the mind aspect and formed the ajna
center of the Great Being of Whom Naught May Be Said,
just as our solar system is the heart center of that Great
Being.)

Individuals from the Fourth Ray solar system are con-
stantly developing the ability to balance the polar op-
posites. With every equilibrium further equilibriums have
to be established because there is a constant new inflow
of energy. They have a high development of the arts
because all creation takes place because of the interplay
of polar opposites. Therefore, in a solar system where this
interplay of polar opposites is the chief emphasis, as it is
in the Fourth Ray solar system, there is great creativity
and true art is a creative process. There are around one
hundred of these persons at the present time on our planet
earth. They are attracted because we have a great deal
of Fourth Ray activity on this planet.

There are about five hundred individuals on our planet
from the Seventh Ray solar system. More will be incar-
nating as the Seventh Ray energies flow in. They will have
exceptional organizational abilities.

Second Ray solar system (our own): there are two planets
which are the polar opposites— Vulcan and Pluto—both
of these First and Seventh Ray frequencies. Vulcan has
achieved a balance between the top head center and the
base of the spine center. It is a Will Ray humanity, func-
tioning in etheric bodies, but able at will to control the
substance of the three worlds—that is etheric, astral and
mental on this planet earth. They are an extremely vital
humanity and their frequency is not too easy to take on
our planet earth.

Our Second Ray solar system holds a unique place
because it is the place of birth of the Cosmic Christ or Con-
/ sciousness and is the heart center of the seven solar systems
which form the body of that Great Being of Whom Naught
May Be Said.

PLANETARY TYPES 241

Motivation involves a line of development through many
incarnations of the individual, of his attitude toward the
human kingdom and responsibility to it, of his understand-
ing of the great process of the universe — the plan and pur-
pose on this planet, specifically, and his relatedness to it.
Motivation deals with the relatedness to plan and purpose,
and man as an individual with his own free will accepts
this relatedness and responds to it.

Evolution in consciousness may be defined as that level
of “idea frequencies” to which the individual can respond.
He can, therefore, be put in an educational grade where
ideas in the frequency band to which he can respond can
be presented to him.
Thoughtforms of Planetary Types

June 12, 1964
Night Class
Recalled by Viola Petitt Neal

This class was a discussion on thoughtforms in the
department of the Seventh Ray Ashram: the power of
thoughtforms, and the projection of thoughtforms into the
outer world of manifestation. Why some thoughtforms pro-
duce manifested results and others do not. The instructor
began by saying that when the planet was invaded by the
Plutonians in the Atlantean period certain things hap-
pened. This Plutonian invasion was both by a type of
spaceship and by simply incarnating in this human life
wave on the planet. Since the Plutonzan humanity is
governed by and resonates to a group soul there is less con-
flict in the Plutonian personality, but also very little under-
standing of spiritual truth or reality, The Plutonians are
geared to the frequencies of matter or substance and do
not really understand love-wisdom or Spiritual aspiration
as a humanity. The Plutonian is basically first and seventh
ray, using the concrete mind as the vehicle of expression.

At this point the instructor went into a discussion of
thoughtform technique on the part of the different plane-
tary types in our life wave on this planet.

The Plutonian is very alert and focused, always seeking
power; first, over other human beings and also over form.

242

PLANETARY TYPES 243

Because of the dynamic quality of the first ray and the
organizing ability of the seventh ray they have achieved
control in high levels of practically all human institutions.
Their thoughtforms are clearcut, well organized and fo-
cused, energized by will energy.

At this point the instructor showed the class a moving
picture projected from a well-focused projector and said,
“This illustrates the clearness of the Plutonian thought-
form.”

He pointed out that earth humanity is characterized to
a large degree by the fourth ray of harmony through con-
flict. The thoughtforms of earth humanity are vague,
fuzzy, changing. Earth humanity can be swayed to change
its point of view over and over again. Then he showed us
a vague, fuzzy pattern on a screen which changed with dif-
ferent impacts of energy that hit it.

The instructor explained that the Venuszan type has
beautiful patterns of an end result — people living in har-
mony, a state of goodwill, idealistic forms of government —
these are fairly clear pictures, but they fail to have a clear
picture of how to bring this about. Definite, detailed plans
and definite, detailed thoughtforms are all too often lack-
ing. Usually the Venusian is not aware of the organized,
dynamic power for materialism which he is up against with
the Plutonian. This is almost incomprehensible to him. He
also has a respect for the free will of man and does not
feel it right to overly influence or coerce humanity.

The Plutonian has not the slightest qualm about over-
influencing and coercing humanity.

The Martian type is in search of truth. He knows that
truth is important to humanity, but he has been very lit-
tle concerned with the application of truth in human so-
ciety. He builds clear thoughtforms energized by the will
ray with regard to his own search for truth, but this does
not affect human institutions and society directly. Others

244 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

pick up the truth and apply it. All too often this is the
Plutonian.

The Jupzterzan believes in God's abundance; that he lives
in a universe that could and should abundantly supply all
his needs, He can get pulled into a materialistic interpre-
tation of this concept, especially if he comes under the in-
fluence, as he does, of Plutonian institutions and in-
dividuals. Occasionally the more evolved Jupiterian will
have a clearcut thoughtform regarding some undertaking
for the welfare of mankind, and carry through on it.
However, on the whole, the Jupiterian group as such sees
the end result of abundance without being clear about the
means to that abundance.

The Neptunzans are idealistic and devoted to beautiful
ideals, but their thoughtforms are vague and nebulous and
appear in the mental realms more as lovely clouds of color,
energized by sixth ray energy. They do have an effect on
the astral bodies of humanity in a general and helpful way.

The Mercurzan is the collector of knowledge, the
teacher, the recorder, the historian. In this case, by teacher
we mean the hundreds of teachers who teach in schools
and educate the children in that knowledge which is the
heritage of man’s experience. We are not referring to the
great spiritual teachers. He has clearcut thoughtforms that
have to do with imparting knowledge, and with educa-
tional procedures. He often has a tune-in on history and
sees it like a moving picture. He is doing the job he should
be doing in society, but the material offered him for the
educational procedures needs to be different. He is an
observer and does not pass judgment on events or material.

Now to an analysis of the present problem in the human
kingdom. The Plutonian invaders have almost complete
control of the human kingdom. One of their techniques
has been most effective in gaining and holding power over
the human kingdom. They observe and know that most
of humanity is “I” conscious at the astral level. They,

PLANETARY TYPES 245

therefore, constantly and incessantly stimulate the astral
bodies of mankind by desire for things (modern advertis-
ing, for example). They set up standards of status—
value —importance—and constantly stimulate earth
humanity to achieve these graded standards of status and
value. (Make of car you drive, job level, kind of house you

| live in, etc.) They keep humanity so busy measuring up

to these and so harassed by debt in doing so that people

. have no time to analyze, think or aspire to a higher set

of values.

It is interesting that although the Plutonians really have
little interest in sex, and usually are rather cold and cer-
tainly very disciplined, they have thoroughly analyzed
ordinary humanity's susceptibility at the level of both emo-
tional or astral and physical sex. They therefore systema-
tically stimulate humanity with sex motivation, moving into
pornography, perversion and all types of degrading sex im-
pulses when they see that the stimulus of normal sex is ceas-
ing to be effective.

As a period of civilization becomes more decadent, the
Plutonians resort to steeping humanity in brutality. Ex-
amples of this today are modern horror movies, much
display of war horrors in movies and photographs, film-
ing of executions on television, books on violence and
brutality, playing up in the news of crime and violence.
In this way they endeavor to bring the human race to a
place where cruelty, torture, violence and brutality seem
to be the norm.

By the above methods of constantly stimulating the
astral bodies of humanity they exhaust humanity emo-
tionally until the human kingdom becomes docile, weary
and confused from emotional exhaustion, and the mind
is unable to function. This method is a most effective
technique, especially so when most of humanity is “I"’ con-
scious at the emotional level. This method also cripples
the emotional vehicle.

246 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

At this point the teacher illustrated this with the biology
experiment where you stimulate the nerve and muscle of
the frog with an electrical stimulus until the frog no longer
responds due to muscular or nervous fatigue. He said
humanity suffers at this time from emotional fatigue, due
to over-stimulation of the astral body. More and more in-
tense stimulation is applied at such a stage.

A solution for mankind could lie in the teaming up of
a triangle of abilities— Martian, Venusian and earth hu-
manity. This team would be supported by the Neptunian,
Jupiterian and Mercurian groups. It requires that at least
the Venusians and Martians wake up to how the Pluto-
nians work and who and what they are. Earth humanity
will be slower to do this. Up to the present time the Venu-
sians and the Martians have had a mutual friendliness
toward each other as a group and a mutual respect, but
not very much coordinated working together. Together
with the Will Ray and the Love-Wisdom Ray, along with
the concrete mind ability of the Martian, they could build
clearcut and altruistic institutions and organizations, mak-
ing the clearcut thoughtforms that are necessary to bring
them into manifestation.

Here the idealism of the Neptunian could be extremely
valuable, because the Neptunian is a channel for an in-
spired and high level of astral energy. He could channel
this kind of energy to humanity and energize the fatigued
astral bodies of mankind and this would also help to build
more stable astral bodies. The Jupiterian could work with
the concept of abundance, not as materialism and poses-
siveness about material things, but bringing to mankind
the concept of the Son in the Father’s House to whom all

things belong. The Plutonian has fostered in man on this.

planet a fear that he will not have enough and that he must
take and hold what belongs to others or he must have more
than others in order to be important. The Mercurian then
becomes the recorder and teacher of new values.

PLANETARY TYPES 247

Earth humanity will respond to ideals, to a new kind
of value based on spiritual development, and to beauty,
if these are presented, and respond joyfully. At this point
in evolution the other five planetary types could move in-
to a united teamwork for the welfare of the whole human
kingdom on the planet. This will be discussed further in
a future class.

General Observations— Discussion (VPN/SK)

Plutonians are suspicious, ascribe motives to others
which they do not have. They have involved, suspicious
thought processes, a negative outlook, a great desire for
power and domination. They are insecure, and the ma-
jority seek lower, sensual satisfaction.

Neptunians are easy to fool, poor judges of people, ex-
pect fantastic intervention of divine force on their behalf,
expect to accomplish unusual and important things out
of line with their ability or the facts or circumstances. They
are unrealistic about life problems and have a lack of real-
ity about money and finances.

IX

Prevision

The New Age

Why do we sit beside time’s far highway
And weeping clutch the things

That have decayed,

Holding the shabby fragments of the forms
Already broken by the hands of men?

New bottles

For the golden wine of life.

New cites

For the children of the sun.

Mankind reborn to higher consciousness

Shall move with joy into tomorrow's day.

a ge aN,

acim nena ear atte

Symbols in Ancient Egypt

September 15, 1960
Night Class
Recalled by Viola Petitt Neal

The crux ansata, the serpent, the winged circle, the
sphinx, the papyrus, the lotus, are some of the symbols.
There is a series of temples under the sphinx carved into
the rock about 150 feet down. There are papyrus scrolls
there, carefuly preserved. The temples have colonnades
with rooms and there is an underground stream flowing
through. Columns are of a beautiful green stone and
carved, There are even older green stone tablets with
writing on them. These are very ancient. The temple rooms
seem older than the Egyptian period we now know. The
rooms are lined with lovely white alabaster with symbols
and pictures in inlaid stone, lapis lazuli and gold. The
Egyptians painted their walls. This is a center of the
Schools of the Mysteries.

There is a tunnel under the great pyramid. It is a place
for ceremonies of the mysteries—the pyramid. There are
rooms not yet opened. The pyramid was built by the Priests
of Atlantis more than 11,000 years ago. They used a
method of levitation using the mind and astral energy. I
am not told just how it is done.

251
252 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

In one of the rooms of the underground temple which
represents the temple of the human body for the indwell-
ing consciousness there is a caduceus on the wall. It is in-
laid. One serpent of lapis lazuli, one serpent of a pink
stone. The central rod of gold. Five coils as today in the
symbol. The temple rooms are in the shape of the human
body. That is, a group of them. There are others.

The symbol of the serpent is the symbol of the energy
of matter that moves in a spiral or serpentine fashion. It
represents not matter itself—this is the divine mother —
but the life of matter. The life of matter moves to join the
life aspect of mind, then to be joined to Spirit. Its move-
ment through the human body or temple through many
lifetimes is a cosmic ritual. The life of matter is represented
by the serpent. The reptile kingdom is between the bird
and the animal kingdom, the deva and animal group. The
serpent at the forehead is the life of matter ascended into
heaven and represents the initiate who has completed the
ritual of the life of animal man aspect and achieved
illumination —the second divine hermetic marriage — the
marriage of Soul with Spirit or Monad.

These temples can be excavated in due course. There
is an opening left of the sphinx about a hundred feet from
a middle point of the body of the sphinx and 150 feet
down, approximately, a slab and a stairway under the slab.
The sphinx is also Atlantean. It guards a mystery. It is over
the top of this series of temples and rooms of the mysteries.
There are manuscripts here on healing and the secrets of
the human body.

This was a field class.

The Relationship of Light to Gold

January 14, 1961
Night Class
Recalled by Viola Petitt Neal

This was a field trip class. The students felt as though
they were taken to a large cavelike opening —a cavern. Two
hundred feet inside the cavern a door appeared made of
bronze with ancient writings and designs. Inside the door
there was a large room—a hall for scrolls. A large table
was made of stones which seated fifteen to sixteen persons
around it. Scrolls were taken out of the vaults in the wall
and placed on tables where the people were working. One
particular group consisted of fifteen students around a
table with a teacher at the head. There were objects on
the table but their purpose was not given.

The instructor began the discussion on the place of gold
in the human culture and civilization on our planet. Gold
is a symbol of a Love-Wisdom solar system; a symbol of
consciousness or Soul. It was pointed out that we have a
golden yellow sun in our solar system. On the planet earth
gold is used as a measure of value in our economic system,
and in truth gold is a measure of value. But the whole con-
cept and use of it in our present earth civilization is wrong
und confused and is in fact destructive. The ancient In-
cas and Aztecs did not mine the gold they had— they made

253

254 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

it from sunlight by an occult process known to the priests
who were trained in occult esoteric knowledge. These in-
dividuals knew some of the secrets of how energy becomes
substance and/or substance becomes energy.

Light is actually the midway point between Spirit and
matter or energy and substance. That is why light puzzles
scientists who find that in some ways light behaves like a
wave frequency of energy and in other ways like particles
of substance. There has been much controversy in the
scientific field with regard to this problem.

Man on this planet is coming very close to a point where
he will be able to manipulate energy and substance with
great ease and gold will become an abundant metal and
will be in daily use for the making of household objects.
Gold has a frequency which is beneficial to man and it is
interesting that it was withdrawn from circulation and
paper money substituted in most countries of the world.
Thus, the beneficent radiations of gold were withdrawn
from many people. Circulation of gold money kept peo-
ple in touch with its beneficent frequencies. Also the min-
ing of gold was restricted and almost stopped. Even the
gold in the earth was made from light aeons ago when this
planet came into its second incarnation in its physical form
at the time of the second incarnation of our Solar Logos
who is the Cosmic Christ.

The Aryan or Fifth Root Race is destined to have a com-
mand of substance, very especially to make gold from
sunlight not as a possession or money, but as a substance
that should be in common use in household articles. This
was the dream of the alchemist. This knowledge lies dor-
mant in the consciousness of the Aryan Root Race of man.
The alchemist touched the fringe of this knowledge but
because of the wrong motivation, greed of the rulers, and
the lack of wisdom in humanity at large, they were not
permitted to realize this dream. There were a few who

PREVISION 255

discovered how to make gold by a roundabout process of
transmuting baser metals into gold. Actually, the salt,
sulphur and mercury of the alchemist’s formula were sym-
bolical terms and not actual elements to be used.

At present, our solar system is moving at a tremendous
rate through space and is moving into a vast ocean of fre-
quencies and substances which is and will alter the life on
all planets and increase the radiations of the physical sun
as well as produce changes spiritually. One of the results
of this will be a much more rapid growth of plants. There
will be alterations in the physical bodies of man and
animals and a closer link between the physical and etheric
brains.

This lecture or field trip is actually an elementary lec-
ture designed primarily to be thought provoking and to
point out the nature of light and also the relationship of
light to the element gold.

The Crystal Temple of the Torch

June 1, 1961
Night Class
Recalled by Viola Petitt Neal

Over a thousand persons were present of the Fifth
Kingdom, and disciples of the Human Kingdom. The in-
dividual officiating carried great power and authority and
wore violet robes. There was a great deal of soft but
brilliant light. He had tablets before Him. This had to deal
with man’s place in the order of things. Reading from the
tablets:

“When the time of purification is finished, the
clear light of a new day dawns upon our planet
earth and man as the Fourth Creative Hierarchy
expressing the throat center of the Logos, and
therefore speaking the Word of God, will mani-
fest a new and better society on earth very
quickly.

“He will use a type of energy that does not
befoul his cities with dust and smoke and the
earth will provide him with food more suited for
his body without the toil and stress of the aeons
that are past. He will know that he lives to
achieve a greater awareness of the mind and
heart of God. The masses will receive constructive

256

PREVISION

leadership to bring them along in evolution.
Those of the Fifth Kingdom will live among man-
kind, and friends from Mars and Venus will
come in their ships to the planet earth.

“The flame of immortal consciousness will
burn steadily in mankind and there will be
greater beauty of nature than ever before.

“Man, himself, may initiate the beginning of
the drastic day of purification by hurling the
thunderbolts of God into the solar system. Those
who know these things are to happen, and their
order and sequence, will be able to be steadily
burning lights in the midst of these things.

“In many parts of the world, groups of stu-
dents and disciples are tuning in on the pattern
of things, and have provided places of safety and
work where they can be preparing for the emer-
gence of the light after the darkness, for they will
be tending the light of the world in the conscious-
ness of man through the days of destruction and
this is as it should be. Remember, all disciples
of the world, your destiny in these days. Remem-
ber your responsibility and opportunity and do
not be dismayed.”

257

Vortices of Good and Evil
On the Planet

December 10, 1961
Night Class
Recalled by Viola Petitt Neal

National leaders sum up in themselves the life and at-
titude of a nation and people or race. For example, “Z”
sums up in himself the life and attitude of the American
people better than any other national leader, because he
is himself the epitome of the life and attitude of the
American people.

The American people are dynamic, but oscillating. They
like to be thought generous, but they also have a hard core
of selfishness and self-centeredness, in a sense, almost ir-
responsibility. They are like happy puppy dogs that are
very friendly, but will growl if anybody bothers their own
bone. American people like to be liked and as long as they
have plenty, they like to share it. But they have no basic
understanding of the principles that involve the life of the
human race on the planet and their desire to be liked
makes them oscillating.

This discussion about leaders or families in leadership,
summing up the life of the people, also went on to say that
you find within this particular family both the positive and
constructive forces, and the negative forces represented,
This is more apparent because they do act as the summing

258

PREVISION 259

up of the life of humanity. Leaders represent the people
as the priests sum up and represent the spiritual aspira-
tion of people in all religions in all times of history. In
religions, both in the ancient and modern world, the priest
or religious leader acts as a focal point for the religious
or spiritual aspirations of the people. It is as if all their
thoughts and energy were focused toward one center. The
priest acts as the summing up of that energy, that aspira-
tion, that attitude of the people. This is why the Pope
means a great deal to the Catholic people in a subconscious
way, which they do not understand in their conscious
thinking. He is a focal point for Christendom and this is
why the Catholic Church is a stronger church than the
Protestant Church, which lacks a focal point of leadership,
It is divided into many groups and sects.

However, much as the Protestants may like or not like
this idea, it is the Catholic Church that holds the lines of
Christendom. And it is the Catholic Church that is im-
portant in keeping a focus of the Christ energy in the world
today. The Protestant Church is merely contributing. If
Christendom depended upon the Protestant churches to
hold the line of faith, the line of the focal power of the
Christ energy, it would be broken very quickly. This is
simply because there is not that organized focus of the
Christ energy in the Protestant churches and this is not
criticism of the Protestant churches—this is a discussion
of principle.

This was a very interesting class on energies and focus
of energies of all kinds—spiritual, material and physical
energies.

One group on the planet sums up in itself the material-
istic desire element of mankind, the desire for material
things and sensation. These two desires go together. They
are Lemurian and Atlantean. There is one group on the
planet that focuses in itself desires for sensation, the lower

260 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

types of sensation, which come under the word sensuality,
pornography, etc., and the desire for material things for
their own sake. It also desires to have power over most of
the bodies and desires of people. This group focuses in itself
and its leaders this type of energy and principle on the
planet. For this reason, the leaders within this group would
be found counter-clockwise or on the destructive arc.
Remembering that clockwise and counter-clockwise simply
represent left-hand path and right-hand path.

The political leaders of the world can be leaders only
because they sum up in themselves the attitude and life
of the people of a nation. We have the leaders that we
deserve in America. Other nations have the leaders they
deserve. These leaders can rise to power only because they
have some elements in their character that make it possi-
ble for them to become a focal point for the life of the
people. They have somehow evolved in the process of evolu-
tion so that they can become, you might say, the focal
point of the sum of the people. Looking at the leaders in
the world today, we can see how the human race is evolv-
ing, what its attitude and background and nature are.

The American people must face the forces of evil. They
will see and will experience the swamps and the depths of
evil and destruction in their own experience in this nation.
This is perhaps the next great experience that the Amer-
ican people must go through. It will give them a great tem-
pering and they will either with full conscious awareness
choose the ways of good or go down in the forces of destruc-
tion. It is almost as if how America chooses, the human
race on the planet will choose, because the people of this
nation are made up of the most hardy elements of all of
the nations of the world.

Since we have been a melting pot of all peoples, we as
a nation in the world will go through great suffering and
great stress. We will face the Dweller on the Threshold as

PREVISION 261

“7.” faced the vast evil in the area. The vortex in the ocean,
the snakes and poison, the swamps, the heat and the evil.
This was a projection in physical form of what the Amer-
ican nation must experience and go through in a more
specific form in the jungles of the human consciousness.

I understood this so clearly as the teacher gave the lec-
ture, but it was so difficult to express in outer con-
sciousness. All of the steps of reasoning were so clearly
picked up that one had a flash of understanding that
encompassed the whole idea.

The vortex of Lemurian evil is in New Guinea. The
vortex of Lemurian good is in Tahiti. The vortex of Atlan-
tean evil is in South America— Brazil. In South America
and the jungles of Brazil there is the vortex of Atlantean
evil, destructiveness. The vortex of Atlantean good is in
the Andes. Such a vortex does not mean that there has to
be a vortex 1n the ocean, such as there is in New Guinea.
There is one in New Guinea because the Lemurian Root
Race was very physical, developing the physical vehicle
through which humanity would express as a spiritual
kingdom later. It is more an astral vortex in South
America. There are not the evil physical forces in South
America. Although you have the jungle, there are not the
evil forces of the jungle that you find in New Guinea.

All that humanity accomplishes that is good and con-
structive on the astral level has a focus in the Andes moun-
tains of South America and there is a center there where
people live. I don’t know anything about it, but there are
people in it. These vortices of force attract certain activities
to them and attract certain people to them.

The vortex of force in Brazil which is a negative vortex
of Atlantean black magic and Atlantean destructiveness
is a center for the activity of the materialistic forces,
whereas, the one in the Andes mountains attracts the con-
structive forces of the Hierarchy.

262 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

Central Europe —the Balkan countries, Hungary —is the
vortex of evil for the Fifth Root Race. North America,
place not designated, is the vortex of good for the Fifth
Root Race. The Fifth Root Race has been called the
Aryan, but the word has been so misused by some people
that we use Fifth Root Race to designate the present
development of humanity on the planet, as this involves
most of the human race. The people of North India belong
to the Aryan or Fifth Root Race. There has been a good
deal of intermixture there with the Atlanteans. The more
advanced Atlanteans are the Chinese and Japanese.

There will be vortices of force in the Northern Hemi-
sphere. Central Europe is a focus for negative and destruc-
tive forces. The exact location was not indicated, but a
large portion of central Europe was shown on the map,
including Switzerland. Several points were shown — one was
in the mountains of Hungary. One was in the Balkan area
of Bulgaria. One was in Switzerland. These three formed
a triangle of energy which was negative and destructive.
The people of Switzerland themselves are not destructive,
but because the country is so surrounded by mountains,
is small, and has enough political significance, it has been
chosen as a center for the materialistic forces, the misuse
of the gold of the world.

In the same way Tibet is a focus for a type of Atlan-
tean destructiveness. He said there are two vortices in
Tibet, one constructive and the other destructive. They
are not as strong as these other power centers.

This is the summing up of a long lecture. Awareness
was very clear and I have tried to give the highlights of it.

Centers of World Upheaval

March 22, 1962
Night Class
Recalled by Viola Petitt Neal

There are four centers of world upheaval at present: The
Middle East with its focus in Arabia; Southeast Asia with
its focus in New Guinea; South America with its focus in
Brazil; Europe with its focus in Switzerland.

There was a discussion in the class of the Book of Revela-
tion. It was pointed out that the great whore of Babylon
is a symbol for all sensual appeal to humanity through all
the present channels of pornography and Freudian psy-
chology. Freud was an evil person through whom the forces
of evil, the Black Lodge, poured out a river of filth upon
humanity. The whore was a prophetic symbol. At the mo-
ment, the astral plane on the planet is swarming with
negative entities and negative thoughtforms and we are
already in the midst of the things described in this Book.

The minds of men are shaken by totally irrational be-
havior of governments, which on any sane planet would
be considered an insane and irrational pattern. Partly what
keeps the rank and file of earth humanity stable is that
they are so pinned on their everyday needs and activity they
don't reason enough to see their irrationality. Those who
do see it must hold steady on the mental plane because

263

264 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

forces of evil are warring against the fortress of the mind,
seeking to shatter its rational integration and thereby sabo-
taging the human kingdom on the planet. The technique
of reversal is a Plutonian technique for shaking the foun-
dation of the mental faculty in man. This is their chief
weapon against the mind.

If all disciples could see it and not be swayed by it, it
would be their safeguard. You have to know who the
enemy is and what their workings are and then you are
protected. There are two weapons against humanity to-
day: pornography for the masses and the technique of
reversal for the intellectuals.

The Temple of the Records

May 31, 1962
Night Class
Recalled by Viola Petitt Neal

VPN had great difficulty in recalling the details of this
experience. She was not feeling physically strong. This is
an abstract of the lecture.

From a depository in the Temple of the Records, records
were taken which were written on sheets of gold and sealed.
These records were laid upon the table with some
ceremony. The seal was broken by One who works under
the Laws of Karma.

(VPN thought to herself at the time that the letter of
Fatima reminded her of this greater and bigger experience,
the opening of the sealed records.)

The record was read to those present. A large group of
the Fifth Kingdom individuals were present on one side
of the hall and on the other side were over two hundred
students from many parts of the world. Everyone was
standing. He read:

“At the third purtftcatzon of the planet, the
physical planet earth will wrinkle its skin and
continents and oceans will move. There will be
purification by fire, water and wind.

265

266

THROUGH THE CURTAIN

“At first, there will be gradual warnings with
earthquakes, shocks, and then things will hap-
pen quickly in a matter of days.

“Man will hasten the day by his own tamper-
ing with the forces of nature. For man has seized
the thunderbolts of God and flung them into the
earth, the sea and air with the irresponstbilaty of
children playing with toys without due constdera-
tion, without wisdom and without moral
responsibility.

“In this time there will be removed from the
planet earth the men of the ‘invader planet’ who
have corrupted earth and those of the Third
Solar System who are still mired in substance.
Those who go out of incarnation, earth humanity
and other planetary groups, will return again.
But many will remain in spite of the destruction.

“This also marks the purification of our solar
system, and the etheric sun will cast out the ‘in-
vader planet’ and a new harmony will be estab-
ished in the solar system. On the planet earth,
there will come a new day with a brighter and
clearer atmosphere and the many who have sur-
vived will build a new society. This is not the end
of the world but a purification and a renewal of
the earth. The new day comes on quickly, even
as destruction came quickly.

“The time is indicated for the period of
purification, as perhaps—earth years. This de-
pends to some extent on man himself. This is also
an initiation for the Planetary Logos.”

Earth Changes— 1962-2000

January 18, 1962
Night Class

Recalled by Viola Petitt Neal

The changes that are coming about on the planet in
human society, generally, from now to the end of the cen-

tury have already begun. They were discussed under several
headings.

Changes in the Physical Appearance of the Planet

There are movements in the earth crust all over the
world and, as in the time of ancient Atlantis there were
many warnings— earthquakes, changes in climate and
volcanic eruptions, so today, for the last few years, espe-
cially the last year, there have been many earthquakes in
different parts of the world which indicate the shift of con-
tinents and of the earth’s crust.

The spin of the earth will change. Not in time of rota-
tion, although there will be a disturbance in the time of
rotation for a while. The axis of rotation will change. The
North axis will move toward Siberia, the South axis into
the South Pacific. This will cause considerable disturbance
in the whole atmosphere which will produce storms and
winds of great velocity and climate changes.

267
268 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

The Southern part of the United States, will move closer
to the equator and the equator will move closer to the
Southern part. The whole Pacific Coast will be changed
right down through South America because of various sink-
ing and rising of land. Much of California, quite a bit of
it, can come down and there could be an island of Califor-
nia. A part of California will become a large island.

There will also be changes in the Atlantic including the
St. Lawrence area and Maine. New York and Manhattan
will be broken up. The rainfall will be different in various
parts of the world. Many places that are deserts will
become very fertile with plenty of rainfall. For example,
the Sahara Desert in North Africa will become a very popu-
lous area and, with lots of rainfall and vegetation, will
become more fertile.

The climate of Arabia will be colder, more temperate,
but it will also be a more fertile country —Southern Arabia
especially. There was a great map there or rather a globe
of the world; from time to time places that have changed
were indicated.

This will not come all at once. There is a gradual move
up in the shifts here and there. There will come a time
when there will be tremendous shifts at once and suddenly,
This is not too far off, but it was not indicated how soon
it would be. We seem to be already in this process of

change.
Human Society

Many individuals will go out of incarnation partly
through war, but more of them will go out of incarnation
through epidemics, changes of climate and fear that is
engendered by the lack of ability to adapt which will make
them vulnerable to any kind of disease or hardship.

PREVISION 269

Many people in this Life Wave who go in and out of
incarnation on this planet will be removed to two other
planets. Not in their physical bodies, of course, but they
will be held over and will go into incarnation eventually
on these other planets and will live on them. They will not
reincarnate on the planet earth. Many of those who are
from the planet Pluto will also be removed from this
planet. They will share the destiny of their own planet.

Those who come back into incarnation will be more con-
structive people and eventually there will be a more con-
structive society. This will take place over the next period
of thousands of years. The new society will begin to be
manifest during the lifetime of many people now on the
earth. There will be a different type of society. Those who
learn the lessons through hardship and difficulties and
through the impact of the forces of evil will be able to build
a better society and a more constructive one as they
reincarnate —or if they are now in incarnation begin to
move towards it.

The present economical picture in the world is moving
towards a very serious situation. There will be an economic
collapse in the countries of the world. Great confusion.
There will be new and temporary governments set up that
will be dictator governments, that will distribute food
according to their own idea of who should or should not
have it. This will come pretty quickly. It is already
beginning.

He mentioned the United States and said that our eco-
nomic system is already out of the hands of the American
people and that our money is totally worthless, although
we do not know it. We will find that whatever we have
or own as regards the necessities of life will be useful to
us but our money will not be. This is true in England and
France. It is true in all the civilized countries of the world,

270 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

Many people will die eventually from lack of food. Not
because there is really a lack of food, but because of the
breakdown of the distribution, the money system and the
whole economic system of the world. Those who want the
wealth and power of the world and power over people will
themselves be in a state of chaos. They will have brought
about a breakdown so enormous that they will not be able
to handle it and they will also be in a state of panic.

For a time, there will be a temporary government set
up known as the government of the antichrist which will
be ruthless and violent and evil. Those that are in outlying
areas and away from large concentrations of population
will be able to maintain a certain amount of stability and
integration focus. There are many groups like this all over
the world who have been aware of this situation and they
will be held together by help from the Planetary Hierarchy
in the sense of encouragement to their leaders.

Our whole solar system is passing through an area in
space for many thousands of years that will actually pro-
duce a more pleasant climate on the planet earth than
other planets and will produce a condition where the earth
will be more fertile. But there will be a bad upheaval in
climatic conditions preceding this. The upheaval is due
to changes in the planet rather than to our position in the
solar system. The position of the solar system is very fa-
vorable; the immediate conditions of the climate on the
planet not so favorable. However, this situation will right
itself in a few years and gradually there will be a greater
fertility of the soil, a quicker growing season and gener-
ally a more fertile planet as far as producing food and
vegetation is concerned.

Also conditions will prevail which will be unfavorable
to destructive things in the human body. In other words,
the human body will not have as many enemies to its sur-
vival in the minute organisms that now cause disease and

PREVISION 271

destruction. I’m not sure whether this meant the human
body developed a greater resistance or whether it meant
that these would not exist. I’m not quite clear about that.

There is a great star out there indicating the direction
of the movement of our solar system in space. But this is
simply for the purpose of indicating movement. It seems
such a vast picture to get any kind of concept of it.

This was a class which included about one hundred
persons.

August 29, 1962
Night Class
Recalled by Viola Petitt Neal

The lecture was given by a member of a Seventh Ray
Ashram in the College of the Lamp. As the student went
into the college there was at the gate the symbol of the
Lamp. It seemed more substantial as a college on the men-
tal plane than other colleges.

This college seems to deal with astronomy, geology, the
mineral kingdom, earth changes, etc. There were many
charts on the walls and the lecture dealt mainly with future
earth changes to condition the students for what might be
coming. No exact taming was given as to when the major
earth changes would take place, but the teacher indicated
that we are already in the beginning of this change. Many
minor earthquakes are taking place daily and there will
be more of them until the time when the major changes
will take place in the crust of the earth. The geophysical
year did find shifts in the earth’s crust and some of this
data has not yet been published. They did not wish to
frighten the public and there was little they could do
about it.

272 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

He indicated the following earth changes will be made:
a large portion of the Coast of California will sink. Land
masses will rise off the Coast of California. The whole of
Japan will eventually sink. There will be land changes all
around the Pacific Ocean, including Alaska and South
America. There will also be changes on the East Coast of
the United States, especially in the vicinity of New York.
Some land will rise in the South Atlantic. There will be
a great bay where the Mississippi River now is, practically
dividing the United States in half. Some of the Great Lakes
will be drained, especially Lake Superior and Lake
Michigan. Some of England will sink. There will be great
changes in the Mediterranean — earthquakes in Gibraltar
and around Turkey.

The teacher explained that the whole crust of the earth
right around the planet is in a state of nervous uneasiness
with small temblors occurring all over the surface of the
planet. There have been pressures and strains built up for
thousands of years which will result in major cataclysms
which are preceded by smaller tremors occurring daily at
the present time. The changes will be so vast that there
will really be “a mew heaven and a new earth,” as men-
tioned in the Book of Revelation.

The sky will have a somewhat different color from the
past and we will talk about the violet sky instead of the
blue sky. It is hoped that no bomb will be sent into the
Van Allen belt. If one is fired into the Van Allen belt it
will cause a coalescing of radioactive particles which will
produce a rain of fireballs on the planet burning certain
areas and causing radioactivity; also very high tempera-
tures. This could result in much more destruction than the
earth changes we have mentioned. He said vast numbers
of the population would be killed and many more would
die from disease and hunger.

In more ancient times, more than eighty percent of the
world population was engaged in agriculture. This meant

CN ee

PREVISION 273

that in time of disaster many people knew how to raise and
preserve food. Also, each city was supplied by farm lands
immediately in its vicinity. Today, less than twenty per-
cent of the world’s population, especially in the civilized
countries, knows anything about agriculture or is engaged
in it. Food supplies are shipped long distances, packaged
and processed by factories. Therefore, a major breakdown
in distribution would mean that large populations would
starve to death. We must also realize that those who sur-
vive famine would have to learn how to procure seeds and
raise food. In more ancient times more people knew how
to do this. Today very few people know how.

These earth changes will be accompanied by changes
in the soil bacteria, which will cause plants to grow more
quickly. People will discover that plants not only draw
minerals from the soil, but they also eat bacteria from the
soil in their growth process. There are already discoveries
about this.

He said that we were not using methods that would be
successful in getting into space, but that eventually we
would get into space. He said that there would be some
slight changes in the earth’s orbit. During all this process
the Plutonians will be removed from the planet as well as
the Third Ray Solar System group.

November 16, 1963
Night Class
Recalled by Viola Petitt Neal

Cosmic Energies and Their Effect
on the Planet Earth

The class had to do with changes and conditions from
the point of view of physical changes in the planet earth.

274 ‘THROUGH THE CURTAIN

He began by saying that there are many changes tak-
ing place today in the physical constitution of the planet.
These changes are more basic than just surface earthquakes
or local weather changes.

During the time of Atlantis when the continent sank and
practically the whole face of the planet was changed, there
were impacts of cosmic energies which caused the earth
to make a jump in its orbit. This meant that it was slightly
farther away from the sun. This is somewhat like the jump
of an electron in the orbit of the atom. There was also a
shift of the poles and axis of rotation.

The earth ts not molten at its core as is sometimes said.
At present the solar system has moved into great streams
of Cosmic energy in space. Some of these energies, strik-
ing through the surface of the earth, have the effect of
melting certain substances and they do become molten,
although ordinarily they may be in a solid state. It is as
if these radiations from space kindle numerous fires under
the surface of the earth and we have volcanic activity and
also shifts at deep levels. The earth has many vast caverns
far under its surface. It is not solid straight through. There-
fore, when these fires are kindled by the penetration of
cosmic radiations there is a flow and shift of masses which
cause a vast number of small earthquakes all over the sur-
face of the earth. These are increasing every day and will
continue to increase because deep inside the earth much
shifting and change is taking place. Wherever there are
major fault lines or cracks closer to the surface it is ex-
pected that large major shifts will take place.

Numerous breakthroughs of molten substance are tak-
ing place in the floor of the Pacific Ocean and to some
extent in the Atlantic. This is heating the water in local
areas and disturbing deep sea life. The whole coastline of
the Pacific will change. These major changes started with
the vast earthquake in Chile in May, 1960. But as you will

PREVISION 275

note, there have been major earthquakes in widely sepa-
rated areas— Agadir, Yugoslavia and Persia. The change
in the planet is total, not local. It hits local areas from time
to time where the stresses or fault lines receive too great
an impact.

We must explain a little more clearly how these cosmic
radiations affect the planet. You have a good example in
a recent discovery in science which will somewhat explain
the action of these radiations. The laser beam will instantly
make steel molten when it strikes it. The beam can travel
through space or the atmosphere without appearing hot,
but when it strikes steel, for example, it will burn a hole
in it instantly. This beam can also be directed for certain
kinds of surgery to do a specific job.

These cosmic radiations of energy are of many different
types. Some affect only certain minerals or solid substances
and not others. At this time, the solar system is moving
through a new area in space where great cosmic streams
and tides affect the sun and all the planets, first of all,
on the physical level. This has happened before in the
time of Atlantis approximately 25,000 years ago. These
changes come in cycles of about 24,000 years. It is a cosmic
spiral and cycle difficult for man to identify because he
has not been able to span in his awareness such vast reaches
of time. Much that is now considered to be authentic geol-
ogy is not correct. However, it is the best man can achieve
by applying reasoning to what he is able to observe.

These radiations will raise the frequency of the planet
and affect consciousness. The actual substance, physical,
astral and mental, is even at the present moment being
raised. This means that the vehicles of expression for the
human kingdom will of necessity be built of substance of
a higher frequency. Therefore, automatically those Egos
(or Souls) at a lower state of evolution will be unable to
reincarnate. This will mean that for several thousand years

276 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

those of a more evolved level will come into incarnation.
Possibly for the rest of this planetary life wave.

Today, the raising of astral substance is bringing about
a great deal of upheaval in the human kingdom. The first
result observable is more crime and more evil. We might
say that the higher radiations of astral substance in the
astral bodies of humanity are irritating and disturbing to
those of a lower level of astral consciousness. Therefore,
it stirs up the latent evil selfishness and greed in human
beings. This is an initial effect but the long-range effect
is to strengthen all that is good and constructive and more
evolved in the astral life of humanity. The constructive peo-
ple will become more definitely constructive, more
discriminating and more ready to stand up for what is
good.

The task of the disciples of the world will become easier,
both in their own efforts to go forward in consciousness
and in their efforts to bring about a better society.

These vast streams of cosmic radiation that have hit the
planet have caused the molten conditions that produced
the crystalline forms on the planet. Therefore, the dia-
mond and other crystals are not just the result of some local
volcanic action and pressure, but have been formed all over
the earth at times when these streams of cosmic energy
have brought major changes.

There will be great changes especially in the plant
kingdom and a greater yield of food than in the past. This
will make the problem of food of the right kind far less
difficult, and will assist in building healthier physical
vehicles.

There will also be changes in the animal kingdom. The
domesticated animals will show a higher level of
development.

PREVISION 277

December 15, 1963
Night Class
Recalled by Viola Petitt Neal

Communication of the Will Energy

Instability of governments all over the world will under-
mine their sense of security. There is a great deal of trou-
ble ahead for Germany and more so for the United States.

There will be more earthquakes in more populated
areas. Changes will occur in the coastline of continents and
there will be a rising of areas from the sea. There will be
a shifting of the North Pole into Siberia and the South Pole
farther north into the South Pacific. Canada and Alaska
will become temperate in climate. The southern part of
the United States will become tropical. The Equator will
be through Central America.

Some of the civilizations in Europe will decline or be
destroyed. Lemurian forms will be removed entirely.
Atlantean forms will remain to a limited degree. Many now
in Atlantean form will incarnate in the Fifth Root Race.

The Hierarchy will be among us to teach us and those
from other planets who will wear our garment of frequency
while among us.

Those who individualized on other planets will attend
institutions of higher learning under teachers of their own
planetary group. Many of the earth’s humanity will also
attend these higher schools of learning. The planet Pluto
will be torn off our Solar System. Those from Pluto here
on earth will be removed from this planet because their
source of life is not our solar system.

The humanity on this planet has had the love-wisdom
and intelligent activity aspects without the will or purpose
aspect. So the forces of evil have used them to their will
and purpose. Now that the will of life or Spirit energy will

278 ‘THROUGH THE CURTAIN

become a part of the makeup of earth humanity, earth
humanity itself will direct its activity with purpose towards
good instead of wandering and meandering along the
pathway of illusion, a prey to the direction of the forces
of evil. The decision regarding the planet earth is not only
a decision of the Lord of the World, it is a planetary family
decision and a decision of our Solar Logos, the Cosmic
Christ.

To the class present it was stated that it is most impor-
tant to keep informing and instructing humanity who are
students and disciples on the Path to help them understand
the events that will take and are taking place, and to hold
steady and give leadership in times of seeming chaos and
disaster.

On the planet earth the humanity, from its long strug-
gle through darkness, its seemingly pointless wandering
without purpose, its confused sleepwalking, will emerge
into a clear light of consciousness. Humanity has been in
the dark womb of substance for long ages, unaware of pur-
pose or destiny. With these changes in its material environ-
ment which are, in fact, “birth pains,” it will emerge from
the confinement of the womb into the light of spiritual day.
Not all individuals achieve this, but humanity as a Life
Wave does so. It is because of this birth of humanity into
the Divine Sonship that the Hierarchy, like a loving parent,
comes to its assistance to train and direct it, and those
from other planets, like delighted relatives, bring gifts and
assist In its training and growth.

This is a major cosmic event in the solar system. The
Christ foreshadowed it. A few of the human kingdom
understood it because they individually had achieved this
birth. These few have been puzzled and perplexed that
they could not reach most of humanity still sleeping in the
womb. The birth pangs of the planet earth are inevitable,
but there is swift rejoicing to come when the child human-
ity is born.

eT

PREVISION 279

Other great upheavals and changes on the planet earth
have not resulted in such quick and wonderful changes
because they have been crises as Mother Earth carried the
child in its womb. The time of Atlantis was almost a
miscarriage of the child humanity. Help was given the
planet from high levels and a change made in the nurtur-
ing of humanity as one makes a change in the diet and
care of a pregnant human mother.

May 11, 1962
Night Class
Recalled by Viola Petitt Neal

Frequency Band of Experiences

In the human kingdom you are in touch with certain
limited bands of frequency and a certain limited band of
experiences. In other words, you live in a world of ex-
perience which has been deliberately defined by the Lord
of the World to nurture and to protect the human kingdom
on His planet until a certain stage of growth and develop-
ment has been reached. As you nurture and protect a child
in the nursery, you must realize that outside this cir-
cumscribed sphere there are forces, experiences, entities
and beings involved in the evolution of the planet who are
totally beyond the range of human experience.

The constructive forces of this type seek to cooperate
with the Lord of the World and to protect the human
kingdom. The destructive forces seek to break through the
protected sphere of the human nursery. As individuals in
the human kingdom begin to evolve out of the nursery
state, they begin to penetrate this “ring-pass-not” of the
human sphere. If they are constructive and disciplined,
they begin to make contact with the Forces of Light and

280 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

go forward in their growth and development. Those who
achieve a high stage of intellectual development and in-
tegration, but remain egotistically separative, naturally
contact Black Forces and either cooperate with and
become stronger on the left-hand path or become victims
if they are weak.

The Black Forces do not tolerate weakness. They use
and destroy the weak members of humanity who may stray
outside the sphere of human protection. He said:

“At this point, you who are present here (about
twenty-five) need to realize that there are many
forces and beings who are involved in the
planetary life who are endowed with power above
that which you call human and their sphere is
beginning to interpenetrate the human sphere.

“Very definitely, there are space people who
come and go on your planet. Some of these are
very constructive, as those from Venus and Mars.
Some are destructive.

“More and more you will meet up with peo-
ple who are being controlled consciously or not
so consciously by individuals who are more than
human and yet seem to be ordinary members of
the human kingdom. Where any of these
negative individuals are concerned, you have a
kind of built-in protection. They do not under-
stand the Soul and will evaluate you as per-
sonalities. Therefore, if you are wise and do not
talk too much you can be in their presence and
observe their activities and they will consider
themselves totally undetected. You can always
ask for Ashramic protection in the ‘Name of The
Christ.’

“This kind of knowledge would stagger the
minds of ordinary humanity, and at times indi-

PREVISION

viduals who have accidentally stumbled upon
some of these things, specifically the negative
aspects, have become mentally deranged. This
is in case of people not well integrated and not
sufficiently evolved.

“This knowledge need not trouble you. The
reason for this class is simply to inform you and
reassure you that these things do exist. Take
them in your stride; observe and do not be
disturbed. The dabbling with the astral plane
which humanity does has nothing to do with
what is being discussed. Although occasionally
these negative forces do penetrate through the
astral plane of man’s experience and manipulate
him if he dabbles with psychic phenomena. This
is fairly rare. It is a part of growth and training
to become aware of the world outside the sphere
of the human nursery.”

281
Panoramic View of
Current Events— 1972

January 7, 1972
Night Class
Recalled by Viola Petitt Neal

The Five Masters of the Black Lodge

This was a crash program, but seemed to be a summing
up of classes I have been attending for some time. It had
to do with a panoramic view of what is happening on the
planet and why. There are five Black* Masters in charge
of five departments of activity on the planet. These work
with Black initiates, adepts and disciples in well-planned
and organized activity. The first lecture explained that up
to a point these activities had to be allowed to go on as
long as humanity has cooperated with them and until
humanity on the planet was sufficiently uncomfortable to
see what destructive forces were doing and to be ready and
willing to cooperate with constructive forces. He also ex-
plained that it is important for students of the right-hand
path to know what is happening because they can more

*The word “black” refers here to the quality of the life of the man
and not to the color of his skin. Black Master means he who seeks

the material aspect and lures humanity to that goal, away from the
Spiritual search,

282

ral

PREVISION 283

intelligently cooperate with the forces of light and not waste
their energy where it would do no good. Knowledge is the
power to understand causes and cooperate intelligently to
save the humanity on this planet.

The First Black Master Utilizes
Elemental and Demoniac Forces

The five activities were then discussed, each by a sepa-
rate lecturer. The first lecturer, who began with the above
introduction, discussed the most dangerous of all the ac-
tivities. One of the five Black Masters is in charge of releas-
ing and using destructively elemental forces of the planet
—the elemental fires, the kundalini elementals—on the
involutionary path. These elemental lives are very potent
and neither good nor bad. They maintain the balance of
nature on the planet, its internal fire and all its energy.
There are magical means by which these energies can be
released and used destructively by a master of the Black
Lodge. These elemental forces are directed to people to
cause strange psychic phenomena not of the astral plane.

Witchcraft belongs to this kind of activity and people
dabbling in witchcraft or working with this master,
whether they know it or not, become small pipelines for
these negative elemental forces, which in many places are
causing people to do weird and inhuman things, The word
“unhuman” is better. These forces cannot influence peo-
ple who are constructive, but they do have an effect on
people who through many incarnations have dabbled in
these things and who have a resonant frequency to them.

This master is influencing and clouding the minds of
scientists who work with atomic energy. These people are
influenced to explode more bombs and every explosion is
upsetting the internal fires of the planet and bringing us
closer to cataclysm. Atomic reactors for atomic energy for

284 . THROUGH THE CURTAIN

energy uses are unwise and very dangerous. Something is
happening which could be more dangerous than the im-
mediate effects of an atomic war. There is a critical point
when a certain number of atoms have been split which
could start a chain reaction that would disintegrate the
planet. This will not be allowed to happen, but at the mo-
ment the atomic bombs begin to be exploded and the
atomic reactors and the radioactive wastes begin to be
deposited deep in the earth and the ocean, we are mov-
ing in the direction of this critical point.

The recent explosion in Alaska set into activity the ring
of fire around the Pacific which will gradually cause drastic
earthquakes and volcanoes. It marked one minor critical
point along this highway which points toward disinte-
gration. Many of the scientists who are not concerned with
altruism or with moral or ethical values are influenced
and pushed to continue their work; however, there are
dedicated Black disciples who keep this destructive activity
moving.

This particular Black Master also handles and uses the
demoniac forces of the astral plane. These are powerful
destructive entities with a type of awareness and in-
telligence and malicious intent and purpose, against whom
the doors have been closed since the time of Atlantis. The
door has been opened by man’s evil and by this particular
Black Master. We must remember that man is always the
key; that a sufficient number of human beings must desire
and embrace and cooperate with evil consciously before
a Black Master has any power over the human race. Even
so he has no power over people with good and construc-
tive outlets. But such people can find themselves in a so-
ciety being overrun by these destructive forces. The larger
group of humanity who do not really choose and who drift
with the tide are pulled into the maelstrom of this evil

PREVISION . 285

and must wake up enough and suffer enough to make a
choice. Until they do neither the Planetary Logos nor the
White Lodge can help them.

The informed students and disciples and people of good
will constitute a bulwark and a lighthouse against the evil
and whether they know it or not are surrounded by the
guardian of light and are the assistants of the White Lodge.

At this point I will explain that the human being on the
astral plane and the human thoughtforms may to some
degree be negative as well as constructive. These do not
constitute a terrible danger to the human race and can
be dealt with.

The demoniac forces are terribly destructive to the
human race and at the ultimate limit can destroy the
vehicles through which the soul expresses, and, therefore,
cause failure of groups of individuals in this life wave.

The asteroids are the remains of a planet that exploded
and disintegrated because of tampering with the elemen-
tal forces and kundalini fire of the planet. Our moon was
thrown off from this planet and captured by the earth
gravity. This was done so that those members of the human
life wave on the asteroid planet would have a resonant fre-
quency with our planet and could be transferred to our
planet incarnating here for their further evolution. These
are called “the people from the moon chain.” Most of the
humanity on that planet had its vehicles destroyed, but
those who came through the experiences were incarnated
on our planet.

When these individuals, who in many ways are more
advanced than earth humanity, can achieve the Fifth
Kingdom level, then the moon will no longer exist around
our planet and will disappear. The demoniac beings on
the astral plane are from this asteroid planet and are in-
fluenced by the moon. These demoniac beings will also

286 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

be removed from the planet when the moon chain group
of people achieve the Fifth Kingdom. They were the con-
structive people saved from the destruction of the asteroid
planet.

The basic elemental forces of nature belong to a dif-
ferent plane and a different order than the demoniac forces
of the astral plane. Remember that these elemental forces
are neither good nor bad, just as electricity is neither good
nor bad. They belong to the realm of substance or matter.

The demoniac forces of the astral plane are consciously
and intentionally evil. They could never disturb human
beings in a physical incarnation if there were no resonant
frequency in human beings. There are members of the
human kingdom who intentionally and consciously invoke
these forces and consequently become victims and instru-
ments of these demoniac beings. Individuals with a con-
structive outlook on life who do not dabble in things can-
not be harmed by them. There is no resonant frequency.

The second lecture the same evening was with regard
to the work of the second Black Master in physical
incarnation.

The Second Black Master Utilizes
Narcotics, Psychedelics

This particular Black Master is in charge of promoting
the use and distribution of narcotic, psychedelic and hallu-
cinogenic drugs. This is organized for the whole planet
from the producing of the drugs to the distribution and
the recruiting of the users. It is not something that has just
happened on the planet earth. The distributors are greedy
people with no moral or ethical value who do not realize
how highly organized this activity is and who do not realize
that they are simply pawns in the game and always expend-
able. Greedy, crafty, cunning individuals always think they

PREVISION 287

can win against the forces of light and that they can handle
the forces of evil. Eventually, the forces of light win but
the forces of evil use the greedy ones and toss them aside.

Those who are addicted to drugs are in no position, once
addicted, to help themselves or the situation and they have
to be helped when and if they will accept it by construc-
tive people.

Humans are the key to evil on this planet. If they did
not cooperate with evil, it could not harm or hurt them.
Greed, selfishness, lust, in human beings create a resonant
frequency with a whole powerful host of evil. Human be-
ings thus oriented become channels for evil and victims
of it.

These first two departments of organized and directed
evil toward the human race on the planet have been dis-
cussed in the beginning because they are the most
dangerous in the long run. The elemental and demoniac
forces along with drug addiction can so completely damage
the etheric vehicle that the Soul is deprived of its vehicle
and the Monad must start over again in another life wave.
Such individuals are lost to this life wave if the damage
is severe enough, which means that this course of action
is pursued without change or effort to get back to the right-
hand Path. This is what happened to most of the moon
chain of humanity.

There were more than three hundred people in the class,
of many different nationalities.

The Third Black Master Sabotages World Leaders

The third Black Master is in charge of an activity which
is organized and directed to confusing, bemusing, black-
mailing, bribing and otherwise sabotaging world leaders —
especially in goverriment, but also in other areas of leader-
ship. The weaknesses of leaders are studied and methods

288 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

for controlling them through their weaknesses. Their
strengths and their virtues are studied and methods devised
to appeal to these in ways that will be destructive to the
human race, while leading the leaders to believe that they
are doing what is wise and good. The lecturer turned to
one national group and said, “Your country’s leader has
a Black disciple as adviser who plays upon the man’s bet-
ter points to divert his actions into negative and destruc-
tive channels.”

This sabotage of leadership has left the world at the pres-
ent time with almost no good leaders who are alert and
aware and uninfluenced by these forces. The whole area
of politics is systematically and scientifically corrupted and
confused with planned intent and purpose by this par-
ticular Black Master.

The Fourth Black Master Sabotages the Economy
of the World

This particular Black Master is in danger of sabotag-
ing the economy of all the nations of the world. Here again
the greed of many individuals and the lethargy of a vast
number facilitate the activity of this department. The
resources of people, whether groups or nations, consist of
the natural resources of the planet and the brains and the
hands of the human race. In a well-organized economic
structure the flow of material goods and services would be
unimpeded and, like the flow of blood in the human body,
would nourish and sustain the whole body of humanity.
A measuring rod of money is excellent to facilitate this
economic flow of goods and services. However, when the
forces of evil take control of this measuring rod they can
make havoc with the normal flow of goods and services.
This has been a problem on the planet for many ages. To-
day, it is more acute for two reasons: there is a larger

PREVISION 289

number of people in incarnation and a greater abundance
of goods and services. Money is no longer a measure of the
wealth of the human race, but an instrument to be
manipulated against them.

The Fifth Black Master Sabotages Education

The fifth Black Master is in charge of an organized
group of initiates and Black disciples whose intent and pur-
pose is to destroy the processes of education and to
substitute in its place, through the channels which educa-
tion has created, every possible method of corrupting the
human race at an early age and through to the adult level.
Remember this is organized. It doesn’t just happen. It is
specifically and definitely organized to reach education in
all lands.

The White Lodge and its Hierarchy of Masters are
prepared to move into the human kingdom with organized
methods and procedures for a highly constructive and
creative society in the world when humanity is ready. The
problem for the White Lodge is that until humanity has
suffered enough and seen a drastic-enough result of its
choices there would be little or no cooperation with the
efforts of the White Lodge. But that time is approaching
and it is very useful and necessary that large groups of
disciples should understand clearly what the problems of
humanity are and what they have been.

The Black Lodge uses weak men, destructive men,
selfish and greedy men as puppets to be their tools and
instruments. Often such human beings have no idea of the
vastness of the evil ways in which they are involved.

The White Lodge asks for the cooperation of informed
and instructive disciples and people of goodwill who are
taken into the confidence of the Forces of Light and in-
vited to be a part of their creative effort for the human
290 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

race. For this reason, at this time, the White Lodge is mak-
ing every effort to give information or instruction to
disciples and people of good will so that they will know
and understand the problems confronting mankind and,

therefore, be able to work in partnership with the Forces
of Light.

The Universal Alphabet

August 14, 1960
Night Class
Recalled by Viola Petitt Neal

Only the fragments of this night class were recalled.
There was a discussion of how the three basic movements
of the universe could be transformed into a form of an
alphabetic language that could be understood by all na-
tions. These three movements were represented thus:

a) Rotary or circular motion; Q

b) Progressive, in the form of a straight line, mov-
ing both vertically and horizontally; — 4

c) Spiral movement, either right or left. (© Qe) )

From these three basic movements— rotary, progressive
and spiral—the student was shown how an alphabet for

any language could be designed.* The following is an
illustration:

Ol; SB 5 G5, O@, 1@1e
m=Q2 ,=Hs, HOMO,

*In view of the coming age of computers, these three symbols could
be combined in different ways by all nations to form the new script
for the New Age. —SK

291

Consciousness
The Tapestry of the Soul

We are sent from the far off country

of the spirit
Into this workshop

and we call it life
Earth clad we grapple

with a world of atoms,
For we are sent to fashion
The stubborn stuff of earth
To forms of spirit
And sometimes we forget

the glorious pattern;
And as we labour with

this stuff of earth
There grows a tapestry

we call the soul.

And who shall say we

labour through one life or many.
Until that web shall be complete,

And all this potter's clay
that we call earth

Be moulded into vessels
for the Gods.

Reincarnation

September 11, 1960
Night Class
Recalled by Viola Petitt Neal

There is very little technical information on reincarna-
tion. Asia is familiar with the idea, but often does not
understand its implications. The Western world is ready
for the knowledge. More must be given out and written.

Each personality is a mathematical equation of energies
which makes up that personality pattern for the Soul for
the given incarnation. Sometimes certain soul qualities
already developed are inhibited and others used in order
to achieve what is needed. More can be understood about
what the individual is doing and working out in a given
lifetime and what activities will assist him. This could help
greatly in assisting mankind. It is the only basis for the
teaching of the moral law, energies, and cause and effect
in a universe that works according to law and order.

So far man on this planet has made progress slowly with
much pain and suffering. It does not need to be this way.
Man should grow as the tree grows—in rhythmic cycles
with order and beauty, and with far less suffering. But
because he does not understand the cosmic laws of cause
and effect, or how and why we grow, or for what end or
reason, he stumbles blindly. He thinks he must be here
to amass possessions. Often he knows no other goal. Or

295

296 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

he struggles to be clothed and fed and sheltered, and barely
does so. He does not know his divine destiny or the why
or wherefore of existence in a physical body.

For the disciple and aspirant on the Path, there are four
particular things which hinder progress in any given per-
sonality. It may be one or several of these things:
materialism, self-centeredness or selfishness, pride, fear.
Materialism separates from life, and at the mental level
pride separates from life. Self-centeredness isolates and
confines the life of the individual. At a somewhat higher
level fear can isolate and confine the activities of the dis-
ciple. All other problems can be listed under these four.
Sensuality and lust come under materialism, as does the
desire for possessions. Fear isolates us from love.

Perfect love casts out fear, said the Christ. The more
we realize that we are in a Love-Wisdom solar system where
perfect love cares for and protects us the more will we over-
come fear.

Pride is overcome by realizing that we are an intimate
and necessary part of the life of God. That God is depen-
dent upon us and we are dependent upon God. We can-
not be isolated from Him. The Christ said, “In him we
live and move and have our being.” To know that we are
dependent upon His life melts pride and isolation.

Self-centeredness is harder to get over. It is due to such
a preoccupation with the personality self that the individual
is unaware of the outside world. He may appear to be fully
aware in ordinary life, but in fact he is spinning too fast
in his own little orbit of life. Often only great suffering
will break this rotary motion which has become static in
that there is little or no forward motion.

Meditation

July 23, 1980
Night Class
Recalled by Viola Petitt Neal

Five results of meditation:

(A repeated dream that I kept waking from, with the
pressure to remember.)

(a) Illumination on the things studied.

(b) Insight into problems within ourselves which need to
be handled.

(c) Creative ideas—new ways to do things—new discov-
eries— new inventions.

(d) Momentary at-one-ness of Soul and personality.

(e) Insight into the laws of nature.

297
New Developments in Consciousness

September, 1960
Night Class
Recalled by Viola Petitt Neal

The disciple’s abilities may be considered a mutation in
the development of human abilities. Mutation in the
organic kingdom is a sudden appearance in the life cycle
of a new and different type of living form.

In consciousness, mutation will be almost sudden ap-
pearance of abilities of consciousness — new and astonishing
ones. In the Theosophical teachings there is a picture of
the root races in the form of a graph with a sudden up-
turn in mind, Humanity is at present at this point of the
turn, thus making possible the appearance of new abilities.
The word mutation is not a precise term, but has a con-
notation in consciousness which conveys the idea.

At the beginning of the discussion, the teacher said that
he was not discussing so-called psychic abilities, but a new
break in consciousness in the human kingdom which had
to do with the Buddhic contact and the etheric brain.

The teacher was asked whether or not radioactivity had
anything to do with these phenomena. He replied:

“There is more mutation in consciousness than
in the physical organ.

“Radioactivity is pure spirit in the mineral
kingdom and so it brings about a monadic light
in the physical cells of the body which can be

298

CONSCIOUSNESS 299

harmful in large doses, but makes the vehicle
capable of handling mutation in consciousness.”

VPN Words used here were to convey a concept rather
than precise scientific data. |

The world is flooded today with literature written by
“contactees” —by people “in touch with other worlds.”
Much of this data is distorted; much of it is clothed in trail-
ing garments of astral glamour. This is a part of moving
up to new states of consciousness. They feel the impact of
il new era in consciousness and of necessity, if undisciplined
and untrained, it produces this type. Look for all the grains
of wheat in all the chaff of this phenomenon.

Disciples in classes of the First Ray Ashram were given
information and conditioning to handle this and because
of the rapid moving upward they were being pushed in
classes and with some attending dictation at times. Because
of this rapid growth of consciousness, many new things are
coming into our world—new information with healing —
new discoveries—new methods of education.

The discovery of atomic energy was premature, but it
was not an accident. Earth humanity was stuck in materi-
alism and the only way to wake them up was to allow a
breakthrough of the physical plane, namely, splitting the
atom. Instead of a break coming in the consciousness level,
that is from above down, it had to come from below up.

The splitting of the atom, producing radioactive
substances, is producing a condition in the physical cells
of human bodies that makes the physical brain receptive
to a breakthrough in consciousness. Too much radio ac-
tivity could destroy mankind. In some respect, it may be
a costly way of doing it. It is expected that many people
will go out of incarnation in what may seem to be strange
epidemics. This will probably remove the more
materialistic out of incarnation. One group in particular
which is most materialistic.

300 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

Radioactivity produces a certain amount of physical
tension in the finer substance of the nervous system which
is hard to identify. That is why, maybe, some people reach
out for tranquilizers, which is not good. A certain amount
of tension is focus and is related to a new type of focus
in the brain and such focus up to a point is very good and
makes humanity more receptive to this state of con-
sciousness. It is an automatic building of a bridge or an-
tahkarana between consciousness and the physical vehi-
cle of humanity. (This is merely to convey an idea.)

In a sense humanity has let itself in for a new kind of
experiment in the human kingdom on this planet, namely,
using radioactivity to raise the frequencies of the physical
cells of the body—by using physical means rather than the
impact of consciousness. There will be casualties, but in
the long run it may be a quick method of evolution. The
caudate nucleus is a resonator to Consciousness. It is capa-
ble of resonating to the modulation of consciousness like
a many-stringed harp.

September, 1960
Night Class
Recalled by Viola Petitt Neal

There are two aspects of an zdea: Simply the idea — its
body, and the life or spirit of an idea.

We can understand an idea purely intellectually with
the concrete mental aspect and know what the words
mean. However, we have the energy of the idea available
to us only when we have achieved that inner understand-
ing of the idea. Most people get only the form of an idea
but not its fe. When an idea really becomes dynamic,
both of these components have been assimilated by the
individual.

The Creative Process

October 17, 1960
Night Class
Recalled by Viola Petitt Neal

We speak often of the creative process and of seeking
ourselves to be creative. It is important to understand more
clearly what the creative process is. We might explain it
this way: Spirit, the one became the two—Spirit and
Substance expressing as life and form. Between these two
great opposite polarities the creative process takes place.

The creative process is the process of adapting life to
form (insofar as the Cosmos or the Universe is concerned)
in order to produce the flower of consciousness. Spirit and
Matter—Father and Mother—work at building better
forms for life so that more adequate consciousness may
result.

To adapt life to forms and forms to life is the whole
creative process with the end result in view of producing
consciousness: at the form level —a solar system, a planet,
a galaxy, a plant, a tree, a human being’s vehicles— there
is the effort ever to find more adequate forms, more
beautiful forms, more flexible forms. At the life level there
is the effort better to control and use the form. These ef-
forts seek to achieve several things in the continuing

301

302 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

creative process: more rapid growth of the flower of con-
sciousness, more perfect and more harmonious growth in
consciousness.

In the busy workshops “studios” of universes many forms
are tried. Some prove more adequate than others. Some
produce better results than others. On the planet earth,
growth through conflict and combat with evil producing
a stronger and wiser kind of consciousness than some other
planets may produce. More beauty in consciousness has
lagged behind on this planet that must catch up.

Consciousness is the result of spirit’s contact with form
—its exploration of form, its experience in form. Con-
sciousness is love because it holds an awareness of all rela-
tionship, all contact of life and form (in time — All). Con-
sciousness is therefore the magnetic field of force which
spirit and matter set up through their interrelationship.
This is why the words love and magnetic are used almost
interchangeably in the language. Consciousness is also
wisdom. Wisdom denotes that meaning and value have
come into existence and are recognized. Consciousness
recognizes value and meaning in the contact of life with
form.

You build a house and move into it. Life has moved in-
to form. You achieve experience that has value and mean-
ing. Life moves into the house of form and consciousness
is the creative result.

The artist in the human kingdom is calling the atten-
tion of humanity to this vast creative process. The painter
is seeking to make humanity realize that the life aspect is
expressing through all forms. He is endeavoring, whether
he knows it or not, to say form is not the ultimate reality.
It exists so that the life may express through it and con-
sciousness flower. This also is true of the sculptor. The
painter must emphasize the life aspect, and the sculptor
also. On the other hand, the architect is emphasizing the

CONSCIOUSNESS 303

form side, beauty of form — form in its importance as the
house for life, He builds the building to house a culture.
In turn, his buildings have an effect upon the kind of life
that can express in a culture.

The musician is speaking of qualities of consciousness.
He is calling our attention to the consciousness aspect and
to the nuances of quality at many levels — sound — music —
is the scale of consciousness.

Religion should deal with the love aspect of consciousness
and does, but could do so better. Religion deals with man’s
relationship to the total reality of spirit and matter. All
religions speak of love. To give man an understanding of
the love aspect of consciousness is the office of religion
per se.

Science has the role (at present not realized) of giving
man the understanding of the wisdom aspect of conscious-
ness—value and meaning of the creative process; spirit’s
contact with matter. Science got lost in the externals of
the form world. It will eventually achieve its real purpose.
Religion and science will then assume their joint role of
making man aware of himself as Love-Wisdom.

Literature in the creative field touches all three aspects
of the creative process. Drama deals with the struggle of
the life to work in and through the form and portrays the
happy or tragic ending in producing consciousness.
Literature generally deals with life, with form and with
quality of consciousness. Literature will one day be seen
as the synthesizing form in human culture and develop-
ment In consciousness.

The creative process means adapting form to life and
life to form. Man at a lower level identifies and points out
this creative process in art, religion and science. In doing
so, man is creative at a lesser level and achieves more rapid
growth in consciousness the better he can do this.

Chaos and Order

October, 1960
Night Class
Recalled by Viola Petitt Neal

As disciples on the path, we are seeking to see clearly
the great issues on our planet so that we can cooperate with
the Planetary Hierarchy and work constructively in the
Plan. This is the only way of action that can bring us
satisfaction, a sense of security and the growth in con-
sciousness we seek. It is not easy to see the great Planetary
Plan and purpose as it works out. Often the Black Lodge
and the masters of evil speak as angels of light and ap-
pear so until and unless we challenge them in the name
of the Christ.

We might say that the conflict on our planet is between
chaos and order. Chaos and confusion are the great op-
ponents of order—the negative and positive poles of
manifestation. Matter alone is chaos without the power of
Spirit to give order. Disease is the temporary victory of
chaos. War and famine and pestilence seek to destroy
order.

The world movement to make one faceless humanity of
a zombie-like nature is the advance of chaos. It is a pull-
ing of humanity back to the level of the animal kingdom,
moved by one impulse, like migrating herds. Eventually
either chaos wins or chaos is absorbed into order. The con-
flict between these two eventuates in growth and the
tempering of man. For man must choose which side he

504

CONSCIOUSNESS 305
is on. Man finds this outer conflict reflected in himself.
In fact this great conflict reaches its height in man. It is
in man that the balance of power and eventual victory of
order must be attained.

In the kingdoms below man, matter reigns and spirit
is imprisoned. In the kingdoms above man, spirit is in
charge and matter has been dominated. Humanity is,
therefore, the pivotal point of the battle in this solar system
and on our planet as well as other planets. Man either joins
the forces of chaos or the forces of order. It is in man that
the battle rages most fiercely, but also it is in the human
kingdom that the greatest achievement can be won. Man
can truly win the crown of life in this battle. Man has most
to gain or most to lose of all the kingdoms in nature.

Man is both a soldier in the army of the Logos and also
himself a microcosmic logos of the seven principles which
are his seven bodies and all the minute lives that constitute
his personal universe. Man must first bring order in his
own individual universe if he wishes to be an adequate
soldier in the army of the Logos. This is why he is con-
stantly told that he must control his vehicles of expression
especially in the three worlds of the personality. As a result
of this effort consciousness expands, will and love-wisdom
and intelligent activity develop.

Through long ages man struggles for moral values which
are law and order in the three worlds. Today the forces
of chaos in our society are seeking to break down these
values and hurl man back into the stages of savagery where
there is no moral law. Chaos is the natural state of matter
without the impact and impress of spirit. When spirit
comes into contact with matter and builds it into forms
for life expression, order ensues. Man becomes as the son,
the custodian of order.

Man because he is a conscious son of God is the point
where the battle is won or lost. He can choose. Man is the

306 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

epitome of the universe. He is the battleground. Man is
the victor when the battle is won. Humanity is the battle-
front and the testing place of the universe and this accounts
for the difficulty of human life. But man’s reward is
tremendous beyond his imagination. He becomes the
master of matter and passes on into the Fifth Kingdom
and to vast fields of illumined experience in the universe.
Eventually order absorbs chaos and matter is exalted into
heaven.

Man finds all his capacities tested to the limit. Before
he becomes a disciple on the Path his problems are
primarily with the personal self, separativeness, selfishness,
preoccupation with the little personal desires. He suffers
because of his emotions and his selfish desires. As he
becomes the disciple on the Path, he finds that the great
effort is to have discrimination, He has won some degree
of control in the three worlds of the personality and is
reaching for the eternal spiritual values. At this point the
Black Forces seek to cloud his discrimination, to con-
fuse his goals and to get him to work for their goals under
words and terms that sound right. Here the great test is
discrimination.

Today, this life wave on this planet has come up to the
critical point in the battle of order against chaos. Will
humanity sink back into a faceless mob of slaves, to a
monster called the state —in a sense another name for the
antichrist — or will individualized sons of God rise to great
moral heights of order and beauty and justice and lead
humanity to these heights? The disciples of the world will
swing the battle if they hold steadily to the spiritual values
and goals which they see and know.

Let us ask for discrimination to know the difference be-
tween the antichrist and the Christ. The antichrist is the
lord of chaos; the Christ is the lord of order and truth and
beauty and justice and love. The antichrist would reduce

CONSCIOUSNESS 307
humanity to cattle, feeding on the material things of the
world doled out by their masters, the slaves to matter. The
Christ challenges mankind to become illumined sons of
God and masters of the material world. You are either on
top of the job or the job is on top of you. We must choose
to be slaves of matter or masters of matter.
Consciousness of the Human Race,
by the Manu

February 24, 1961
Night Class of Viola Petitt Neal
Taped by SK

VPN There are a number of students. It is not an or-
dinary classroom — more like a temple. There is a discus-
sion on consciousness.

The teacher has on robes. Usually he doesn’t wear robes.
They are sort of ivory colored —some kind of a decorative
trimming of violet. He is a teacher from a higher order
than some of the others. But I think it is a First Ray
Ashram —has to do with the consciousness of the human
race on our planet at this time. He says:

“There has been quite a problem on our
planet, because the life-wave on the planet has
been slow in the unfoldment of the consciousness,
especially unfoldment of the connection between
Soul and personality. An effort is being made to
speed up the development in consciousness. This
requires a change in the substance aspect of the
different bodies, especially the physical, etheric,
astral and mental bodies of mankind. People
are not able to carry the frequencies of conscious-
ness. Consciousness is frequency, of course. The

508

CONSCIOUSNESS 309

substance must be able to carry the frequency of
energy.

“A new method is being undertaken, a new ap-
proach to the human race on our planet which
will especially involve those who are in a higher
stage of development—an effort to bring in
substance of a higher frequency.”

VPN It is a strange method; I am trying to understand
it—something very strange.

SK What is strange about it?

VPN _ I don't know how it is done. I think He will explain
it a little more presently. It is very strange, because it looks
as if it is substance. Substance from — not another planet
—it is interpenetrating substance that is moving into our
solar system. It is a great etheric cloud substance moving
into our solar system, reaching all the planets, but expe-
cially the planet earth.

This etheric substance is reacting and will react with the
radiations of our sun and other planets. It will cause a kind
of luminosity in our atmosphere around the earth. It is
already moving in a little—like what you might call a vast
etheric cloud—more than a hundred million miles across.
It’s not just the method—the method being used didn’t
originate on our planet. It is really from outside our solar
system, but it would be appropriated, He says. This par-
ticular thing which is happening to the solar system will
be appropriated to the uses of consciousness on our planet.

This is very serious. Not so much like a class. This is
a convocation. It’s a very serious, a more profound occa-
sion. There are many present. Many members of the
Ashrams are present and some of the students. We are on
one side of the room — not in the main part. It’s like a small
auditorium, only it is more like a temple.

—_—_—

310 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

SK How many do you think are present?
VPN I think several hundred people.

SK Where are you? Which part are you in? With the
students?
VPN _ Some of the students are on the right hand side of
the room.

This etheric substance will interpenetrate the etheric
substance of the etheric bodies of people on the planet.
Those who are more evolved will be able to take it. They
will have a great deal more understanding —a great deal
more ability to see relationships, to see why things are on
the planet. It is almost as if we lived in darkness and
couldn't see. This substance interpenetrating the etheric
bodies will help us to carry more of the etheric energy. We
will understand more clearly than we do now. See more
clearly. Some people won't be able to take it. It will be
like an epidemic that takes them out of incarnation. Others
just won't react to it at all, because it won't be able to
penetrate the denser frequency. He says:

“This is a good thing and constructive —
helpful to the evolutionary process, and will help
change some of the things on the planet more
quickly. It will also affect the growth of things —
plants; and they will grow more quickly and
better.”

VPN This is like a report. It isn’t a lecture in a class—
it’s a report that is being made to the Ashramic groups
on what is to be expected and planned for. He says:
“This is already beginning slightly. Just the
very, very tenuous edge of this cloud of etheric
substance has moved in to the area where we are
in the solar system. It is also affecting the planet
Venus. This is one reason that it seems so much

CONSCIOUSNESS 311

brighter. It’s not just because it is closer to the
earth, but it is also because of this etheric
substance that is almost physical.”

SK Does He say from where this etheric cloud is coming?
VPN He says:

“Our solar system is moving into it. It is mov-
ing toward us. There are two movements.”

SK Where is it coming from?

VPN It is part of the vast reaches of space. One of those
conditions far out in space that we encounter as we move
through it. Sometimes vast aeons of time cross these pat-
terns of energy or substance. All this is part of the Plan
and purpose that has to do with the Solar Logos, but af-
fects all life on all planets. He says.:

“We must not be frightened. It doesn’t mean
that there is any destruction and disaster to the
solar system. Our solar system will continue in
its evolution and progress, and our planet earth
also. This is beneficial to those wo are students
and who understand it and are not frightened
or disturbed by it. This will bring adjustment in
the physical, etheric, astral and mental vehicles
much more quickly than could be done in a
number of lifetimes.

“The Soul, the Self, will have a more clear and
adequate and integrated vehicle more quickly.
Those who are students and understand it, those
who are evolved and integrated and are perhaps
not students, will come to believe and understand
it, and even for many of the people— good in-
telligent people, who are constructive in their
outlook on life.

312 ‘THROUGH THE CURTAIN

“Those who are negative, destructive — it will
increase the darkness of substance and will make
their vehicles less useful. It is a positive thing, in
the sense of positive and constructive.

“There are climatic changes taking place all
over the planet much more definite and specific
and in some cases more drastic than the ordinary
public has been told.

“The time of great change is almost upon us.
These changes will make us more aware of
ourselves as I the Soul.”

VPN Sitting here, you sense what he means. There is a
sense of strength and integration and focus and awareness
and knowledge that is continuous. Clear realization that
one could be much more integrated —as if you gathered
yourself together and knew yourself to be, I—the Soul,
eternal and immortal. It is like standing in the light. There
is a sense of clearness one does not have ordinarily. It is
telepathic contact with knowledge, a quick understanding
from higher levels, like the archetypal levels of awareness.
It seems simple and not difficult, that kind of contact, but
it is because one is in a certain atmosphere. Perhaps
because one is in the frequency of the Ashram or members
of the Ashram, I think the disciples and students are aware
of this.

The speaker is not the ordinary teacher instructor. He
is someone in authority on the Will Ray. Not the Master
Jupiter, not the Master Morya. It is the Manu. The speaker
is not speaking specifically to us actually, but to people
senior to us in the Ashram.

SK Have you ever seen Him lecture before?

VPN _ I haven't seen Him before. He carries great power.
That is why, perhaps, one has such a sense of clearness.
In His light shall we see light.

CONSCIOUSNESS 313

There is strength—great strength and great wisdom —
great clearness. It’s a clearness you like. The Will Ray
energy is not so strenuous as one thinks. I think the speaker
gives one the feeling that the Will Ray energy is life. I know
why this seems strange too. This is an effort or a method
or a way by which there is a renewing of the etheric body,
physical body. This is this etheric cloud coming in, without
destructiveness, without having to destroy too much. It’s
a way of bringing in Rife to make it possible for the form
to carry a greater voltage of energy without having to
destroy the form, without groups of people having to go
out of incarnation several times and come back and get
adjusted. It is possible to accomplish a great deal more
in a short time with the vehicles of expression.

There is a sense of the life force. Force isn’t the word.
Life energy —a sense of the life energy that is strong and
resiliently clear. It is a different thing from what I have
known before or experienced before. He says:

“You must have the courage to live. You must
have the courage not to be disturbed or fright-
ened by changes. Know and be from the center
outward.”

VPN This is to the human kingdom. He says:

“This is why there are disciples in the human
kingdom present. Know and be from the center
of your self outward.”

VPN You sense what He means—if you can hold it. He
Says:
“The light of life is within you.

“The flame of life is within you, know this.
And know evil and destructiveness cannot come
nigh unto you.

“Know yourself to be the life.

314 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

“You are the candles of God holding the eter-
nal flame. Know this.”

VPN Still trying to understand why this seems a very
serious occasion. Perhaps it is because of the presence of
the Manu. Because He carries a powerful light energy of
the life aspect. I think all the disciples are trying to be
aware of some aspect of consciousness or at least the mean-
ing for human beings on the planet. You realize we do
dwell in the twilight of consciousness most of the time,
because the mind is so clear here. There is a clearness. Such
a different perspective on life, such different orientation.

The Manu seems to sum up in Himself what the human
race is on a planet. This is a very dynamic impact. It has
a splendor about it—a splendor and a power. But a power
that is truth and life and love — the opposite of the negative
aspect.

There is an impact of energies here. I think they are
wave frequencies that mean something to the awareness
of those Ashramic—those at the higher levels in the
Ashram. It is as if these frequencies were beamed to them
and they understand them. We struggle to be aware of
what they mean, because we don’t have the same frequency
or capacity—the disciples, the students. I know there is
more I want to understand. He says:

“This information will be out in many groups.
There will be rumors of it from the scientific
levels, just a little bit said here and there in scien-
tific reports, to condition people for some strange
events. And if we look, we will find these refer-
ences in newspapers and magazines. Some of the
different esoteric groups will receive this infor-
mation in one way or another through their
leaders or through their own contact with it, and

CONSCIOUSNESS 315

many people will have a great deal more ex-
trasensory perception because extrasensory is nor-
mal perception in certain stages of development.”

VPN It is very interesting to be aware of frequencies of
transmission which are beyond your own frequency band
and this band from the Ashramic level. But students, at
least, are getting the main points of what this convoca-
tion is about and why it is being held. He says:

“Very shortly there will be scientific murmur-
ings and mutterings about this phenomenon,
because this vast etheric cloud will very definitely
affect the astral material level, material sub-
stance of the planet and of the physical bodies
as well as the etheric bodies.”

VPN The instructor is with us and says that this is the
end of our part of the meeting. The disciples, the students,
are going out to something else. We are leaving the tem-
ple or the place where this meeting convocation is held.

The Effect of Love on Consciousness

September 13, 1961
Night Class
Recalled by Viola Petitt Neal

Expansion of consciousness is a love activity. You see
relatedness because you love. Love is a cohesive force that
holds things in relatedness, so by seeing relationships you
are participating in the love activity of the universe.

The Soul or love is the Christ aspect in the individual.
In a sense we increase love energy in the Universe by see-
ing relationships. God needs our understanding of rela-
tionships. It rejoices God to see relationships as it rejoices
the parent to see the child talk. As we expand in con-
sciousness, we are more related to God. The more give and
take there is between us and God, as with our friends, the
more we understand Him. God needs our understanding
of life. In a sense He will be lonely without it. He wants
our comprehension of all He has created. A self-centered

person Is really destroying consciousness by narrowing his
‘ band of awareness.

316

Radiatory State of the Planet Earth

September 5, 1962
Night Class
Recalled by Viola Petitt Neal

The life forms on this planet earth —that is, the mineral
kingdom, the plant kingdom, the animal kingdom and the
human kingdom — are at a stage of taking a step forward
which can be defined in terms of radiation. Radiation is
the life breaking through the form because the form is no
longer adequate to express the life. There will be tremen-
dous changes in all the four kingdoms, and coincident
with this the changes in the physical body of the planet,
in order to build new forms. It is true that areas of earth
go under the ocean or become deserts for long ages of time
to cleanse and to prepare them for a new stage of evolu-
tion. Just as a farmer must allow fields to lie fallow in order
to grow a better crop later, so with earth changes.

What appears to be disaster is not actually, in the long
run, a disaster. Looking at it from a specific point in time
and space, from the point of view of human consciousness,
world changes look like a total disaster and seem mean-
ingless and cruel. If human beings had continuity of con-
sciousness, they would not be utterly distressed and
dismayed. Growth towards a high state of consciousness
is always the purpose of these things.

317

318 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

The planet earth as a unit is moving toward a stepping
up in consciousness. In fact, it is already in that process.
This means a stepping up in all the kingdoms. This is why
there will be new forms of plants, animals, and new de-
velopments in the mineral kingdom.

The upheavals of the earth will break the pattern of our
modern culture and civilization which hold the mind of
man at present firmly imprisoned. This was good as long
as it produced growth in consciousness but not good when
limited. A vast number of intelligent people today feel ut-
terly frustrated, as though they were up against a stone
wall. The form of civilization and culture in which they
are living offers no further opportunity for development.
We have reached the limit of the form’s ability to express
the life. The masses who are less evolved are satisfied with
material things and weighed down with the anxieties of
debt and insecurity. Within their narrow range of ability
to grow, they too are utterly frustrated. This is what 1s
meant when it is pointed out that the form no longer serves
the life. People are without goal or purpose. A vast ma-
jority of them in all stages of evolution see no goal ahead
and have no enthusiasm for further effort in living.

While in physical incarnation we have energy flowing
in through the spleen from the planetary entity (the phys-
ical life of the planet) as though man were in the womb
of substance and connected with the umbilical cord of life,
The disciple needs to be consciousness-centered in his head
in a point which is central in order to adjust to the flow
of energy. The caudate nucleus is an organ for use in more
advanced man, and it is not yet being used by ordinary
humanity—and very slightly used by some disciples.

Why Humanity Is the Fourth
Creative Hierarchy

May 8, 1962
Night Class
Recalled by Viola Petitt Neal

In the Fifth Kingdom, man is referred to as the Mason
or builder. By his emotions and feelings he sets up frequen-
cies which draw to him the substances on the physical,
etheric, astral and mental planes with which he builds a
structure which is the human personality vehicle, the
physical etheric, astral and mental bodies.

The quality of substance is determined by the frequency
of his thoughts and emotions. A thoughtform was shown
to the students in which the frequencies that a person sends
out may be likened to a conveyor belt which brings in the
building blocks. This could be presented in slides to the
students with the analogy of building a house of adobe,
bricks or alabaster. The kind of substance built into the
structure also, in turn, determines the kind of frequency
to which the vehicle is responsive. However, man, the
thinker, the dweller in the house, has the power to change
his thoughts and emotions and, therefore, to change the
substance and structure. Because the etheric, astral and
mental substances are much more fluidic types than dense
physical, this is easier than building an actual physical

319

320 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

structure. Man often takes a long time to do this, because
he is slow in changing his mental and emotional frequency.

The energies which flow automatically into the centers
are made up of all the ranges of frequencies, but the
vehicles respond only to those ranges of frequencies to
which they resonate. A good analogy is the string of the
violin. The tension and thickness of the string determine
the tone and frequency. The thicker the string the lower
the note.

Although all frequencies of energies are available at all
times, the individual has access to those frequencies to
which the substance of his vehicles is resonant. This goes
back to the quality of his thinking and emotions. Man,
the thinker, the dweller in the house.

Thoughtforms were presented to illustrate this on a
screen.

ee a

The World of Meaning—
Plan and Purpose

December 16, 1963
Night Class
Recalled by Viola Petitt Neal

The true meaning, the understanding of the world of
meaning, is really mathematical. It has to do with seeing
patterns of energies and their interplay on the planet. It
is seeing the relatedness of events to Plan and Purpose.

It is characteristic of humanity that they interpret events
emotionally — which means that for the most part events
have an emotional meaning to an individual nation or race
which may have no relatedness to actual meaning. They
see meaning at the level of the concrete mind on the basis
of the limited facts given at any given time. This again
is a limited approach to the world of meaning. This type
of seeing relationships usually has very little validity in the
larger world of energy patterns. They see meaning in rela-
tionship to their own selfish and circumscribed orbits of
activity.

The world of meaning has to do with how energies meet
and affect each other in relationship to overall Plan and
Purpose.

Events in themselves are end results of the intersection
of frequencies. One begins to understand meaning not by

321

322 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

interpreting the events but by examining the energies and
meeting points which produce an event. At the higher level
this could be seen as mathematical, like the beat frequency
in radio phenomena.

Man’s effort to ascribe meaning to events depends upon
his point of view, which includes his background, train-
ing and prejudices. The same effect within these limita-
tions will therefore have different meaning for different
individuals or groups of individuals. For example, the
American Declaration of Independence: to the English,
the signers were the traitors; to the Americans, they were
heroes. In the true world of meaning the human race had
taken a step forward in the understanding of freedom
which was important in the overall Plan and Purpose.

To approach the true world of meaning it is necessary
to understand the evolutionary process, to have a knowl-
edge of the Wisdom Teaching. One cannot be emotionally
dominated or limited by the concrete mind. There must
be students and disciples who can begin to understand this
true world of meaning and to interpret it to humanity.

Department of the Manu—
Life, Form and Consciousness

August 9, 1964
Night Class
Recalled by Viola Petitt Neal

The universe moves in an evolution of life, form and
consciousness. This could be symbolized in the caduceus,
in which case the two spiral streams would represent life
and form and the central rod would represent con-
sciousness. In passing, remember that symbols have a
seven-fold meaning always (in our seven-plane universe).
At this point we will use a further symbol to create in your
minds a better condition of awareness regarding the
material to be represented.

Let us take the circle with a dot. The dot represents life;
the circle represents substance. The cross represents con-
sciousness. The triangle represents the manifested world
of form, which as you can see, in order to be manifested,
must have all three aspects. The purpose of the symbol
is to flash a total of a pattern of concepts on the mind.

Now to move to the discussion for this class period. Life
moving through substance is universal electricity which
inevitably creates a magnetic field which is called con-
sciousness. When life flows through pure undifferentiated
substance, there is a universal and undifferentiated mag-

$23
324 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

netic field. Therefore, the creative universe as such does
not yet exist. Let us remember that this undifferentiated
magnetic field is consciousness. We might call it a dreamy
elementary state of consciousness.

Form arises because of consciousness. This is a very im-
portant point to remember. It is consciousness that needs
form to achieve its evolution.

Life flowing into substance is involution. (Life involved
into substance.) But immediately when consciousness
moves into the path of evolution, consciousness needs diver-
sified forms for its evolutionary purpose. Because it is
magnetic, it draws substance into diversified forms. This
begins with the basic elements: oxygen is a state of con-
sciousness or a state of magnetism — gold is a state of con-
sciousness or a state of magnetism. In the mineral kingdom
the highest state of magnetism or consciousness is to be
found in the crystals.

In each kingdom substance is built into more complex
forms through which the life flows and the consciousness
in those kingdoms grows and in turn modifies the form.
Consciousness does not modify or change the life aspect
itself. But by modifying the form through which life flows,
consciousness continually achieves its own change and
modification along those lines which it conceives to be
desirable and creative. Self-consciousness marks the high
level of achievement.

Man has almost infinite capacity to modify the forms.
He does not modify basic substance but can build an in-
finite variety of forms from the basic blocks of substance.
He modifies mineral forms, plant forms and animal forms
and thereby modifies consciousness in the kingdoms be-
low him. This is a very definite, exact statement. In many
of the Holy Books of the world it is expressed as man be-
ing “given dominion” over the other kingdoms in nature.
We might say that a human being is a stronger magnetic
field than an animal.

CONSCIOUSNESS 325

At this point I want you to remember the principle of
analogy — basically likeness of relationship. The principle
of analogy is true because the universe is built on a pat-
tern that is endlessly repeated on all levels. We can call
it the Three/Four Principle. Briefly: Lzfe flowing through
Substance, produces magnetism or Consciousness (the three
aspect). The diversified form-universe which is manifested
is represented by the four because it has four dimensions.

At this point let us go to our principle of analogy which
applies on all planes and on all levels. At the lowest
physical level man has discovered electricity. He does not
really know what it is, but he has discovered ways to use
it. Let us look at electricity for a moment. We can say that
electricity (life) flowing through a wire (substance) always
produces a magnetic field (consciousness). This is the prin-
ciple at a level of everyday thinking, understandable to
man as an experience of his daily life.

In the field of electricity, man himself produces the elec-
tromagnet (consciousness). However, he discovered elec-
tricity by first discovering the magnetic field of the mineral
(magnetic ore), It was perhaps logical that he would first
discover the consciousness aspect, since he himself is self-
consciousness. By manipulating the magnetic field he was
able to harness and control the life which was continuously
producing the magnetic field and in this way controlling
the flow of the life aspect—and by modified forms, pro-
duce the manifestations which he desired. His control of
this life aspect is what we call electricity. Remember that
we are talking about this at its lowest physical level.

We want to get back to the concept that life flowing
through substance produces consciousness which builds and
modifies form. Life does not build and modify form. It
flows through the forms that are provided by consciousness.

A Planetary Logos or a Solar Logos is an inconceivably
high state of consciousness that modifies and builds in-
numerable forms through which life flows.
326 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

Energy is an aspect of life. Force or power is an aspect
of consciousness. One might say that life has the purpose
to flow —to give itself to substance; in doing so, it produces
consciousness. Consciousness of necessity is magnetic for
it binds and holds life and its relationship to substance.
To the students present he said:

“Your consciousness and that of all humanity
is constantly modifying form, more so than ever
before. This is being done basically through one
point of your consciousness, the concrete mind.
The concrete mind observes and analyzes the
world of form, and manipulates and changes it.
This has changed your civilization (overall con-
sciousness aspect of a nation — humanity) because
the change in forms affects how life flows through
forms.

“However, to you as students, I would say
something further: it is possible for man’s total,
integrated and unified consciousness to have a
direct effect upon form, or the material world.
This is not just the concrete mind operating, but
the total consciousness. Those at the Fifth King-
dom level have this capacity to directly affect
form in the three worlds. This ability begins with
a control of the material of the three personal-
ity vehicles.

‘Today as we move into the next sub-race
which will be the beginning of the next root race,
man will learn a little more about this more
direct effect of magnetic consciousness upon
form.”

VPN _ In answer to a question about magnetic healing,
he said:

“In simple terms this is a case of consciousness
in some degree altering form. The healer does

VPN

CONSCIOUSNESS

not understand the principle and probably does
not have an idea how he does this, but because
of a development of his own consciousness, he is
able to some degree to alter form to permit a
more harmonious flow of life. This does not
mean that he is necessarily a highly evolved per-
son in his total development, but there has been
as it were a sideline development that makes this
phenomenon possible to a greater or lesser
degree. There is actually a magnetic effect on the
physical body which brings the form into a bet-
ter alignment for the flow of the life aspect.”

“This may sound abstract to you, but sound
is the ‘word’ of consciousness by which form is
built. It is sound which modifies undifferentiated
substance and builds it into forms. In a sense the
magnetic healer speaks the word. Man can learn
how to use sound frequencies through his
mechanical devices to modify the physical body
and produce therefore a more harmonious flow
of life, which we call health.

“The word of the Logos (sound), builds the
form of our solar system. Man may be destruc-
tive with his sonic frequencies before he learns
how to use them constructively. Riding the
thunderbolts of force is a daring and dangerous
feat, but one that ultimately a Son of God must
master.”

In answer to the question about sound, he said:

327

Art and Architecture

July 27, 1980
Night Class
Recalled by Viola Petitt Neal

Segments of the night class were recalled and written
down later by VPN,

Summing up the lecture at the end of the class: The Art
of Italy (Renaissance) is exuberant, dynamic and beautiful.

The Art of France is sophisticated and elegant.

The Art of England is as dull as their food. They excel
in literature—the art of words.

The Art of Holland is earthy, heavy, but charming.

The Art of Russia is mystical and sad.

The Art and Architecture of Egypt is ponderous and
powerful.

The Architecture of Greece is graceful and symmetrical,
and mathematically pleasing.

The Architecture of Rome is solid and strong.

The Architecture of the Orient is sensuous, prolific, ex-
uberant, with an overtone of spirituality.

The Architecture of Islam, is strong, anchored to the
earth, but with an upreach of spiritual aspiration.

The Architecture of Europe (Middle Ages, etc.) Chris-
tianity. Mystical, graceful, aspiring.

These are just my notes of what I recall of the summing
up of the lecture which was given.

329
The Great Musician

The Great Musician at his console sat.

His organ notes

Rolled through the empty corridors of space;

And substance sleeping in the night of time
Awakened.

Worlds were formed,

And suns and stars and shining galaxies.
His life flowed through the soaring melody
And all things moved

The dance of Life began.

Substance and Spirit —
A New Habit of Consciousness

September 18, 1960
Night Class of Viola Petitt Neal
Taped by SK

SK What class are you attending?
VPN _ I am just beginning my own class. I think about
thirty students are present.

SK Which one is this?
VPN This is Master
Substance and Spirit.

’s Ashram and the subject is

We begin class with a full and shining globe of energies
in the center of the room. It is clear, like clear water when
it is silver in the sunlight. Energies move beautifully in this
globe. It is a large one about three feet in diameter. It gives
one a strange and interesting understanding because you
know very clearly that the outer world of form is a phe-
nomenon, but not the reality. It’s the crystallized outer
form of an inner play of energies. It isn’t the real world.
It's like coming —when you come into incarnation, When
you are working in the world of form --it is like coming
into a forest of dense trees and trying to make a path
through it.

You come into this world of crystallized forms, you live
in it every day and you try to make an impact on it, Moat

331

332 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

of the time, it makes an impact on you. Very, very few
people ever make an impact on the world of form, in the
way in which they are supposed to, or at all. Most of the
time the world of form is making an impact on us. And
yet, we come into it with the intent and purpose of mak-
ing an impact on it. We must do things in our daily world.

The teacher says that we must do things to shape and
alter the outer world of form. We must not let it form and
mold us, but we must form and mold it. We only do this
if we can act from the Soul level, as individuals or creative
entities or beings. There is joy in acting at the Soul level
and there is only fever and fret and bewilderment in be-
ing acted upon on the phenomenal level of the phenomenal
world.

This globe of crystal light is a moving globe of scin-
tillating colors, which represents the real world in which
we live. If we were aware of it, the world of Maya or
phenomena (this is a good translation of the word) is the
crystallized outer shell of an inner reality. If we can become
centers or focal points for this life energy, it can flow out
into the phenomenal world and change it in many ways
that are more desirable.

This globe of light, although it is silver light, seems to
have all the colors latent in it that we know and speak:of.
It is a thoughtform I am sure, projected by the teacher.
As you look at it, your mind opens up. You can see clearly
the world of energy or light. You can see a new relation-
ship between life and form. If the form were more flexi-
ble, there would be a better relationship between life and
form, a more joyous and creative relationship, I guess is
the word. Each student is encouraged to look at the globe
of light and meditate on it and record his own impressions
before the teacher goes on with his discussion.

As you look at it, you find out that you are not really
on the outside looking at it, but you move into it. You
become the energy and the life. You become identified

CONSCIOUSNESS 333

with the life, the living individual, the high Soul and
Monad. You find out the teacher has placed this here to
help the student become himself a scintillating center of
the life force. To become one with this life, this energy
or light, and move with it, rejoice with it, sing the Song
of Life with it. The teacher says:

“The myriad songs of the Universe are the
Songs of Life. All the energies dancing through
the Universe and their interplay and movement
create a vast symphonic composition —mathe-
matical in its precision, as music is mathe-
matical—creative in its effect. And life and form
should find always a flexible interplay.

“Inertia is a characteristic of matter or sub-
stance, especially physical matter, as we know it,
and the law of inertia in physics is a very good
statement of that. This inertia causes the form
to crystallize so long as so much of the life can
flow through it, and there must be forms other
than that. The human being is the most flexi-
ble form of all.”

VPN Very interesting. He says:

“The human being on any planet is the most
flexible of all forms. He has the capacity to be
flexible or not, as he chooses, but he can be. We
can live three or four incarnations in one lifetime
if we are flexible in any given incarnation. Then
we are able to achieve a great deal more when we
can change our outlook and point of view and
accept a new one, We can go forward in our
growth and development, and achieve more.

“This is why it helps if the individual is open
minded. The disciple on the Path should be such
an individual and should be able to achieve a
great deal more in any given lifetime than is or-

334 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

dinarily expected. The human being, being the
most flexible of all forms, is therefore a center
for the life force, for the play of the vital life
energy through his vehicles.”

VPN This beautiful globe of scintillating light also
represents Man, the Initiate, the Initiate Consciousness.
Not only is it a replica or representation of the Universe,
there is also representation of Man, the Initiate.

SK What is an Initiate Consciousness?

VPN It is the second or the fourth initiation, the second
at the Hierarchial level. When the disciple has passed
through the second initiation, he has become an initiate
aware of the life force flowing through him. The life of
Spirit, the Monad, flowing through — and this speeded up
frequency gives him a certain amount of command over
matter or substance.

There is a state of consciousness that has a command
over matter or substance, a command that can mold and
change matter and substance in ways that the ordinary per-
son cannot. This is an unusual thing because ordinary man
is not able to do this. This is probably why it is called the
Initiate Consciousness. The teacher says:

“More and more disciples must be able to’
become aware of this life that works in and
through the form. In living consciousness, the
disciples must be aware of the life side, as well
as the form side. This is the middle Path for
the disciple — holding in his consciousness the life
side and the form side in doing this, he will be
able to make that impact upon his environment
which it is intended that the Son of God should
do.”

SK How can a disciple become more conscious of the life
aspect?

CONSCIOUSNESS 335

VPN _ In his waking consciousness if he will simply in the
beginning stop and realize that every form —a tree, a plant,
a bird, a dog—any living form of plant or animal, has a
life pulsating through it and just be aware of this. Man
has a habit of consciousness. The teacher says:

“This is a well-chosen phrase, a habit of con-
sctousness, and man’s habit of consciousness is
to see the form and take it for the reality. If he
could just change that habit of consciousness to
being aware of the life aspect, at least briefly,
every time he looks at a tree, or a flower, or an
animal, or the grass, he would simply momen-
tarily be aware and know that there is a life
behind this form.

“You see it’s a matter of the change of focus
—like focusing your eyes on a near object or a
far object. If you focus on the near object, you
don’t see the far object; you can look at the far
object, and the near object sort of fades out of
your focus and consciousness and you see the far
object. It is as simple and as difficult as that.
Change your habit of consciousness. At least,
momentarily, be aware of the life behind the
form.”

VPN_ As we live in the phenomenal world, we must deal
with forms. There is some simple secret of being more in
command of one’s environment. He says:

“This is an important secret for the disciples
of the world to understand. Those who are earth-
bound, sunk in materialism with their feet in the
mud, are grabbing and holding material things,
taking more than they need and taking from
others who do need. They are endeavoring fran-
tically to amass wealth or money or gold or pos-
sessions and today, mankind is the victim of this

336

VPN Let me understand this. This is an interesting state-

THROUGH THE CURTAIN

group, the people who are still tied so completely
to the matter aspect. The solution for this prob-
lem of economy is in the consciousness of disciples
of the world, aspirants and accepted disciples and
initiates.”

ment. He says:

“The imposition of a higher frequency upon
the material world can move and change it and
command it. Man was not supposed to be the ser-
vant of the material world. Man was not sup-
posed to grab and amass and possess the material
world. He was supposed to command it. When
he seeks to possess it, he becomes the servant of
it. And the material world is supposed to be his
servant. The material world is the clay for the
potter to mold into forms of beauty and art and
unsefulness and service, but if the potter forgets
his wheel and merely tries to amass vast moun-
tains of clay, then he has lost his focus in the
world and his purpose in being. To be aware of
the life behind the form will help man to con-
trol the form. It is as simple as that.

“At first, you become aware of the life behind
the form world. The more you are aware of this,
the more you will be able to command the form
world, to shape and mold it—the outer world.
To have and to hold and possess the material
world is to have and hold and possess a dead
shell, but to know the life behind that form world
is to know the meaning and purpose of existence.

“Let the disciples of the world achieve a new
habit of consctousness.”

VPN He says to us:

CONSCIOUSNESS

“Begin with the first tree or plant you see when
you start out for the day and briefly be aware
of the life that flows through that plant or tree
or animal. This is the beginning of seeing the life
behind the form.”

“Man, astrally focused, is the victim of his
desires, when his desires have been directed
toward the having and holding of things. This
has given the form world power over him, The
Disciple on the Path must command the world
of form, because he knows the life behind the
form.”

“The disciple can command the world of form
because he knows clearly in consciousness and is
aware of the life behind the form. This is why
disciples on the Path often have a problem about
material things. They are in a kind of no-man’s
land. The disciple gets up and departs from the
world of material domination; he sets out upon
the Journey from Form to Life. (He is trying to
give this concept in another way now.) So, he sets
out on the journey from form to life; from the
land of the form of material things, like the prod-
igal son, who lives in the country where he eats
the husks which the swine eat and the prodigal
son says, ‘I want to arise and go to my Father.’

“The prodigal son is mankind having departed
from the Father's house and into the world of
form. And when at last he says, ‘I will arise and

337

VPN It is a concept here that is a little difficult to get.
He, the teacher, is seeking to get across to us some basic
concept in consciousness. He says:

VPN Now, again, here is this concept that the teacher
is endeavoring to give us. He repeats this:

338 THROUGH THE CURTAIN

go to my Father,’ he is saying, in effect, ‘I will
arise and go forth on the journey from the
domination of substance and material things to
the reality of the life or spirit.’ And, on the way,
as he departs from the country of material
domination and has not yet arrived at the realiza-
tion of life or spirit, he goes into a kind of no-
man’s land where there is a lack. He is at that
kind of neutral point; the disciple often needs to
go forward on his journey to an understanding
of the life behind the form, and in doing so he
will discover that he has not only gained the life,
but, also, the command of the form, and he will
be able to use the form world or material world
wisely and well because he can command it.”

VPN There is some bridging point here. I don’t know
what it is. The teacher says:

“Go out into the garden for a while and come
back and talk.”

VPN No, he will go on. He wants to make another
thoughtform.

SK What is the other thoughtform?

VPN I think it’s a garden. There are columns of beau-
tiful stone. Kind of violet colored stone. No, it isn’t, it’s
light. And the students—I think we have to go in again
and talk. Our teacher will talk.

There are two globes. One is the globe of scintillating
crystal light, like clear water with the sunlight sparkling
on it. And there is another globe of a kind of milky solid
substance. It seems these are the two polarities Spirit and
Matter, Life and Form. And there is an attraction of these
two, one for the other. They move into each other — Life
and Form. The cosmic marriage of Life and Form. It is
very beautiful, like the creation of the universe.

CONSCIOUSNESS 339

This larger globe of scintillating light moves into the
other. The creative process begins. They are moving,
revolving globes of light and substance moving out all over
the room until the walls seem to move back and we find
ourselves looking at a kind of moving picture of the crea-
tion of the universe. Stars and suns and galaxies and
planets; there is a tremendous exhilaration and joy, a sense
of light and life and divinity, a great sense of beauty. Yes,
it’s a demonstration of the Song or Symphony of the
Universe. As if we were out in the Milky Way or some-
where. The teacher says:

“We must seek to understand this concept of
life and form; we must know the joy of the
creative process in the world of nature; knowing
this in our consciousness will give us the com-
mand over form.”

VPN He doesn’t use the word “power;” he says it is often
misused— perhaps the word “command” conveys more
clearly what he means. He says:

“Ordinarily, mankind is rather lost in the
wilderness of the world, surrounded by what ap-
pears to be to him a meaningless maze. But the
Disciple on the Path must see the order, and he
sees it simply by getting this new ‘habit of con-
sciousness’ —seeing the life behind the form.”

VPN _I think, perhaps, the concepts sort of dawn on one’s
consciousness and yet, I think, I don’t get it quite clearly,
Sire. The teacher says:

“Come again to class until you get it. Don’t be
discouraged if you haven't understood it all at
first.”

VPN And he says:

“Think on these things and they will rise in
your consciousness like the sun after the night.

340 THROUGH THE CURTAIN CONSCIOUSNESS 341
“Life go before you and follow after you. Let “Be quietly aware of this love at the heart of
life be the Shining Light that dawns into a new the universe that seeks and does all things for
day of consciousness. your growth and your safety and your develop-
“Know that you walk in life and light and ment. This love that seeks only your good without
peace. Dynamic peace — peace that is not stagna- ceasing.”
tion, but harmony—vital and moving life. For VPN This is the end of the class.

the true definition of peace is not stagnation —
the stagnation of no activity, but the true mean-
ing of peace is the dance of life in perfect har-
mony. Dynamic creativeness.

“War is disorder and confusion — disharmony
in the processes of the Universe.

“The state of peace is the state of dynamic and
symmetrical and orderly movement of life toward
creative ends.

“The end of disharmony is destruction.

I think we have to stay in the awareness of this great
light and power.

“The purpose of peace is new creation. To the Wayfarer
“And so, oh Disciples, go forth in peace —
knowing the true meaning of peace. You are a jewel in the Hand of God

“Walk softly in your inner consciousness that
you miss not this dawning of a new day in your
own Soul. When a new day has dawned in your
own Soul, also in that of other disciples, then also And though the polishing be not complete
will a new day dawn in the world of mankind.” You are beloved of God;

I gaze upon your beauty and behold
The many facets of the being that you are

VPN There is a great sense of deep joy, a sense of wor-
ship that is tremendous. This is an approach to an
understanding of the Love of God at the heart of the
universe. It’s very wonderful. The teacher says: So are we all jewels of consciousness

“Qh Disciples, let your hearts rest in the love Held lovingly with the Hand of God.
of the universe of God, the Father, the Spirit.
“There is conscious and Divine Love at the
heart of the universe and this love holds your life
and your development as dear and precious
beyond all words and all comprehension.

For all you are,

And ail you shall become
ABOUT THE AUTHORS

Dr. Neal, the poet, the writer, the dramatist and
student of the ancient wisdom teaching, had a wide
spectrum of interests since her youth, She was
graduated from Maryville College, Tennessee, ma-
joring in both chemistry and philosophy. In 1930,
she traveled to the Middle East where she taught
mathematics and sciences both in Beirut,
Lebanon, and Cairo, Egypt. During the Second
; World War she went to Oxford, England, and

Viola Petitt Neal, Ph.D, later to London University where she obtained her
doctorate in philosophy (Ph.D.). ,

‘In the mid-forties she came to Los Angeles and was the script writer for the
film The Picture of Dorian Gray. She founded with her husband the
Biometric Research Foundation, a psychological counselling service in 1950,
and since then, for over thirty years taught the ancient wisdum philosophy.
She collaborated with Dr. Karagulla in writing Breakthrough to Creatiuty—
Your Higher Sense Perception in 1967, and lectured on many campuses
throughout the State of California.

Since early childhood she was aware of herself as a disciple of one of the
Ashrams of the Spiritual Hierarchy, and of the joyous reality behind the world
of seeming. In her book of poetry Fragments of Expertence—A Spiritual

Journey, published in 1978, we find a pristine spiritual quality that transcends
the chaos and despair of our time. e

Dr. Karagulla is a neuropsychiatrist with a vast
medical background of research and practice in
four countries. She isin Who's Who of American
Women and is currently President of the Higher
Sense Perception Research Foundation, She re-
ceived her degree of Doctor of Medicine and
Surgery from the American University of Beirut,
Lebanon, in 1940, In 1948, she received her
diploma in psychological medicine from the Royal
College of Physicians of London, andin 1950, she —Shajica Karagulla, M.D.
became a member of the Royal College of Physicians of Edinburgh.

From 1947 to 1950 she was awarded the Walter Smith Kay Research
Fellowship in Psychiatry and the Lawrence McLaren Bequest by the Univer-
sity of Edinburgh, Scotland. She received a Research Fellowship in 1952-1956
from the Department of Neurology and Neurosurgery at McGill University
and the Montreal Neurological Institute, working as a consultant psychiatrist
with Dr, Wilder Penfield in evaluating and treating patients with psychical
hallucinations in temporal lobe epilepsy. Her research has been published in
medical journals,

Dr, Karagulla was Assistant Professor of Psychiatry at State University of
New York in 1957, and two years later she commenced her research on higher
sense perception. Much of this research, dealing with the energy fields and
their significance in health and disease, was published in her book
Breakthrough to Creativity — Your Higher Sense Percept 726%, The
book is now in its eleventh printing and has been translat clan:
dic, Ttalian and Danish languages, bed

In “The College of Healing,” we learn of
physicians who go for training and bring
back new concepts about various types of
healing. There is material on the vortices of
energy, or chakras, and the esoteric aspects
_ of embryology and physiology.

The lectures on science give a new concept
of light, as well as a new approach to tapping
the energy of the atom. Data is given on the
future use of crystals. Some of these concepts

are revolutionary and may be challenging for
the scientist.

Maybe you have been puzzled as to why
| your fellow men do not behave like yourself.

The discussion of planetary types may give
you a clue.

———
——

The section titled “Prevision” gives a
glimpse of what to expect on earth in the way
| of geological and social changes. But lest we
get too discouraged about present trends, the
.

information on “Consciousness” brings new
| awareness of our higher destiny.

Through the Curtain is thought-
| provoking, informative, illuminating—a
|

lighthouse to the reader and the student of
| the new age.

-----------------------------------------------

Introduction

Condensed Outline of the Constitution of Man

I
NIGHT CLASSES

Anticipation - a poem

Mechanics of Attending Night Classes
Duration 3; The Nature of Night Classes
and Their Effect on the Student 4; Viola
Petitt Neal’s Ability to Recall Another Stu-
dent’s Night Class 7.

II
EXTRASENSORY PERCEPTION

Reality a poem

Mechanics of Extrasensory Perception
Trance-mediumship 16; Telepathic Contact
with Space Intelligences 20; The Conscious
Disciple’s Contact with the Ashrams of the
Spiritual Hierarchy 21; Healing by Angelic
Korces 24; Overshadowing 27; Clear Seeing


33: Clairaudience 37; Telepathy 37; Pre-
cognition 38; Instant Clear Knowing 39;
The Beam 41; A Devic Incarnation in a
Human Form 43; Manner of Reading the
Akashic Records 50; Method of Contacting
Archetypal Ideas 58; Dimensions of Con-
sciousness 61; Geometrical Forms—The Key
to Tuning in on Specific Knowledge 64;
New Alignment of Centers in the Sixth
Sub-race and Sixth Root Race 66.

Eternal Flame - a poem

The Wesak Festival
The Wesak Festival, 1961, 70; Humanity
and the Three Spring Festivals of 1962, 73;
The June Festival of Humanity, 1962, 75;
Cleavage —the Keynote for the Wesak, 1962
76: The Wesak Ceremony as Perceived by
Viola Petitt Neal During Meditation 77.


ESOTERIC EMBRYOLOGY AND PHYSIOLOGY

Man - a poem
Fsoteric Embryology of the Centers (Chakras)
Esoteric Aspects of Physiology

1V
HEALING

Who is God a poem

Study of the Etheric Body in Different Centers
af the World


Various Types of Healing

Faith Healing 98; Healing the Astral Body
by Symbols or Ritual 99; Healing the
Etheric Body by Sound 99; Healing the
Mental Body 101.

Alignment of the Centers

Leaks 103.

Photographing the Etheric
The Astral Body of Disciples on the Path

Hot Flashes 112.

The College of Healing

Angelic Forces, the Third Aspect of Healing
132; Chapel of the Union of Life and Form

Halls of the Sun - a poem
Healing by Sound, Form and Color

Herbal and Natural Remedies Compared to
Synthetic Drugs 140.

Adjustment of the Different Bodies in Disciples

‘The Effect of Man’s Emotions on Nature’s

Upheavals

Summary of Correspondences

V
CRYSTALS

Illumination - a poem
Crystals A Source of Energy

Vhirty-two Crystalline Forms - the Key Pattern



The Therapeutic and Scientific Uses of Crystals

The Use of Crystals for Lighting

VI
SCIENCE

How Far? - a poem
Man -— Life— Form — Light

The Book of the Universe —Correspondences in
Patterns of Energy

Origin of Magnetism

The Neutron

Time and Space

Esoteric Concept of Matter and Energy

The Hymn of Isis

Vil
EDUCATION IN THE FUTURE

The Book of Life - a poem

Ritual and Consciousness and Their Effect on
Education

The Purpose and Future Methods of Education

VII
PLANETARY TYPES

Halls of the Sun - a poem

Planetary Types and Their Psychological
Patterns



The Plutonian Control of Earth Humanity

How and When the Planetary Types Came to
the Planet Earth

Psychology of the Future

Thoughtforms of Planetary Types

IX
PREVISION

The New Age ~ a poem

Symbols of Ancient Egypt

The Relationship of Light to Gold

The Crystal Temple of the Torch
Vortices of Good and Evil on the Planet
Centers of World Upheaval

The Temple of the Records

Earth Changes— 1962-2000

Changes in the Physical Appearance of the
Planet 267; Human Society 268;Cosmic
Energies and Their Effect on the Planet
Earth 273; Communication of the Will
Energy 277; Frequency Band of Ex-
periences 279.

Panoramic View of Current Events— 1972
‘The Five Masters of the Black Lodge 282;
The First Black Master 283; The Second
Black Master 286; The Third Black Master
247; ‘The Fourth Black Master 288; The
Filth Black Master 289.

Vhe Universal Alphabet


CONSCIOUSNESS

The Tapestry of the Soul - a poem
Reincarnation

Meditation

New Developments in Consciousness
The Creative Process

Chaos and Order

Consciousness of the Human Race, by the
Manu

The Effect of Love on Consciousness
Radiatory State of the Planet Earth

Why Humanity is the Fourth Creative
Hierarchy

The World of Meaning— Plan and Purpose

Department of the Manu— Life, Form and
Consciousness

Art and Architecture
The Great Mustcian - a poem

Substance and Spirit—A New Habit of
Consciousness